Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 418

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL

7302 INTELLIGENT SERVICES
ACCESS MANAGER FD
RELEASE 5.x

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL

3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA

Issue: 09

September 2017

Nokia — Proprietary and confidential
Use pursuant to applicable agreements

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL

Nokia is a registered trademark of Nokia Corporation. Other products and company
names mentioned herein may be trademarks or tradenames of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. No responsibility is
assumed for inaccuracies contained herein.
© 2016-2017 Nokia.
Contains proprietary/trade secret information which is the property of Nokia and must
not be made available to, or copied or used by anyone outside Nokia without its
written authorization. Not to be used or disclosed except in accordance with
applicable agreements.

2 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL

Table of contents
1 Preface...........................................................................................23
1.1 Scope ........................................................................................................23
1.2 Applicable Releases ..................................................................................23
1.3 Related Documents ...................................................................................23
1.4 Audience....................................................................................................23
1.5 Assumed Knowledge.................................................................................23
1.6 Special Information....................................................................................24
1.6.1 Procedures with options or substeps.........................................................24
2 General ..........................................................................................27
2.1 Requirements ............................................................................................27
2.2 Initial Site Survey.......................................................................................28
2.3 Installation Tools........................................................................................28
3 Unpacking and Inspection ...........................................................31
3.1 Shipped Equipment ...................................................................................31
3.1.1 Subracks....................................................................................................31
3.1.2 Fan Units ...................................................................................................31
3.1.3 Separate Kits and Parts.............................................................................31
3.2 Parts List....................................................................................................31
3.3 Recommended Tools ................................................................................32
3.4 Procedures ................................................................................................32
3.5 Transport Bracket ......................................................................................34
4 Floor Preparation..........................................................................37
4.1 Introduction................................................................................................37
4.2 General......................................................................................................37
4.3 Parts List....................................................................................................38
4.4 Recommended Tools ................................................................................38
4.5 Procedures ................................................................................................39
5 Installing Racks ............................................................................45
5.1 Introduction................................................................................................45
5.2 Parts List....................................................................................................45
5.3 Recommended Tools ................................................................................45
5.4 Procedures ................................................................................................46
6 Mounting Rack Equipment ..........................................................51
6.1 Introduction................................................................................................51
6.2 Equipment Overview .................................................................................51
6.3 Rack Configurations ..................................................................................52
6.3.1 Rack Configurations with 7302 FD Subrack 3FE 26685 AAAL .................52
6.3.2 Rack Configurations with 7302 FD Subrack 3FE 26685 AACL.................55
6.4 Configuration limitations ............................................................................57
6.4.1 One FD-LT Subrack in One Rack..............................................................57
6.4.2 Two FD-LT Subracks in One Rack............................................................57
6.4.3 Three FD-LT Subracks in One Rack .........................................................57
6.4.3.1 Configuration A..........................................................................................57

Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 3

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL

6.4.3.2 Configuration B..........................................................................................58
6.4.3.3 Configuration C..........................................................................................59
6.4.3.4 Configuration D..........................................................................................60
6.4.3.5 Configuration E..........................................................................................61
6.4.3.6 Configuration F ..........................................................................................61
6.4.3.7 Configuration G .........................................................................................62
6.5 Mounting a 7302 FD Subrack....................................................................63
6.5.1 Parts List....................................................................................................63
6.5.2 Recommended Tools ................................................................................63
6.6 Mounting the Fan Unit ...............................................................................66
7 Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks............................71
7.1 Introduction................................................................................................71
7.2 Cabinet Overview ......................................................................................71
7.3 FD Rack Extension....................................................................................76
7.3.1 Additional Mounting Considerations ..........................................................77
7.3.2 Additional Cabling Considerations.............................................................77
7.3.3 Parts List....................................................................................................77
7.3.4 Recommended Tools ................................................................................78
7.4 XD Rack Extension....................................................................................78
7.4.1 Parts List....................................................................................................79
7.4.2 Recommended Tools ................................................................................79
7.5 UD Combo Rack Extension.......................................................................87
7.5.1 Parts List....................................................................................................88
7.5.2 Recommended Tools ................................................................................88
7.6 UD Rack Extension ...................................................................................95
7.6.1 Parts List....................................................................................................96
7.6.2 Recommended Tools ................................................................................96
8 Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AAAL .........101
8.1 Introduction..............................................................................................101
8.2 Safety Precautions ..................................................................................102
8.3 Power Cabling for 7302 FD Subrack .......................................................102
8.3.1 General....................................................................................................102
8.3.1.1 Power Distribution Frame ........................................................................102
8.3.1.2 External Ground ......................................................................................103
8.3.1.3 Cable Routing..........................................................................................103
8.3.1.4 Two-Wire Configuration...........................................................................103
8.3.2 Power Unit ...............................................................................................104
8.3.3 Internal Power Cabling ............................................................................106
8.3.3.1 Power Monitor Cable ...............................................................................106
8.3.3.2 BAT A/BAT B Cable ................................................................................107
8.3.4 External Power Cabling ...........................................................................109
8.3.4.1 Cable Type ..............................................................................................109
8.3.4.2 Power Cable Routing and Connection ....................................................110
8.3.5 Power Filter .............................................................................................112
8.4 Subrack Grounding Connection ..............................................................113
8.4.1 External Grounding Connection ..............................................................114
8.4.1.1 Cable Type ..............................................................................................114
8.4.1.2 Cable Routing and Connection................................................................114

4 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL

8.4.2 Internal Grounding Connection................................................................115
8.4.2.1 Cable Type ..............................................................................................115
8.4.2.2 Cable Routing and Connection................................................................115
8.5 Rack Grounding Connection ...................................................................116
8.6 Alarm Cabling ..........................................................................................117
8.6.1 Rack Alarm Cable....................................................................................117
8.6.1.1 Routing and Fixing the Rack Alarm Cable...............................................118
8.6.2 Subrack Alarm Cable...............................................................................119
8.6.2.1 Cable Type ..............................................................................................120
8.6.2.2 Cable Routing and Connection................................................................120
8.6.3 Rack Alarm Extension .............................................................................120
8.6.4 Fuse Alarm for 7302 FD Subrack ............................................................122
8.6.4.1 From Fast-on on Backpanel to Circuit Breaker .......................................122
8.6.4.2 Between Circuit Breakers ........................................................................123
8.6.5 Door Alarm ..............................................................................................123
8.6.6 External Alarm Cable...............................................................................125
8.6.6.1 Cable Type ..............................................................................................125
8.6.6.2 Connector Pinning ...................................................................................125
8.6.6.3 Cable Routing Connection.......................................................................128
8.7 Clock Daisy Chaining ..............................................................................129
8.7.1 Daisy Chaining Cable ..............................................................................130
8.7.2 Clock Daisy Chaining ..............................................................................130
9 Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AACL .........133
9.1 Introduction..............................................................................................133
9.2 Safety Precautions ..................................................................................134
9.3 Power Cabling for 7302 FD Subrack .......................................................134
9.3.1 General....................................................................................................134
9.3.1.1 Power Distribution Frame ........................................................................134
9.3.1.2 External Ground ......................................................................................135
9.3.1.3 Cable Routing..........................................................................................135
9.3.1.4 Two-Wire Configuration...........................................................................135
9.3.2 Power Unit ...............................................................................................136
9.3.3 Internal Power Cabling ............................................................................137
9.3.4 External Power Cabling ...........................................................................139
9.3.4.1 Cable Type ..............................................................................................139
9.3.4.2 Power Cable Routing and Connection ....................................................140
9.3.5 Power Filter .............................................................................................142
9.4 Subrack Grounding Connection ..............................................................143
9.4.1 External Grounding Connection ..............................................................143
9.4.1.1 Cable Type ..............................................................................................143
9.4.1.2 Cable Routing and Connection................................................................144
9.4.2 Internal Grounding Connection................................................................144
9.4.2.1 Cable Type ..............................................................................................145
9.4.2.2 Cable Routing and Connection................................................................145
9.5 Rack Grounding Connection ...................................................................145
9.6 Alarm Cabling ..........................................................................................146
9.6.1 Rack Alarm Extension .............................................................................146
9.6.2 Door Alarm ..............................................................................................147
9.6.3 External Alarm Extension ........................................................................148

Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 5

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL

9.6.3.1 Cable Type ..............................................................................................149
9.6.3.2 Connector Pinning ...................................................................................149
9.6.3.3 Cable Routing Connection.......................................................................150
9.7 Clock Daisy Chaining ..............................................................................152
9.7.1 Daisy Chaining Cable ..............................................................................153
9.7.2 Clock Daisy Chaining ..............................................................................153
10 Installing Boards.........................................................................155
10.1 Introduction..............................................................................................155
10.2 Subrack Areas and Slot Positions ...........................................................155
10.2.1 7302 FD Subrack.....................................................................................156
10.2.2 FD non-MTA Splitter Subrack..................................................................158
10.3 Dummy Front Panels...............................................................................159
10.4 Restrictions on Board Combinations .......................................................160
10.4.1 Restriction on combining GPON LT boards and DSL LT boards in
the same subrack ....................................................................................160
10.4.2 Supported Mixed LT/Splitter Configurations............................................160
10.5 Recommended Tools ..............................................................................161
10.6 Guideline for Board Installation ...............................................................161
10.7 Installation Procedures ............................................................................167
10.7.1 5mm Stiffener ..........................................................................................170
11 Fiber Optic Cable Management .................................................185
11.1 Introduction..............................................................................................185
11.2 Fiber Optic Handling and Acceptance Criteria ........................................185
11.2.1 General....................................................................................................185
11.2.2 Handling considerations ..........................................................................186
11.2.3 Acceptance criteria for fiber optic device inspections..............................188
11.2.3.1 Acceptance criteria ..................................................................................188
11.2.4 Fiber optic jumper cable care ..................................................................191
11.2.5 Inspection of fiber optic devices ..............................................................191
11.3 Managing Fiber Optic Cables for NT Boards and NTIO Boards..............195
11.3.1 Optic modules..........................................................................................196
11.3.2 Fiber cables .............................................................................................196
11.4 Managing Fiber Optic Cables for LT Boards ...........................................199
11.4.1 Optic modules..........................................................................................200
11.4.2 Fiber Management Kit .............................................................................200
11.4.2.1 Fiber capacity limitations (for single fibers only)......................................201
11.4.3 Fiber cable types .....................................................................................203
11.4.3.1 General....................................................................................................203
11.4.3.2 Breakout cable (NELT-B and FELT-B only) ............................................203
11.4.3.3 Fiber with angled connector ....................................................................205
11.4.3.4 Rack Door Extension...............................................................................205
11.4.4 Routing Fiber Optic Cables from LT Boards............................................209
12 MDF Cabling................................................................................217
12.1 Introduction..............................................................................................218
12.1.1 Overview..................................................................................................218
12.1.2 Cables .....................................................................................................218
12.2 General Information and Cable Routing Guidelines ................................218
12.2.1 Labeling ...................................................................................................219

6 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL

12.2.2 Routing Inside the Rack ..........................................................................219
12.2.3 Routing to the MDF .................................................................................219
12.2.4 MDF Cable Length ..................................................................................219
12.2.5 MDF Cabling Guidelines..........................................................................221
12.2.6 Handling Baillocks ...................................................................................224
12.3 Procedures ..............................................................................................230
12.3.1 Procedure for 7302 FD-Combo ...............................................................230
12.3.2 Procedures for 7302 FD-LT and FD Splitter Subracks............................231
12.3.3 Procedures for 7302 FD-LT equipped with 72-line Boards Only .............231
12.3.4 MDF Cables for Subracks Equipped with POTS LT Boards ...................231
12.4 Interconnection Cabling in Rack with 7302 FD-Combo Subrack
(48-line) ...................................................................................................231
12.4.1 Cable Type ..............................................................................................232
12.4.2 Number of MDF Cables...........................................................................233
12.4.3 Connection/Locking .................................................................................234
12.4.4 Cabling Diagram......................................................................................234
12.4.5 Parts List..................................................................................................235
12.5 Interconnection Cabling in Rack with 7302 FD-Combo Subrack
(72-line) ...................................................................................................236
12.5.1 Cable Type ..............................................................................................237
12.5.2 Number of MDF Cables...........................................................................238
12.5.3 Connection/Locking .................................................................................239
12.5.4 Recommended Tools ..............................................................................239
12.5.5 Cabling Diagram......................................................................................239
12.5.6 Parts List..................................................................................................240
12.6 POTS and LINE Cabling (2x24-pair) for 7302 FD-Combo Subrack
(48-line) ...................................................................................................241
12.6.1 POTS and LINE Cabling for 7302 FD-Combo Subracks equipped
with LT Boards and Splitter Boards .........................................................241
12.6.1.1 Cable Type ..............................................................................................242
12.6.1.2 Number of MDF Cables...........................................................................243
12.6.1.3 Connection/Locking .................................................................................244
12.6.1.4 Cabling Diagram......................................................................................245
12.6.1.5 Parts List..................................................................................................246
12.6.2 POTS and LINE Cabling for 7302 FD Subracks equipped with
NALS-x Boards........................................................................................250
12.6.2.1 Cable Type ..............................................................................................250
12.6.2.2 Number of Cables....................................................................................250
12.6.2.3 Connection/Locking .................................................................................251
12.7 POTS and LINE Cabling (96-pair) for 7302 FD-Combo Subrack (48-
line)..........................................................................................................258
12.7.1 Cable Type ..............................................................................................259
12.7.2 Number of MDF Cables...........................................................................260
12.7.3 Connection/Locking .................................................................................261
12.7.4 Cabling Diagram......................................................................................261
12.7.5 Parts List..................................................................................................262
12.8 POTS and LINE Cabling for 7302 FD-Combo Subrack (72-line) ............266
12.8.1 Cable Type ..............................................................................................266
12.8.2 Number of MDF Cables...........................................................................266

Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 7

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL

12.8.3 Connection/Locking .................................................................................267
12.8.4 Recommended Tools ..............................................................................267
12.8.5 Cabling Diagram......................................................................................268
12.8.6 Parts List..................................................................................................268
12.9 Intra-rack Cabling Between FD Splitter Subrack and 7302 FD-LT
Subrack (48-line) .....................................................................................272
12.9.1 Cable Type ..............................................................................................272
12.9.2 Number of Intra-rack Cables ...................................................................276
12.9.3 Connection/Locking .................................................................................277
12.9.4 Cabling Diagram for 3FE 27677 AA ........................................................277
12.9.5 Parts List..................................................................................................277
12.9.6 Cabling Diagram for 3FE 29916 BP ........................................................278
12.9.7 Parts List..................................................................................................279
12.9.8 Cabling Diagram for 3FE 29916 CC........................................................281
12.9.9 Parts List..................................................................................................282
12.10 Intra-rack Cabling Between FD Splitter Subrack and 7302 FD-LT
Subrack (72-line) .....................................................................................284
12.10.1 Cable Type ..............................................................................................284
12.10.2 Number of Intra-rack Cables ...................................................................285
12.10.3 Connection/Locking .................................................................................285
12.10.4 Recommended Tools ..............................................................................285
12.10.5 Cabling Diagram......................................................................................286
12.10.6 Parts List..................................................................................................286
12.11 POTS and LINE Cabling in Rack with FD Splitter Subrack and
7302 FD-LT Subrack (48-line) .................................................................287
12.11.1 FD Splitter Boards ...................................................................................287
12.11.2 Cable Type ..............................................................................................288
12.11.3 Number of MDF Cables...........................................................................289
12.11.4 Connection/Locking .................................................................................289
12.11.5 Cabling Diagram......................................................................................290
12.11.6 Parts List..................................................................................................290
12.12 POTS and LINE Cabling in Rack with FD Splitter Subrack and
7302 FD-LT Subrack (72-line) .................................................................296
12.12.1 72-line FD Splitter Boards .......................................................................296
12.12.2 Cable Type ..............................................................................................297
12.12.3 Number of MDF Cables...........................................................................297
12.12.4 Connection/Locking .................................................................................298
12.12.5 Recommended Tools ..............................................................................298
12.12.6 Cabling Diagram......................................................................................298
12.12.7 Parts List..................................................................................................299
12.13 MDF Cabling in Rack with 7302 FD-LT Subrack (72-line).......................303
12.13.1 Cable Type ..............................................................................................304
12.13.2 Number of MDF Cables...........................................................................305
12.13.3 Recommended Tools ..............................................................................306
12.13.4 Cabling Diagram......................................................................................306
12.13.5 Parts List..................................................................................................307
12.14 Intra- and Inter-Shelf Cabling for Subracks equipped with POTS
and ISDN LT Boards ...............................................................................308
12.14.1 48-line POTS LT boards and 48-line FD Splitter boards .........................308

8 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09

..1 Nomenclature .........................383 16..........................................................2 Intra-Shelf Up-down Cable ..2..............................2 Legend....368 15...................367 15............................1 NELT-B................3..............334 13.......3 48-line POTS LT boards and 72-line FD splitter boards.................................................................................................................................2 Installing Doors..............2 24-line ISDN BA LT boards and 48-line FD splitter boards .......................................3......................................................................................................14............................................................360 14...........7..................................3.............................336 14 Installing Side Plates and Door ................1 Introduction....2.......................................14.....................................................1 E1 Configuration Considerations............................334 13.372 15..................4..............322 12................333 13...14................3 Required Tools ...........2 Equipment ............1 Introduction....................................................................369 15.......................................3 E1 interconnection cable ..............................................................1 Intra-subrack Up-up Cable ................367 15.14.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 12....................................................................1 Door Types .................................315 12..................................................................14...............5 72-line POTS LT boards and 72-line FD splitter boards.......383 16.......................................2 Cables ...........325 12..333 13................4.....................................2 RJ45 E1 interface .........................357 14...............14..361 15 E1 Cabling ..14......................359 14............................................................14......................14...................................14..................1 E1 cable with straight RJ45 connector ..........................1....2 E1 splitter cable ........................3.2 Installing Side Plates ......................................................313 12...........................................309 12.................................358 14.............1.......358 14.......................................................2 Key Lock Kit........4.....2.................14.2....3 Intra-Rack Up-down Cable 3FE 60322 xx ....................1....................317 12.....................................................3..........................................2.................................................................371 15..............1 Cables ...........................14............1 Introduction.......2 NIAT-A and NSLT-D.......1 QSFP cable ..........4 Installing Key Lock...................1..........................................................373 15......4 Intra-Rack Up-down Cable 3FE 60323 xx .....................................................360 14............................3 Installing Doors...............................4...................................................335 13..............2 VP configuration modes .................370 15.................1 Introduction......................................369 15..............................................................328 12.......373 15......................1................................................2 E1 cable with angled RJ45 connector .............................................374 16 Wiring Lists for MDF Cable Connectors ...............................................................................................4 48-line POTS LT boards and 96-line FD splitter boards.........361 14................2...367 15.4 Installation Procedure.........6 72-line POTS LT boards and 48-line FD splitter boards.........367 15...................................................................................................4.....4.............................319 12...................................1 Open-ended E1 cable...1...383 16.......................4....................370 15..............................................................................357 14....................361 14..............315 12...............2............................................................384 Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 9 ......1 E1 SFP interface .............4.......................................2 Cable routing ................................................7................................3 Cabling Procedures ....................2.......7 72-line Combined POTS/Splitter LT boards ........................328 12.............................................3 Cabling Procedures .........357 14........................................320 12...............................1 Cable Colors..............................................330 13 Vectoring Cabling ................

..................................................................................................................................................4 LOM Connector on NT ..............3............................................... HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 16..................................................................2......9 Wiring List for 48-line Intra-rack Cables with CHAMP100 Connector and Two Metral-HDXS-24 Cable Connectors...................414 17....................................................409 17...................1 Connector Pinning .................................7 Wiring List for Metral-HDXS-72 Cable Connector .............................................2 CRAFT Connector on NT ..3 Wiring List for CHAMP50 MDF Cable ...............414 17......400 16..393 16.413 17......................................2 Connector Pinning on LT.....................................................410 17.....1 Connector Pinning on NT ..........8 Wiring List of Intra-rack Cables from 48-line Splitter to 2x24-line ISDN LT.................................................................................5.................................................................1 Introduction................3 BITS Connector .415 10 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 ...................................................................................2 Cable .........409 17........................387 16..............4 Wiring List for CHAMP100 MDF Cable ...........................................2 Cable ......................................................................414 17......4......................2.........................1 Connector Pinning ......3....2................................................390 16...........4.......................403 17 Connector Pinning .........................2 Line Number Designations ....................411 17.........................................384 16.410 17........................................411 17...............1 Connector Pinning ....................6 Wiring List for 24-line Intra-rack Cables ........................414 17.............................................................................................5 Wiring List for 48-line Intra-rack Cables .................................................................................384 16..........................................................................413 17.......3 Cable .....386 16.3...........................................5 E1 Connector(s) ..........................................409 17.....

.........................................................................................68 Figure 26 Captive Screws..................61 Figure 20 Three FD LT Subracks in one Rack: Configuration F...................................................................................................47 Figure 9 Concrete Floor Rack Fixing ..................................................60 Figure 19 Three FD LT Subracks in one Rack: Configuration E ...................................................................................................................37 Figure 4 Positioning Racks and Cutting Tiles for Cable Routing Left and Right of Rack .......66 Figure 24 Captive Screws................................................58 Figure 16 Three FD LT Subracks in one Rack: Configuration B ....................................................................43 Figure 7 Floor Drilling Pattern for Single Wall Mounted Rack ......................................37 Figure 3 Example of Floor Plan for Mixed Rack Configuration.......................................................................................................................69 7 Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks.......75 Figure 32 UD Rack 3EC 17482 AC .................82 Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 11 ............47 Figure 10 Raised Floor Rack Fixing ........................41 Figure 6 Floor Drilling Pattern for Row of Racks Back to Back .63 Figure 22 Mounting a 7302 FD Subrack 3FE 26685 AAAL in a Rack ............65 Figure 23 Mounting a 7302 FD Subrack 3FE 26685 AACL in a Rack.....................80 Figure 34 7302 FD Subrack Installed in XD Rack Configuration......................................................................51 Figure 12 Rack Configurations with FD Subracks Only........................................................................74 Figure 31 UD Rack 3FE 20145 AA.........72 Figure 29 FD Rack 3FE 20145 GA............................................................68 Figure 25 Fan Unit Handles........................62 Figure 21 Three FD LT Subracks in one Rack: Configuration G ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................71 Figure 28 FD Rack 3FE 28688 AA .............................................................................................69 Figure 27 Fan Unit Handles................................................................................................................81 Figure 35 7302 FD Power Cable Routing..................................45 Figure 8 Rack Anchors ..........................................54 Figure 14 Rack Configurations with FD Subracks Only...................................................8m).......48 Figure 11 Wall Drilling Pattern for Rack................................73 Figure 30 XD Rack 3FE 20145 AC....................................................................................................................................................................33 Figure 2 Transport bracket .........................................................59 Figure 17 Three FD LT Subracks in one Rack: Configuration C ..........................................................................................................40 Figure 5 Positioning SI Racks and Cutting Tiles for Cable Routing via Central Holes in Rack Bottom .......................................................................................53 Figure 13 Rack Configurations with FD Subracks (1...................................76 Figure 33 FD Subrack and XD Rack Fixing Positions ..........................................................................................................60 Figure 18 Three FD LT Subracks in one Rack: Configuration D ................................49 6 Mounting Rack Equipment ...................................56 Figure 15 Three FD LT Subracks in one Rack: Configuration A ............................................35 4 Floor Preparation........31 Figure 1 Unpacking Diagram ..........................................HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL List of figures 3 Unpacking and Inspection ........43 5 Installing Racks .......................82 Figure 36 7302 FD Power Connection .......................................................................

..........89 Figure 44 7302 FD Subrack Installed in UD Combo Rack Configuration ........86 Figure 42 XD Rack MDF Cable and Power Cable Routing in Vertical Cable Channel ............83 Figure 38 FD Subrack and XD Rack Fixing Positions .............................................................................................................108 Figure 62 BAT A/BAT B Cable Routing and Connection....................................................................................................................105 Figure 59 Power Monitor Cable Assembly .......................................................................................................................94 Figure 52 UD Combo Rack MDF Cable and Power Cable Routing in Vertical Cable Channel..............................108 Figure 63 External Power Cable..............................................................................117 Figure 73 Rack Alarm Cable...............98 Figure 54 7302 FD Power Connection ...........................................................................................................................111 Figure 66 Connecting the Power Cables ................................................................................................................................122 12 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 ............117 Figure 74 Rack Alarm Cable Connection ..........................85 Figure 40 Power Cable Routing..................................... HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 37 XD Rack MDF Cable and Power Cable Routing in Vertical Cable Channel ..........................................................................................................................................................................93 Figure 49 7302 FD Subrack Installed in UD Combo Rack Configuration ..............................................................95 Figure 53 Connect Power Cables to Power Module.................................................................101 Figure 55 Fast-on Bridge for Two-Wire Power Configuration................................................94 Figure 51 7302 FD Power Connection ........115 Figure 70 Subrack Grounding Cable .............................................91 Figure 48 FD Subrack and UD Combo Rack Fixing Positions ................................115 Figure 71 Internal Grounding.........................................120 Figure 78 Rack/Subrack Alarm Extension ...........................................................85 Figure 41 7302 FD Power Connection ............................................................113 Figure 68 External Grounding Cable ...............................................................................................89 Figure 45 Power Cable Routing............................90 Figure 46 Power Cable Connection.........................................98 8 Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AAAL ........................................................................................................................................................106 Figure 60 Power Monitor Cable Routing and Connection ................84 Figure 39 7302 FD Subrack Installed in XD Rack Configuration..........................................................................112 Figure 67 Mounting the Power Filter....................114 Figure 69 Subrack Grounding.......................................87 Figure 43 FD Subrack and UD Combo Rack Fixing Positions ...........................................................................103 Figure 56 Location of Fast-on Terminals on Backplane ................................................105 Figure 58 Safety Cover Labels .107 Figure 61 BAT A/BAT B Cable ...........................118 Figure 75 Fixing Positions of Rack Alarm Cable ........................................116 Figure 72 Rack Grounding Point ..............................119 Figure 76 Subrack Alarm Cable........93 Figure 50 Power Cable Routing.......................................................................................................................................110 Figure 64 Power Cable Routing Through the Left ...................................................................................................................90 Figure 47 UD Combo Rack MDF Cable and Power Cable Routing in Vertical Cable Channel...........120 Figure 77 Rack/Subrack Alarm Cable Routing and Connection..................................................................................................................................................................................................104 Figure 57 7302 FD Subrack Power Unit .........................................................121 Figure 79 Fuse Alarm Cable..................................................................................122 Figure 80 Fuse Alarm Cable from Backpanel to Circuit Breaker ...110 Figure 65 Power Cable Routing Through Bottom of the Subrack..........................................................

..................138 Figure 96 Cable 3FE 62346 AC...........................124 Figure 86 Door Alarm Cable Routing.................................................................149 Figure 111 Sub-D 15-pins Male Connector ........................157 Figure 120 Slot Positions in 7302 FD subrack equipped with combined LT/splitter boards (with NT redundancy) ........................................................153 Figure 115 Clock daisy chaining...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................146 Figure 108 Rack/Subrack Alarm Extension .........................HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 81 Fuse Alarm Connectors on BPA...................................144 Figure 104 Subrack Grounding........................................................................................................................................................................................................................142 Figure 102 Mounting the Power Filter..................................160 Figure 124 Supported Board Combinations .....................................................................139 Figure 98 External Power Cable........................133 Figure 92 Fast-on Bridge for Two-Wire Power Configuration..........................................................130 Figure 91 Clock daisy chaining....129 Figure 90 Daisy chaining cable.144 Figure 105 Subrack Grounding Cable ............................................................................................147 Figure 109 Door Alarm Connectors on the Backplane ..............................149 Figure 112 External Alarm Cable Connection .........................156 Figure 118 Slot Positions in 7302 FD-Combo (with NT redundancy) ............................152 Figure 114 Daisy chaining cable...........................................................................................................159 Figure 123 Universal Plastic Cut-out ........................136 Figure 94 7302 FD Subrack Power Unit ...................................................................................................................................154 10 Installing Boards..148 Figure 110 Cable 3FE 27753 AA.....................................................................................................158 Figure 121 Slot Positions in 7302 FD subrack equipped with combined LT/splitter boards (no NT redundancy).............................................123 Figure 83 Fuse Alarm Cable between Circuit Breakers...............................125 Figure 87 Cable 3FE 27753 AA......125 Figure 88 Sub-D 15-pins Male Connector ...141 Figure 100 External Power Interface on Backpanel ..............................158 Figure 122 Areas and Slot Positions in FD non-MTA Splitter Subrack................................................................................................................................145 Figure 106 Internal Grounding................138 Figure 97 Internal Battery Cable Routing and Connection .......................................................................................................123 Figure 84 Door Alarm Cable ..................................................124 Figure 85 Door Alarm Connectors on the Backplane ......................................................................................................................123 Figure 82 Fuse Alarm Cable...................................................................................137 Figure 95 Cable 3FE 62346 AB....................156 Figure 117 Slot Positions in 7302 FD-LT (no NT redundancy)..............................................................................................................................................................141 Figure 101 Connecting the External Power Cables.....................................................145 Figure 107 Rack Grounding Point .........................157 Figure 119 Slot Positions in 7302 FD-Combo (no NT redundancy) ..............................................................................................140 Figure 99 External Power Cable Routing .................................................................................125 Figure 89 External Alarm Cable Connection ..........................................................................................................161 Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 13 .....................................................................................131 9 Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AACL .......................151 Figure 113 External Alarm Cable Connection .................................143 Figure 103 External Grounding Cable ...................135 Figure 93 Location of Fast-on Terminals on Backplane ........155 Figure 116 Slot Positions in 7302 FD-LT (with NT redundancy) ....................................

.............167 Figure 131 ESD Awareness Symbol ..............................198 Figure 148 Dimensions of Routing Area in the Vertical Fiber Tray...........................................................162 Figure 126 Pull back the ejector handles........................................................................................................204 Figure 152 Cable Length Denomination Combinations ..............210 Figure 159 Routing Fiber Optic Cables from LT Boards....228 14 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 ........169 Figure 133 Fixation Screws .....................................................207 Figure 155 Fiber Bend Control ..........................................................................................................................210 Figure 158 Fiber management kit 3FE 71136 AA ...................201 Figure 151 Optical breakout cable for NELT-B and FELT-B ....................................................166 Figure 130 Fasten the upper fixation screw.....201 Figure 150 Fiber Bend Control Element ......................................223 Figure 165 Baillocks .197 Figure 147 Protective Brushes in the Vertical Fiber Tray ..................................................................................................................................................................173 Figure 138 NT Slots in 7302 FD Subrack .......185 Figure 143 Parts of a fiber optic cable ....176 Figure 140 Installing LT Boards in 7302 FD Combo Subrack ..........................226 Figure 168 Lock the Baillock..........164 Figure 128 Lock the ejector handles.......189 Figure 146 Bottom Fiber Management ............................................................182 11 Fiber Optic Cable Management ...............................................................................171 Figure 135 Position of 5 mm Stiffener ..................215 12 MDF Cabling..................................................................187 Figure 144 Single-mode end-face zones................168 Figure 132 Label for Earth Bonding Point....................................................................165 Figure 129 Fasten the lower fixation screw .............................220 Figure 163 MDF Cable Bend Control ....................................................................................................................................................206 Figure 154 Fiber Management ...........................174 Figure 139 Installing NT I/O Board in 7302 FD Subrack ..........................172 Figure 137 Tighten screw .........179 Figure 141 Installing Splitter Boards in 7302 FD Combo Subrack ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................214 Figure 161 Fiber routing example: top view............................................................................................................................................................... HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 125 Guide the board in its slot......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................171 Figure 136 Insert Stiffener ...............209 Figure 157 Tube for fibers ..............................................170 Figure 134 5mm Stiffener ...................................228 Figure 170 Lock/unlock Bottom Baillock on Splitter Board ...............................................................181 Figure 142 Installing Combined LT/Splitter Boards in 7302 FD Subrack .............189 Figure 145 Preferred condition of fiber optic end-face............................................................................................204 Figure 153 ETSI Rack Door Extender ....................................................................................................................225 Figure 167 Place Tool Behind Baillock .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................222 Figure 164 MDF Cable Bundle .........................................227 Figure 169 Lock/unlock Top Baillock on LT Board ..212 Figure 160 Fiber routing example: front view ...........................................................163 Figure 127 Push the board in place..................................198 Figure 149 Fiber Management Element ....................................................208 Figure 156 Top Fiber Management .....................................................217 Figure 162 MDF Cable Length Denomination Combinations ................225 Figure 166 Slotted Angled Screwdriver ......

...................276 Figure 210 Cabling for Intra-rack Cable 3FE 27677 AA .........260 Figure 198 7302 FD-Combo Subrack with 9 LT Boards and 9 Splitter Boards ........................................................................................................................................242 Figure 187 2x24-pair MDF Cable ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................234 Figure 178 Installing ADSL Interconnection Cables in 7302 FD-Combo Subrack ...............................................................................................................................285 Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 15 .......260 Figure 199 Installing 96-pair MDF Cables in 7302 FD-Combo Subrack.................238 Figure 182 7302 FD-Combo Subrack with 8 LT Boards and 8 Splitter Boards ..................................................250 Figure 192 7302 FD-Combo Subrack with 18 NALS-x Boards................277 Figure 211 Cabling for Intra-rack Cable 3FE 29916 BP ............................258 Figure 196 96-pair MDF Cable ...........................................................................235 Figure 179 7302 FD-Combo Interconnection Cabling ...................................244 Figure 190 Installing 2x24-pair MDF Cables in 7302 FD-Combo Subrack...........................240 Figure 186 POTS/LINE Cabling for 7302 FD-Combo subrack with 2x24-pair Cables .............................................233 Figure 175 7302 FD-Combo Subrack with 8 LT Boards and 8 Splitter Boards ......................................256 Figure 195 POTS/LINE Cabling for 7302 FD-Combo subrack with 96-pair Cables .........268 Figure 204 Installing 72-pair MDF Cables in 7302 FD-Combo Subrack.........................HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 171 Lock/unlock the Top Baillock of the LINE Connector ..........244 Figure 189 7302 FD-Combo Subrack with 9 LT Boards and 9 Splitter Boards ....................274 Figure 208 Intra-rack Cabling for Rack Configuration 3FE 29852 AA .............................................................................266 Figure 201 7302 FD-Combo Subrack with 8 LT Boards and 8 Splitter Boards ..............245 Figure 191 7302 FD-Combo Subrack with 16 NALS-x Boards..................................255 Figure 194 Position of Connectors for POTS Cables ........................282 Figure 213 Intra-rack Cable 3FE 60399 AA.........................................................................................................................................267 Figure 203 Screwdriver with Ball Hex Tip...................262 Figure 200 72-pair MDF Cable ..................................................................229 Figure 172 Lock/unlock the Top Baillock of the POTS Connector....230 Figure 173 Interconnection Cabling (48-line) in Rack with 7302 FD-Combo Subrack .....233 Figure 176 7302 FD-Combo Subrack with 9 LT Boards and 9 Splitter Boards ..234 Figure 177 Baillocks .........................259 Figure 197 7302 FD-Combo Subrack with 8 LT Boards and 8 Splitter Boards ........................271 Figure 206 Intra-rack Cable 3FE 27677 AA.......................268 Figure 205 Add an extra tie-wrap per slot..............................................................239 Figure 185 Installing ADSL Interconnection Cables in 7302 FD-Combo Subrack .............................................................................................................................................................................................251 Figure 193 Position of Connectors for LINE Cables ..........243 Figure 188 7302 FD-Combo Subrack with 8 LT Boards and 8 Splitter Boards ......239 Figure 184 Screwdriver with Ball Hex Tip......237 Figure 181 S-Cable (72-line) .....273 Figure 207 Intra-rack cable 3FE 29916 xx.....238 Figure 183 7302 FD-Combo Subrack with 9 LT Boards and 9 Splitter Boards ....................................................................................232 Figure 174 S-Shaped Interconnection Cable (48-line) .........................................................................236 Figure 180 Interconnection Cabling (72-L) in Rack with 7302 FD-Combo Subrack .......................................................................................................................................................279 Figure 212 Cabling for Intra-rack Cable 3FE 29916 CC..........................275 Figure 209 Intra-rack Cabling for Rack Configuration 3FE 29853 AA .................................................267 Figure 202 7302 FD-Combo Subrack with 9 LT Boards and 9 Splitter Boards ...............................

.....................327 Figure 253 Position 3FE 60320 AL................306 Figure 229 Installing MDF Cables in 7302 FD-LT Subrack ...................................................304 Figure 225 72-pair MDF Cable .............................316 Figure 240 Position 3FE 60320 AV .............................................................311 Figure 234 Position 3FE 61183 BJ .......305 Figure 226 7302 FD-LT Subrack with 16 LT Boards ......................................................................................................................................................................333 Figure 258 QSFP cable ...................................319 Figure 244 Cable 3FE 60322 BA......................................................................................................................................305 Figure 227 7302 FD-LT Subrack with 18 LT Boards .........319 Figure 245 Position 3FE 60322 xx...........................................................................................................................................................................299 Figure 223 Add an extra tie-wrap per slot........................334 Figure 259 Recommended configuration of a full vectoring shelf...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................321 Figure 247 Position 3FE 60323 xx............................337 16 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 ..................................................290 Figure 219 MDF Connectors on FD Splitter Board...................302 Figure 224 MDF Cabling (72-line) in Rack with 7302 FD-LT Subrack.........306 Figure 228 Screwdriver with Ball Hex Tip...............................................................325 Figure 251 Cable 3FE 60320 xx ...................................310 Figure 233 Position 3FE 61183 CC ..........................315 Figure 239 Cable 3FE 60320 AV.....320 Figure 246 Cable 3FE 60323 xx ....331 13 Vectoring Cabling .........318 Figure 242 Position 3FE 60321 AA .....................................................................288 Figure 218 Installing MDF Cables in FD splitter Subrack ..............................................................................................................330 Figure 257 Cabling between combined POTS/splitter board and MDF.................................................................................................................................326 Figure 252 Position 3FE 60320 BL.................................................................................................................................................313 Figure 237 Position 3FE 60320 CC ...................318 Figure 243 Cable 3FE 60322 AA........................................................................................336 Figure 261 Connect the MDF cables to the LINE connectors ................................329 Figure 256 Cabling between LT board and combined POTS/splitter board ...........................................297 Figure 221 Screwdriver with Ball Hex Tip.................................................................................................................................324 Figure 250 Position 3FE 60836 AL...........................................323 Figure 249 Position 3FE 60836 CC ...............................................................308 Figure 231 Cable routing for 3FE 29916 AL .......286 Figure 216 MDF Connectors on FD Splitter Board..........................................314 Figure 238 Position 3FE 60320 AP ..............................................................................317 Figure 241 Cable 3FE 60321 AA.........335 Figure 260 Recommended configuration of a full vectoring shelf.................312 Figure 235 Position 3FE 61183 AL............................309 Figure 232 Cable 3FE 61183 xx ......................................................288 Figure 217 96-pair MDF Cable ...................................... HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 214 Screwdriver with Ball Hex Tip........................................................322 Figure 248 Intra-rack Cable 3FE 60836 xx..307 Figure 230 Cable 3FE 29916 AL ..........................................................286 Figure 215 Intra-rack Cabling ..............................329 Figure 255 MDF Cable 3FE 60227 xx .............................................................................................328 Figure 254 S-cable 3FE 67369 AA ........................................................296 Figure 220 72-pair MDF Cable ..........................................298 Figure 222 Installing MDF Cables in FD splitter Subrack .................................................................................................................................................................................................................312 Figure 236 Cable 3FE 60320 xx .....

.......................................................................................361 Figure 285 Unscrew M16 Nut ................................................................................348 Figure 273 Connect the fourth QSFP cable....................................................................353 Figure 278 Connect the fifth QSFP cable .....352 Figure 276 Connect the third QSFP cable.........................................338 Figure 263 Connect the first QSFP cable ..............355 14 Installing Side Plates and Door .........359 Figure 282 Rotation Pin ......................................................................................................................................................................343 Figure 268 Connect the MDF cables to the LINE connectors ...........................351 Figure 275 Connect the second QSFP cable ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................376 Figure 301 Front view of fully cabled NELT-B in LT1 slot.......367 Figure 292 Open-ended E1 cable with straight RJ45 connector ...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................383 Figure 306 Metral-HDXS-72 Cable Connector ................................364 Figure 291 Tighten M16 Nut ..................................................................................................................363 Figure 289 Place Key Lock.........................379 Figure 305 Combined NIAT-A/NSLT-D configuration (maximum capacity)........................................................357 Figure 280 Mounting Right Side Plate of Universal Rack.....................................................................377 Figure 303 E1 RJ45 ports on front panel of NIAT-A (and NSLT-D).................................369 Figure 293 Open-ended E1 cable with angled RJ45 connector .......358 Figure 281 Mounting of Rack Door...............................344 Figure 269 Connect the MDF cables to the POTS connectors....................................................................354 Figure 279 All MDF and QSFP cables connected .382 16 Wiring Lists for MDF Cable Connectors .....345 Figure 270 Connect the first QSFP cable ........342 Figure 267 All QSFP cables connected..362 Figure 287 Remove M16 Nut from Key Lock......................................................360 Figure 284 Nomenclature ..............370 Figure 294 E1 splitter cable ......................375 Figure 299 Detailed view on E1 cables bundled together with straps ...........................................................................378 Figure 304 Stand-alone NIAT-A configuration (maximum capacity)................................................................................................353 Figure 277 Connect the fourth QSFP cable........373 Figure 298 Port labeling on front panel of NELT-B................................................................................................................................371 Figure 295 E1 interconnection cable .....................................................................341 Figure 266 Connect the fourth QSFP cable...........................362 Figure 286 Remove M16 Nut from Latch Lock ...................................................339 Figure 264 Connect the second QSFP cable .................365 15 E1 Cabling ....................................372 Figure 296 NELT-B 2E1-SFP Dimensioning ..................................................................360 Figure 283 Retractable Hinge Pin..............................375 Figure 300 Side view of fully cabled NELT-B in LT1 ........393 Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 17 .....................................................................347 Figure 272 Connect the third QSFP cable.............................................363 Figure 288 Key Lock Bushing.........376 Figure 302 Front view of fully cabled NELT-B in LT9 slot..............................340 Figure 265 Connect the third QSFP cable.........364 Figure 290 Place M16 Nut .........................................346 Figure 271 Connect the second QSFP cable ......349 Figure 274 Connect the MDF and first QSFP cable .......................................................................HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 262 Connect the MDF cables to the POTS connectors.................................................................373 Figure 297 NELT-B 2E1-SFPs Cabling view ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

.........................................................413 Figure 309 LOM Cable .....415 18 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .............................................................................................................................................................................411 Figure 308 BITS Cable ..................................... HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 17 Connector Pinning ................414 Figure 310 RJ45 Connector Pinning...................................................................409 Figure 307 CRAFT Cable ...................................................................

......259 Table 30 24-pair Bundle ...................................................................................................................................................................................HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL List of tables 6 Mounting Rack Equipment ..............................................................................................................................................................................................180 Table 17 Number of Boards .............247 Table 27 Number of 2x24-pair MDF Cables for Rack with 7302 FD Subrack with NALS-x Boards .....................2m rack .....................202 Table 21 Fiber Management Capacity per Subrack for FELT-x Boards............185 Table 18 Single-mode end-face inspection acceptance criteria ...........................202 Table 23 Fiber with angled connector ....................101 Table 8 External Power Connection Cables.................................................................................................................................................................51 Table 1 Overview of Rack Equipment ........................................................56 7 Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks.......202 Table 22 Fiber Management Capacity per Subrack for NGLT-x Boards..................................114 Table 10 External Alarm Cable......................................................................................54 Table 5 Rack Configurations with FD subracks only in 2....................52 Table 3 Rack Configurations with FD subracks in 1...........167 Table 15 Number of Boards ............................................................................................109 Table 9 Subrack Grounding Connection Cables ...........................252 Table 29 MDF Cables........................188 Table 19 Acceptable and unacceptable conditions for fiber optic end-faces................52 Table 2 Rack Configurations with FD subracks only in 2.......................................149 10 Installing Boards...........................................178 Table 16 Number of Boards ......................244 Table 26 Overview MDF Cabling for 7302 FD-Combo Subrack...............................................................217 Table 24 MDF Cables.............................127 9 Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AACL ........................71 Table 7 Mounting Kit 3FE 26689 AA ......................Line Number Distribution ......................................8 m rack ......................243 Table 25 Number of 2x24-pair MDF Cables for Rack with 7302 FD-Combo Subrack .................................55 Table 6 Subrack Mounting Positions ........................................................................250 Table 28 Overview MDF Cabling for 7302 FD Subrack with NALS-x Boards ..................190 Table 20 Fiber Management Capacity per Subrack for NELT-x Boards .......263 Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 19 ..................................205 12 MDF Cabling...........................................................................................260 Table 32 Overview MDF Cabling for 7302 FD-Combo Subrack......182 11 Fiber Optic Cable Management .260 Table 31 Number of 96-pair MDF Cables for Rack with 7302 FD-Combo Subrack ..............155 Table 13 Number of Boards ..........................................................96 8 Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AAAL ................................................................................133 Table 11 External Power Cable Descriptions ........................................53 Table 4 Subrack Mounting Positions .............................................................................................................................................................................................2m rack ..................................................................................139 Table 12 External Alarm Cable............................................................................158 Table 14 Applicable Procedures........

.....................297 Table 41 Overview 72-line MDF Cabling for 7302 FD-Combo Subrack.....................................300 13 Vectoring Cabling ..............393 Table 54 Wiring List for the 24-line CHAMP100 Connector ......................410 Table 61 BITS/DC Connector Pinning on the NANT-A board ...........................................................409 Table 59 NT Board Front Connectors ..............................403 Table 57 Wiring List for 24-line Metral-HDXS-24 Cable Connector B ...........................................407 17 Connector Pinning .................................................................409 Table 60 CRAFT Connector Pinning .................................................................412 Table 63 BITS/DC Connector Pinning on the NANT-E board ..........................................................267 Table 34 Overview 72-line MDF Cabling for 7302 FD-Combo Subrack.......................................................368 Table 45 Cable length of 3FE 67624 xx ...................................................................................................413 Table 66 LOM Connector Pinning .....................................Line Number Distribution ...370 16 Wiring Lists for MDF Cable Connectors .........................................................392 Table 53 Wiring List for Metral-HDXS-72 Cable Connector .................................................289 Table 38 Overview MDF Cables for Rack with one FD-SP and one FD-LT Subrack .....................................................................................................................................................................................412 Table 64 E1/T1 Connector Pinning on the FELT-B board........................385 Table 48 Wiring List for CHAMP100 MDF Cable (standard cross-talk).................................................................................413 Table 65 Cable wire colors ...................................411 Table 62 BITS/DC Connector Pinning on the NANT-D board .................384 Table 47 Wiring List for CHAMP50 MDF Cable ..................415 Table 68 1 RJ45/2 E1 to 2 RJ45/1 E1 Connector Pinning ........................................................................................................391 Table 52 Wiring List for CHAMP50 Connectors .................401 Table 55 Wiring List for the 48-line CHAMP100 Connector ................................................................................415 20 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .......................................................388 Table 50 Wiring List for CHAMP50 Connectors ............367 Table 44 E1 Cables ............................................402 Table 56 Wiring List for CHAMP100 Connector ..............................357 15 E1 Cabling ............414 Table 67 1 RJ45/2 E1 Connector Pinning ................283 Table 37 24-pair Bundle .............................................................................................383 Table 46 Cable Color Designations......................................................................................................................................................................................334 14 Installing Side Plates and Door ..........................................................................................................280 Table 36 Overview Intra-rack Cabling in Rack with 7302 FD Splitter and 7302 FD POTS Subrack.......................................................................333 Table 42 QSFP Cable Variants ......................................................269 Table 35 Intra-rack Cabling in Rack with 7302 FD Splitter and 7302 FD-LT Subrack ................................389 Table 51 Wiring List for CHAMP100 Connector ..292 Table 40 Overview 72-line MDF Cables for Rack with one FD-SP and one FD-LT Subrack .....................386 Table 49 Wiring List for CHAMP100 Connector ...................................................405 Table 58 Wiring List for 24-line Metral-HDXS-24 Cable Connector C....................................... HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Table 33 Number of 72-pair MDF Cables for Rack with 7302 FD-Combo Subrack ...................................................................................................................................................289 Table 39 Overview MDF Cabling for 7302 FD-Combo Subrack......................357 Table 43 Side Plate Fixing Items.............

....................................................................155 Procedure 23 Installing a Board..............................112 Procedure 20 Connecting the Rack Ground ................................................................................79 Procedure 15 Mounting a 7302 FD Subrack 3FE 26685 AACL in an XD Rack.........................................................146 10 Installing Boards..........................................................................................................24 Procedure 2 Example of required substeps in a procedure .....................................................................................................................67 Procedure 12 Mounting the Premium Fan Unit 3EC 37533 ND................................................................................133 Procedure 21 Connecting the Power Cables ...............................45 Procedure 8 Floor Mounting...............................180 Procedure 30 Installing Combined LT/Splitter Boards in 7302 FD Subrack .............................................................................69 7 Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks......................64 Procedure 11 Mounting the Standard Fan Unit 3EC 37533 NB.............31 Procedure 3 Unpacking.................................................................172 Procedure 26 Installing the NT Boards .............42 5 Installing Racks ........................................HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL List of procedures 1 Preface........92 Procedure 18 Mounting a 7302 FD Subrack in an UD Rack..........................................................................116 9 Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AACL .........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................173 Procedure 27 Installing an NT I/O Board .......................................................141 Procedure 22 Connecting the Rack Ground ...........168 Procedure 25 Removing the Stiffener ..........................48 6 Mounting Rack Equipment ...............................................................................................................................................................88 Procedure 17 Mounting a 7302 FD Subrack 3FE 26685 AACL in an UD Combo Rack ........25 3 Unpacking and Inspection ..51 Procedure 10 Mounting the First 7302 FD Subrack in a Rack.....................177 Procedure 29 Installing Splitter Boards in 7302 FD Subrack ........97 8 Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AAAL ..............................................37 Procedure 5 Marking the Rack Positions .......................................................................162 Procedure 24 Installing ESD Sensitive Boards ...................................83 Procedure 16 Mounting a 7302 FD Subrack 3FE 26685 AAAL in an UD Combo Rack ........................................................................................34 4 Floor Preparation............................................................................................39 Procedure 6 Cutting Tiles for Raised Floor Cabling.......................................................175 Procedure 28 Installing LT Boards in 7302 FD Subrack ................................101 Procedure 19 Connecting the Power Cables ........32 Procedure 4 Inspection .........................................................................................71 Procedure 13 Mounting a Second 7302 FD Subrack in an FD Rack...................23 Procedure 1 Example of options in a procedure ...................................46 Procedure 9 Wall Mounting..............................182 Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 21 ..................................................................................................................................78 Procedure 14 Mounting a 7302 FD Subrack 3FE 26685 AAAL in an XD Rack .......................................................................................42 Procedure 7 Floor Drilling for Rack Anchoring......................................................

.................................................................211 Procedure 38 Routing Optical Breakout Cables from NELT-B and FELT-B Boards....307 13 Vectoring Cabling ....................................................................................291 Procedure 53 POTS and LINE Cabling in Rack with FD Splitter Subrack (72-line)....337 Procedure 56 Connecting a VP board with four VLs to four SLV LT boards with one QSFP interface ......................................299 Procedure 54 MDF Cabling in 7302 FD-LT Subrack with 72-line LT Boards................227 Procedure 41 Installation and Removal of the POTS and LINE MDF Connectors ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................241 Procedure 44 2x24 MDF Cabling in 7302 FD-Combo Subrack ........................................194 Procedure 35 Routing Fiber Cables from NTs and NTIO ..........207 Procedure 37 Routing Fiber Cables from LTs........269 Procedure 48 Intra-rack Cabling with Cable 3FE 27677 AA ..................333 Procedure 55 Connecting a VP board with eight VLs to eight SLV LT boards with one QSFP interface ......263 Procedure 47 96 MDF Cabling in 7302 FD-Combo Subrack ..................279 Procedure 50 Intra-rack Cabling with Cable 3FE 29916 CC.............................................................................................................357 Procedure 58 Replacing a Latch Lock With a Key Lock .........................................................................................................193 Procedure 34 Clean the Fiber Optic Cable Connectors.............................................................................217 Procedure 39 Locking Baillocks using the Slotted Angled Screwdriver ..............213 12 MDF Cabling........................................................................................................................374 Procedure 60 Cabling a stand-alone NIAT-A ............................. HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Procedure 31 Installing Splitter Boards in an FD non-MTA Splitter Subrack .350 14 Installing Side Plates and Door .................................377 Procedure 61 Cabling a stand-alone NSLT-D .........235 Procedure 43 Interconnection Cabling in 7302 FD-Combo Subrack ............................183 11 Fiber Optic Cable Management ..............................................................................................................246 Procedure 45 2x24 MDF Cabling in 7302 FD Subrack equipped with NALS-x Boards ...................................................................379 Procedure 62 Connecting a NIAT-A with an NSLT-D board using (a maximum of) four E1 interconnection cables .......................185 Procedure 32 Inspection of fiber optic devices ...................344 Procedure 57 Connecting a VP board with eight VLs to a combination of SLV LT boards ........................381 22 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 ......................................................................................196 Procedure 36 Mounting the Fiber Management Elements........278 Procedure 49 Intra-rack Cabling with Cable 3FE 29916 BP ..........................................283 Procedure 51 Intra-rack Cabling with Cable 3FE 60399 AA ..........192 Procedure 33 Clean the Fiber Optic Receptacles.........................................................................................251 Procedure 46 96 MDF Cabling in 7302 FD-Combo Subrack .................226 Procedure 40 Installation and Removal of the DSL MDF Connector.........287 Procedure 52 POTS and LINE Cabling in Rack with FD Splitter Subrack ......................229 Procedure 42 Interconnection Cabling in 7302 FD-Combo Subrack .............................................................................367 Procedure 59 2E1-SFP Cabling on the NELT-B ..................................362 15 E1 Cabling .....................................................................................

2 Applicable Releases This edition of the hardware installation manual is applicable for R5. i. 1.3 Related Documents For more information about the 7302 ISAM. 1.01 onwards. refer to the: • System Description • 7302 ISAM Product Information • 7302 ISAM Safety Manual • Unit Data Sheets (UDS) • ISAM Glossary 1.e.5 Assumed Knowledge The reader must be a skilled installer of hardware equipment and have knowledge of general telecommunications principles.x. from R5.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Preface 1 Preface 1.6. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 23 .4 Audience This manual is intended for installers equipped with site drawings that show power sources and floor plans that show rack locations.1 Scope This manual describes the installation of the following equipment of the ETSI 7302 Intelligent Services Access Manager (ISAM): • 7302 Flexible Density (FD) subrack (NFXS-A) 1.

Preface HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL

1.6 Special Information
The following are examples of how special information is presented in this document.

Danger — Danger indicates that the described activity or
situation may result in serious personal injury or death; for
example, high voltage or electric shock hazards.

Warning — Warning indicates that the described activity or
situation may, or will, cause equipment damage or serious
performance problems.

Caution — Caution indicates that the described activity or
situation may, or will, cause service interruption.

Note — A note provides information that is, or may be, of
special interest.

1.6.1 Procedures with options or substeps
When there are options in a procedure, they are identified by letters. When there are
required substeps in a procedure, they are identified by Roman numerals.

Procedure 1 Example of options in a procedure
At step 1, you can choose option a or b. At step 2, you must do what the step indicates.

1 This step offers two options. You must choose one of the following:

a This is one option.

b This is another option.

2 You must perform this step.

24 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Preface

Procedure 2 Example of required substeps in a procedure
At step 1, you must perform a series of substeps within a step. At step 2, you must do what the
step indicates.

1 This step has a series of substeps that you must perform to complete the step. You must
perform the following substeps:

i This is the first substep.

ii This is the second substep.

iii This is the third substep.

2 You must perform this step.

Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 25

Preface HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL

26 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL General

2 General
2.1 Requirements

2.2 Initial Site Survey

2.3 Installation Tools

2.1 Requirements

Warning — Safety requirements.

Follow the safety guidelines described in the Safety Manual.

Note 1 — Possibility of damage to xDSL equipment.

xDSL equipment must be connected to Plain Old Telephone
Service (POTS) line circuits that meet the AC power surge
requirements of ITU-T K.44 and ETSI EN 300 386. Non-
compliant POTS line cards might not have the required
secondary surge protection or current limiting function during
specific, valid operating states. Connecting xDSL equipment to
non-compliant POTS line cards could damage xDSL
equipment.
Note 2 — EMC/ESD requirements.

Most ISAM plug-in units and powered equipment contain
devices susceptible to Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), which
can damage circuitry in unconnected conditions.
Follow the antistatic procedures when handling units.
Note 3 — Environmental requirements.

Ensure that the environmental conditions meet:
• ETSI EN 300 019-1-1 Class 1.1 for storage
• ETSI EN 300 019-1-2 Class 2.3 for transport (with exception
of rain on package)
• ETSI EN 300 019-1-3 Class 3.1E for CO deployment and
Class 3.3 for single shelf systems (extended to -40°C).

Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 27

General HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL

2.2 Initial Site Survey
Nokia recommends that a site survey be conducted prior to ordering installation
materials and to ensure a properly planned installation.
During the site survey, the following items have to be determined:
• The equipment rack locations (floor plan)
• The type of floor (normal or raised floor)
• Rack mounting requirements (anchoring from ceiling or floor)
• Required cable lengths for:
• Main Distribution Frame (MDF) cables (POTS, xDSL)
• Power cables from subrack to Battery Fused Distribution Panel (BFDP)
• Optical fiber cables (length of Network Termination (NT) cable runs)
• Miscellaneous cables
• Cable loading considerations
• The location of termination points and requirements for power and ground cables
between ISAM racks and BFDP (customer provided).
• Type of MDF termination blocks if not customer provided
• Auxiliary framing and overhead rack bracing.
This information must be communicated to Nokia

Warning — Risk of dangerous or harmful situation if no
appropriate materials are used.
This can cause death or serious physical harm to persons or
damage to equipment.
The Central Office (CO) power cables (-48 Vdc or -60 Vdc),
BATtery RETurn (BATRET) and Frame Ground (FG) must be
constructed from the appropriate materials and must meet or
exceed the standard CO specification.

2.3 Installation Tools
The following tools are required to install the ISAM system equipment:
• Safety glasses and ear protection
• Static protection accessories
• Rotary impact drill and associated drill bits
• Anchor setting tool
• Screwdrivers, standard (flat blade)
• Screwdrivers, Phillips
• Insulated trouble lamp
• Extension cord, 15 m

28 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL General

• Wrenches, M 10, open and box-end combination
• Socket set, M 10 drive with ratchet handle and extensions
• Lifting eye bolts, X4
• Carpenter's claw hammer
• Diagonal cutters
• Cable cutters
• Cable stripper
• Multistripper
• Pinch bar
• Nail puller
• Metal shears
• Common shears
• Measuring tape: 15 m
• Level, minimum 90 cm
• Chalk line and chalk
• Felt marking pens
• Small shop vacuum cleaner.

Special tools, required for a specific task, are listed in the corresponding installation
procedure.

Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 29

General HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL

30 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Unpacking and Inspection

3 Unpacking and Inspection
3.1 Shipped Equipment

3.2 Parts List

3.3 Recommended Tools

3.4 Procedures

3.5 Transport Bracket

3.1 Shipped Equipment
In general, the FD rack is shipped in horizontal position. It includes the subracks, the
fan units, the dust filter and the power and alarm cabling. Side plates and doors are
mounted on shipped racks.
Plug-in boards and MDF cables are shipped separately from the rack.

3.1.1 Subracks
The subrack can be shipped either mounted in the rack for predefined configurations
(refer to the 7302 ISAM Product Information for possible configurations), or as an
individual item for customer expansion beyond initial configuration.

3.1.2 Fan Units
The accompanying fan unit is shipped installed in the rack, but can also be shipped
as a separate unit for replacement.

3.1.3 Separate Kits and Parts
Cables, side plates, and optional doors are shipped as separate kits or units.

3.2 Parts List
Shipping crates(*) with FD equipment, either in a configuration or in separate kits, as
described in Shipped Equipment.

Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 31

The following equipment must be used for safe material- handling: a forklift truck. Keep all the inspection and packing documents for reference. 3.Unpacking and Inspection HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL (*): Crate dimensions for 2200 x 600 x 300 mm racks are 2270 mm x 700 mm x 400 mm. Photograph all the damaged crates. This must be a dry. Caution — Risk of damage to equipment caused by excessive shock or vibration. Be careful when moving the equipment. Procedure 3 Unpacking 1 Inspect the crates and the packaging for damage. 3. 3 If there is no damage. 2 If damaged. notify the transportation carrier and Nokiaimmediately. 32 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .4 Procedures Danger — Risk of personal injury or damage to equipment.3 Recommended Tools The following tools are recommended: • Safety glasses • Carpenter's claw hammer • Nail puller (or pinch bar or ripping chisel) • Metal shears • Common shears • Adjustable wrench • Pulleys and/or hoists. clean and dust-free area. place the crate on a level floor as near to the final installation location as possible. tackle and dolly. a lifting sling or block. Use extreme care and follow the standard safety precautions when operating the material-handling equipment.

Figure 1 Unpacking Diagram PLYWOOD CRATE MOISTURE VAPOR BAG TOP BACK END CARDBOARD BOX PACKING END STEEL BANDS BOTTOM FRONT 6 Cut the open moisture vapor barrier bag.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Unpacking and Inspection 4 Cut the steel banding around the crate using metal shears. Refer to the unpacking diagram of Figure 1. 7 Before removing the equipment from the crate. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 33 . with the shears and remove the packing and bracing material. 5 Carefully open the top of the crate. Take care not to damage the equipment. 8 Remove the equipment from the crate. 9 Dispose of the packing material as per local practice. if present. Danger — Risk of personal injury Take care to prevent the steel banding from recoiling when cut. check around the crate for parts that may have become loose during shipment. and raise the rack to a vertical position.

notify the transportation carrier and Nokia immediately. 34 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . 3. dirt and corrosion. 2 Inspect the equipment itself for damage.5 Transport Bracket The transport bracket is mounted on the universal rack to protect the door from damage during transport. Photograph all the damaged equipment. Do not install damaged or dirty equipment. The exterior and interior of equipment and component parts must be free from grease. Note — Risk of damage to equipment.Unpacking and Inspection HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Procedure 4 Inspection 1 Check the equipment items against the packing list. as this can adversely affect other equipment. 3 If anything is missing or damaged. Keep all the inspection and packing documents for reference.

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Unpacking and Inspection Figure 2 Transport bracket Transport bracket On site the bracket is removed. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 35 .

Unpacking and Inspection HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 36 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

1 Introduction 4. • Racks with footprint of 600 mm x 300 mm can be mounted back-to-back or to wall.2 General 4. as they are only accessed via the front.3 Parts List 4. 4. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 37 .1 Introduction This chapter provides the procedures to prepare a concrete floor or a raised floor for the installation of racks with footprint 600 x 300 mm. The order is not important.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Floor Preparation 4 Floor Preparation 4.2 General Figure 3 gives an example of a multiple rack configuration with different footprints. or right to left. Figure 3 Example of Floor Plan for Mixed Rack Configuration Front side Rack 2x300 mm DSL Rack DSL Rack DSL Rack Rack (600x300) (600x600) Rack DSL Rack DSL Rack DSL Rack (600x300) 600 mm Front side FD racks Other rack types (600x300) The following applies for multiple rack configurations: • Racks can be grown from either left to right.4 Recommended Tools 4.5 Procedures 4.

15 m • Insulated trouble lamp • Socket set. 4. if present.3.4. the positioning of the racks and the cutting of the tiles needs special attention. see also chapter 11.3 Parts List Racks and accompanying hardware mounting parts. Note — In case closing door issues (due to cables extending too much. • Cable areas on the left and the right of each rack allow to route rack cables up to rack overhead guides or down under raised floor. M 10 drive with ratchet handle and extensions • Saw or knife • Jig saw • Small shop vacuum cleaner 38 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .4 Recommended Tools The following tools are recommended: • Safety glasses • Carpenter’s claw hammer • Accurate level • Chalk line and chalk • Felt marking pen • Measuring tape.4).4. as the rack anchors and the cable routing holes must not coincide with the raised-floor supports. In the case of raised-floor cabling. approximately 15 m • Extension cord.Floor Preparation HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL • FD racks are 300 mm deep. 4.3. They can be placed against other 300 mm or even 600 mm deep racks used for other equipment in the same building.1) it might be that a per rack an additional depth of 3cm needs to be planned in when rack door extenders are being used (see chapter 11.

Caution — Risk of equipment damage when floor is not level Do not try to mount a rack on a floor that is not level. first mark the total length.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Floor Preparation 4. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 39 . To avoid cumulative errors when laying out short dimensions in a straight line. extend the lines at least 15 cm beyond the point of intersection to check the equipment alignment. 4 Mark the references and the layout lines. 3 Use a level to verify that the floor is level. then divide it into shorter lengths leaving the measuring tape in place. referring to the job floor plan. line up the racks with a row of tiles. ceiling and walls is as shown in the applicable drawings and specifications are as provided by the site survey team.5 Procedures Procedure 5 Marking the Rack Positions 1 Verify that the layout of floors. 5 Mark the rack position on the floor. Where the layout lines intersect. 2 Verify that the area dimensions and the location of reference points correspond to the floor plan. use chalk to mark the front baseline and end of the rack. • On a raised floor. Use a felt marking pen to mark the position of each rack on two half tiles as shown in Figure 4 and Figure 5. • On a concrete floor. This position an optimal space for cable routing (neither the anchor points nor the cable holes coincide with the floor supports).

Floor Preparation HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 4 Positioning Racks and Cutting Tiles for Cable Routing Left and Right of Rack see detail below Front side Rack 600 mm Rack Rack Front side 600 mm Detail rack positioning and tile cut-out for raised floor cabling Tile cut-out for routing cables of Tile cut-out for routing cables rack and possible preceeding rack of two successive racks Cable channels 300 mm Universal rack Rack front 600 mm 40 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Floor Preparation Figure 5 Positioning SI Racks and Cutting Tiles for Cable Routing via Central Holes in Rack Bottom see detail below Front side Rack 600 mm Rack Rack Front side 600 mm Detail rack positioning and tile cut-out for raised floor cabling Rack holes / tile cut-out 300 mm Universal rack Rack front 600 mm Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 41 .

cover the cable routing holes in the raised floor with solid covers. 42 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . in the case of concrete floor. Pay attention to the precise positioning of the rack anchors. Note — Spacing between racks is critical. Make sure the tile material is strong enough to carry fully equipped racks (consult raised floor installer or vendor). Refer to the floor drilling patterns of Figure 6 and Figure 7. 3 If the racks are not immediately installed. mark the anchor points with a felt marking pen using the rack base as a template. Install the floor anchors for each rack only after the previous rack is mounted and attached. because rack ends are not adjustable. for plugs 100 mm deep. Avoid cutting out too much tile material or too close to the rack anchor points. 2 Drill the holes using a drill bit for 10 mm diameter screws and. 2 Remove the routing areas marked on the tiles with a jig saw and remove all sharp edges.Floor Preparation HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Procedure 6 Cutting Tiles for Raised Floor Cabling 1 Mark the routing areas on the tiles with a felt marking pen. Use the rack base as a template and refer to: • Figure 4 for a rack with cable routing at both sides • Figure 5 for a rack with cable routing via central bottom holes Caution — Risk of floor damage by large tile cutouts or when floor material not solid enough. Procedure 7 Floor Drilling for Rack Anchoring 1 For each rack.

5 mm L: 265 mm X: 211 mm for SI-rack or 217 mm for universal rack B E C F D X L A G Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 43 .5 mm E F: 86 mm F H: 487 mm K: 602 mm D A A D A B D K (*) Indicative. depends on rack spacing.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Floor Preparation Figure 6 Floor Drilling Pattern for Row of Racks Back to Back A: 600 mm (*) B: 300 mm H D: 428 mm E: 57. Figure 7 Floor Drilling Pattern for Single Wall Mounted Rack A:600 mm B: 300 mm C: 348 mm D: 428 mm E: 126 mm F: 86 mm G: 57.

cover the anchor holes (plugs) in the concrete floor with tape and cover the cable routing holes in the raised floor with solid covers.Floor Preparation HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 3 Completely remove the cuttings from the holes with a small shop vacuum cleaner. properly insert the plugs in the drilled holes. 44 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . 5 If the rack will not be installed immediately. inspect the holes for any chips. which must be completely clear. 4 In the case of concrete floor.

specific tools.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Installing Racks 5 Installing Racks 5.3 Recommended Tools 5. M 10 drive with ratchet handle and extensions • Wrenches.1 Introduction 5.2 mm and 0. channels. if any. and other hardware • Shims (0.2 Parts List 5. M 10 open and box-end combination • V-bolts.3 mm) • Torque wrench • Hex driver set with square bits. are mentioned at the procedures.15 mm. 5. 5.3 Recommended Tools The following tools are recommended: • Level • Measuring tape • Extension cord • Socket set. This list is not exhaustive.1 Introduction This chapter provides the procedures for installing SI racks. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 45 .2 Parts List Mounting kit for FD rack and requested by the site survey team and associated mounting equipment. corner and wall brackets. 0.4 Procedures 5.

Use a positioning dolly to move the rack to its position in a room or vault. use a piece of canvas placed under the rack footing to prevent marring the floor. If a dolly is not available. 2 Cover the surrounding floor area with a protective covering as required by local practice. 3 Move the rack to its permanent floor location. 4 Raise the rack to a vertical position. Caution — Possible risk of equipment damage Do not use any installed subrack as a handhold when lifting the rack.Installing Racks HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 5.4 Procedures Procedure 8 Floor Mounting 1 Verify that the rack is unpacked as described in “Unpacking and Inspection” and make sure that the floor is properly prepared as described in “Floor Preparation”. 46 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . Caution — Possible risk of equipment damage Brace the top of the rack during movement to prevent tipping and avoid strains that might twist or otherwise damage the backplane. 5 Carefully position the rack over the anchor holes drilled in a concrete or a raised floor.

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Installing Racks Figure 8 Rack Anchors Rack anchors 6 To secure the rack to the floor. 7 Install the screws and hand tighten. Refer to Figure 9 for a concrete floor or Figure 10 for a raised floor. use the hardware in the rack mechanical kit. 8 Line up and plumb the rack. Figure 9 Concrete Floor Rack Fixing Adjusting device Hexagon socket Head screw Washer Washer Expansion Bolt M6 Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 47 .

Installing Racks HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 10 Raised Floor Rack Fixing Adjusting Device Hexagon Socket. mount the rack to the wall as described in the next procedure “Wall Mounting”. Procedure 9 Wall Mounting 1 Make sure that the rack is properly mounted on the floor as described in the procedure “Floor Mounting”. insert shims under the rack base for correct leveling. 12 Recheck the floor anchor bolts. 10 Torque the floor anchoring screws to 100 Nm. 11 If applicable. Head Screw Washer Washer Washer MG Part of Spring Washer Epansion Bolt Hexagon nut 9 Use a level to check the rack leveling and alignment at the base. 2 Preposition the wall mounting kit on top of the rack against the wall. 48 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . When necessary. the top and both sides of the rack.

Figure 11 Wall Drilling Pattern for Rack A: 600 mm P: 97 mm Q : 406 mm 4 Remove the wall mounting kit from the rack. the rack ends are not adjustable. Pay attention to the precise positioning of the rack anchors.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Installing Racks 3 Mark the anchor points on the wall with a felt marking pen. refer to Figure 11 for the rack wall mounting pattern. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 49 . Note — Spacing between racks is critical.

and tighten. insert the screws in plugs. 6 Carefully remove the rack protection. 50 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . and insert wall plugs in the drilled holes.Installing Racks HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 5 Cover the top of the rack to protect it (use static-free material). Rack cabinets can also be installed back to back. 7 Reinstall the wall mounting kit. 8 Recheck the floor anchor bolts. and drill the marked holes using the appropriate drill bit.

2 Equipment Overview Table 1 gives an overview of the equipment installed at delivery or that can be mounted on site. Note — The following chapter provides the procedures to install an additional 7302 FD subrack in the following rack equipment: • an FD rack • an XD rack • a UD-Combo rack • a UD rack 6.5 Mounting a 7302 FD Subrack 6. an FD rack cabinet is equipped with at least one subrack.1 Introduction This chapter provides the procedures to install the following equipment in a 7302 FD rack: • a 7302 FD subrack: • a 7302 FD subrack with only LT boards is indicated as 7302 FD-LT • a 7302 FD subrack with LT boards and splitter boards is indicated as 7302 FD- Combo • an FD non-MTA splitter subrack • a fan unit and dust filter At delivery.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Mounting Rack Equipment 6 Mounting Rack Equipment 6.4 Configuration limitations 6.3 Rack Configurations 6. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 51 .6 Mounting the Fan Unit 6.2 Equipment Overview 6.1 Introduction 6. Not all of the following procedures are required for installation on site. but several can be useful when upgrading or mounting additional equipment.

NFXS-A NFXS-A NFXS-A 3FE 26685 3FE 26685 3FE 26685 AAAL AAAL AAAL Fan 2 . . .3.1 Rack Configurations with 7302 FD Subrack 3FE 26685 AAAL Table 2 gives an overview of all the possible rack configurations with FD subracks only. NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AAAL Fan 3 . AFAN-H AFAN-H AFAN-H (with dust filter) (with dust filter) (with dust filter) 3EC 37533 NB 3EC 37533 ND 3EC 37533 NB SR 3 . . . .2m rack FEMA 3FE 27792 AA 3FE 27792 BA 3FE 27793 AA 3FE 27793 BA 3FE 27794 AA(3 code ) Cabinet 3FE 28688 AA SR 1 NFXS-A NFXS-A NFXS-A NFXS-A NFXS-A 3FE 26685 3FE 26685 3FE 26685 3FE 26685 3FE 26685 AAAL AAAL AAAL AAAL AAAL Fan1 AFAN-H AFAN-H AFAN-H AFAN-H AFAN-H (with dust filter) (with dust filter) (with dust filter) (with dust filter) (with dust filter) 3EC 37533 NB( 3EC 37533 ND( 3EC 37533 NB(1 3EC 37533 ND( 3EC 37533 NB 1) 2) ) 2) SR 2 . AFAN-H (with dust filter) 3EC 37533 NB 52 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .Mounting Rack Equipment HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Table 1 Overview of Rack Equipment FD Rack Equipment Mnemonic Code 7302 FD subrack NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AAAL 3FE 26685 AACL Fan unit with dust filter for 7302 FD subrack AFAN-H 3EC 37533 NB Low-acoustic-noise fan unit with dust filter for 7302 FD subrack AFAN-H 3EC 37533 ND 6.3 Rack Configurations 6. . These configurations are shown in Figure 12. . Table 2 Rack Configurations with FD subracks only in 2. .

8 m rack.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Mounting Rack Equipment Notes (1) Normal noise fan unit (2) Low-acoustic-noise fan unit (3) This configuration can only be used with a limited number combinations of LT boards.8 m high (2) Normal noise fan unit Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 53 .8 m rack FEMA code 3FE 27792 AB Cabinet 3FE 29537 AA(1) SR 1 NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AAAL Fan1 AFAN-H (with dust filter) 3EC 37533 NB)(2) SR 2 - Fan 2 - Notes (1) Cabinet is 1. Table 3 Rack Configurations with FD subracks in 1. refer to section “Three FD-LT Subracks in One Rack” Figure 12 Rack Configurations with FD Subracks Only 3FE 27792 AA 3FE 27793 AA 3FE 27794 AA 3FE 27792 BA 3FE 27793 BA FD LT subrack FD LT subrack FD LT subrack FD LT subrack FD LT subrack FD LT subrack Table 3 gives an overview of all the possible rack configurations with FD subracks in 1. These configurations are shown in Figure 13.

Table 4 Subrack Mounting Positions FEMA Code Subrack First upper Fixing position Dust filter fixing position in the rack below in the subrack upright subrack upright 3FE 27792 AA NFXS-A 1 60 Y 3FE 27792 AB NFXS-A 1 44 Y 3FE 27793 AA NFXS-A 1 33 Y 3FE 27793 BA NFXS-A 1 60 Y 3FE 27794 AA NFXS-A 1 6 Y NFXS-A 1 33 Y NFXS-A 1 60 Y 3FE 62445 AA NFXS-A 1 60 Y 3FE 63160 AA NFXS-A 1 33 Y NFXS-A 1 60 Y 54 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .8m) 3FE 27792 AB Table 4 shows the mounting positions of the subracks in the rack.Mounting Rack Equipment HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 13 Rack Configurations with FD Subracks (1.

NFXS-A NFXS-A NFXS-A 3FE 26685 3FE 26685 3FE 26685 AACL AACL AACL Fan 2 . .2 Rack Configurations with 7302 FD Subrack 3FE 26685 AACL Table 5 gives an overview of all the possible rack configurations with FD subracks only. Table 5 Rack Configurations with FD subracks only in 2. . . . refer to section “Three FD-LT Subracks in One Rack” Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 55 . . AFAN-H AFAN-H AFAN-H (with dust filter) (with dust filter) (with dust filter) 3EC 37533 NB 3EC 37533 ND 3EC 37533 NB SR 3 . These configurations are shown in Figure 14. .HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Mounting Rack Equipment 6. . NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AACL Fan 3 .2m rack FEMA 3FE 27792 AA 3FE 27792 BA 3FE 27793 AA 3FE 27793 BA 3FE 27794 AA(3 code ) Cabinet 3FE 28688 AA SR 1 NFXS-A NFXS-A NFXS-A NFXS-A NFXS-A 3FE 26685 3FE 26685 3FE 26685 3FE 26685 3FE 26685 AACL AACL AACL AACL AACL Fan1 AFAN-H AFAN-H AFAN-H AFAN-H AFAN-H (with dust filter) (with dust filter) (with dust filter) (with dust filter) (with dust filter) 3EC 37533 NB(1 3EC 37533 ND( 3EC 37533 NB 3EC 37533 ND( 3EC 37533 NB ) 2) 2) SR 2 . AFAN-H (with dust filter) 3EC 37533 NB Notes (1) Normal noise fan unit (2) Low-acoustic-noise fan unit (3) This configuration can only be used with a limited number combinations of LT boards.3. .

Mounting Rack Equipment HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 14 Rack Configurations with FD Subracks Only 3FE 27792 AA 3FE 27793 AA 3FE 27794 AA 3FE 27792 BA 3FE 27793 BA FD-LT FD-LT FD-LT FD-LT FD-LT FD-LT Table 6 shows the mounting positions of the subracks in the rack. Table 6 Subrack Mounting Positions FEMA Code Subrack First upper Fixing position Dust filter fixing position in the rack below in the subrack upright subrack upright 3FE 27792 AA NFXS-A 1 60 Y 3FE 27792 BA 3FE 27793 AA NFXS-A 1 33 Y 3FE 27793 BA NFXS-A 1 60 Y 3FE 27794 AA NFXS-A 1 6 Y NFXS-A 1 33 Y NFXS-A 1 60 Y 3FE 62445 AA NFXS-A 1 33 Y 3FE 63160 AA NFXS-A 1 33 Y NFXS-A 1 60 Y 56 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 57 .a. 6.4 Configuration limitations This section describes the configuration limitations for rack configurations with FD subracks only.3 Three FD-LT Subracks in One Rack When FD-LT subracks are deployed in this configuration. 6. Note — Wherever NVPS-x is used in the below configuration figures (Figure 15 until 21) it can be each supported voice packet server board (s.4 cm. only a limited number of combinations of NT boards and LT boards can be used.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Mounting Rack Equipment 6. An air baffle must be mounted between both shelves 6. 6. NVPS-A and NVPS-C). • The minimum distance between two shelves with NELT-B/FELT-B boards should be 25.2 Two FD-LT Subracks in One Rack • GPON LT boards and FELT-B boards cannot be used in combination with the low- noise fan unit 3EC 37533 ND.1 Configuration A The following boards can be used in configuration A (refer to Figure 15): • All three FD LT subracks are equipped with NPOT-A/NPOT-C boards only.4.4.4.3.4. • If NELT-B/FELT-B boards are deployed: • It is advised to equip NELT-B/FELT-B boards in the BOTTOM shelf first • DSL/NGLT boards directly under NELT-B/FELT-B boards are not supported.1 One FD-LT Subrack in One Rack GPON LT boards or FELT-B boards cannot be used in combination with the low- noise fan unit 3EC 37533 ND.

• The bottom subrack is equipped with a mixture of the following boards: • NALT-B • NALT-C • NALT-D • NALT-E • NSLT-A • NELT-A 58 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . • The middle subrack is equipped with a mixture of NPOT-A/NPOT-C boards and NBAT-A boards.4.Mounting Rack Equipment HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 15 Three FD LT Subracks in one Rack: Configuration A NCNC-B NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NANT-x NANT-x NVPS-x NVPS-x NCNC-B NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NANT-x NANT-x NVPS-x NVPS-x NCNC-B NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NANT-x NANT-x NVPS-x NVPS-x 6.3. Note — Additional restriction: The total number of NBAT-A boards must be less than 10.2 Configuration B The following boards can be used in configuration B (refer to Figure 16): • The top subrack is equipped with NPOT-A/NPOT-C boards only.

NALT-E. NSLT-Aand NELT-A 6.4.NALT-C.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Mounting Rack Equipment Figure 16 Three FD LT Subracks in one Rack: Configuration B NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NANT-x NANT-x NCNC-x NVPS-x NVPS-x NPOT-A and NBAT-A (number of NBAT-A < 9) Mixtureof NALT-B. NALT-D. • The middle subrack is equipped with a mixture of the following boards: • NPOT-A/NPOT-C • NALT-B • NALT-C • NALT-D • NALT-E • The bottom subrack is equipped with a mixture of the following boards: • NPOT-A/NPOT-C • NALT-B • NALT-C • NALT-D • NALT-E • NSLT-A • NELT-A Note — For NALT-E: The total number of NALT-E boards must be less than 27.3. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 59 .3 Configuration C The following boards can be used in configuration C (refer to Figure 17): • The top subrack is equipped with NPOT-A/NPOT-C boards only.

NALT-B.3. NALT-B. NSLT-Aand NELT-A 6. NALT-D and NALT-E Mixtureof NPOT-A.NALT-D.NALT-E. Figure 18 Three FD LT Subracks in one Rack: Configuration D NCNC-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NANT-x NANT-x NVPS-x NVPS-x NCNC-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NANT-x NANT-x NVPS-x NVPS-x NCNC-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NANT-x NANT-x NVPS-x NVPS-x 60 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .4. NALT-C. NALT-C.4 Configuration D The following boards can be used in configuration D (refer to Figure 18): • All three FD LT subracks are equipped with NPOT-B boards only.Mounting Rack Equipment HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 17 Three FD LT Subracks in one Rack: Configuration C NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NANT-x NANT-x NCNC-x NVPS-x NVPS-x Mixture of NPOT-A.

3.3. • The bottom subrack is equipped with a mixture of the following boards: • NALT-B • NALT-C • NALT-D • NALT-E • NSLT-A • NELT-A Figure 19 Three FD LT Subracks in one Rack: Configuration E NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NANT-x NANT-x NCNC-x NVPS-x NVPS-x NPOT-B and NBAT-A (number of NBAT-A < 9) Mixtureof NALT-B.4. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 61 . NSLT-Aand NELT-A 6.NALT-C.6 Configuration F The following boards can be used in configuration F (refer to Figure 20): • All three FD LT subracks are equipped with NPOT-A/NALS-A duplets or NPOT- C/NALS-A duplets.NALT-E. NALT-D.4.5 Configuration E The following boards can be used in configuration E (refer to Figure 19): • The top subrack is equipped with NPOT-B boards only. • The middle subrack is equipped with a mixture of NPOT-B boards and NBAT-A boards. Note — Additional restriction: The total number of NBAT-A boards must be less than 9.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Mounting Rack Equipment 6.

62 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .4.Mounting Rack Equipment HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 20 Three FD LT Subracks in one Rack: Configuration F NCNC-B NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NANT-x NANT-x NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A NVPS-x NVPS-x NCNC-B NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NANT-x NANT-x NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A NVPS-x NVPS-x NCNC-B NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NPOT-A NANT-x NANT-x NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A NVPS-x NVPS-x 6.7 Configuration G The following boards can be used in configuration G (refer to Figure 21): • All three FD LT subracks are equipped with sets consisting of two NPOT-B and three NALS-A boards.3. Note — The right-most slot is empty.

5. 3FE 26685 AAAL or 3FE 26685 AACL • 8 self-tapping TORX screws M6 x 10 mm Note: the fixing material is not included with the 7302 FD subrack.1 Parts List The following parts are required: • One 7302 FD subrack. 6.5 Mounting a 7302 FD Subrack This section describes the procedure for mounting a 7302 FD subrack in a 600 x 300 mm rack. The mnemonic for this subrack is NFXS-A.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Mounting Rack Equipment Figure 21 Three FD LT Subracks in one Rack: Configuration G NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A NANT-x NANT-x NCNC-x NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A Empty NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NALS-A NANT-x NANT-x NCNC-x NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A Empty NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NPOT-B NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A NANT-x NANT-x NCNC-x NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A NALS-A Empty 6. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 63 .2 Recommended Tools The following tools are recommended: • Torque wrench with M6 TORX attachment • Protective gloves. 6.5.

mount the subrack in the upper position (for the correct mounting position. 3 If nothing is missing or damaged. refer to Table 4). 2 If anything is missing or damaged. Photograph all the damaged equipment. Warning — Possibility of equipment damage. Do not install damaged equipment.5 Nm for every subsequent subrack assembly. The subrack has to be lifted by two persons. notify the transportation carrier and Nokia immediately. Do NOT forget to reset the torque setting to 2.5 Nm ± 20%. 64 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . Note — The initial maximum torque is 2.5 Nm ± 20%. as it can adversely affect other equipment.5 Nm ± 20%). It is advisable to wear protective gloves. Warning — Risk of physical harm or damage when lifting subrack. when handling. Only in case the screw cannot be fastened with this torque setting. Pay attention to possible sharp edges. the torque setting may be increased to 3. Keep all the inspection and packing documents as a reference.Mounting Rack Equipment HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Procedure 10 Mounting the First 7302 FD Subrack in a Rack This procedure describes the installation of a 7302 FD subrack: 1 Unpack and visually inspect the subrack for physical damage. Fix the rack with TORX screws to the rack uprights (maximum torque: 2.

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Mounting Rack Equipment Figure 22 Mounting a 7302 FD Subrack 3FE 26685 AAAL in a Rack Rack upright fixing position (41/60) Shelf fixing position 1 Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 65 .

plastic version) • premium fan unit 3EC 37533 ND (40.5V-57V.Mounting Rack Equipment HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 23 Mounting a 7302 FD Subrack 3FE 26685 AACL in a Rack Shelf fixing position 1 Markings on rack profile: fixing positions (see Table 6-11) 6. stand-alone configuration. 66 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .6 Mounting the Fan Unit The fan unit is a field replaceable unit with wide voltage range fans.5V-72V and low noise functionality) The fan unit can be shipped factory installed in the rack. but can also be ordered as separate unit for replacement on site. Note — The installation of the dust filter is not required when the subrack is deployed in a dust-free. an alarm interface board and (optional) a dust filter. The fan unit is available in two versions: • standard fan unit 3EC 37533 NB (40. It is installed in the subrack fan area and plugs directly into the backplane connectors providing connection.

make sure the correct type of fan unit is installed and that the fan unit is equipped with a clean dust filter. every three to six months. Warning — Hot insertion of the fan unit can sometimes cause service disruption. Refer to Table 2. depending on the amount of dust in the CO. When a subrack in a powered system contains the wrong type of fan unit (for example. Plug-in units might get seriously damaged. never keep the fan area empty for longer than two minutes. or cause a system failure. • When replacing a fan unit of an active system (for example. expansion or upgrade). a fan unit with four instead of eight fans) or when fans are failing or out of operation. even ignite. Refer to Table 2. 2 Remove the fan unit from its shipping packaging and inspect it for damage. Procedure 11 Mounting the Standard Fan Unit 3EC 37533 NB Proceed as follows to install the standard fan unit: 1 Verify if the fan unit type is correct for the rack configuration. Fan units with dirty dust filters might no longer assure sufficient air cooling. The fan unit of each subrack must be equipped with a dust filter (code 1AD014270005).HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Mounting Rack Equipment It can be hot inserted in the subrack. there is a risk of active plug-in units overheating. If damaged. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 67 . Observe the following rules: • Before switching on the rack power. during maintenance. • Keep all the fans in operation as long as the system is active. when the fans are off or when the dust filter is dirty. • Make sure the dust filter is clean and replace it. it has no ON/OFF switch but removing it disconnects power provided from the backplane. Danger — Risk of fire and equipment damage or system failure when cooling with the wrong fan unit. do not mount the fan unit but notify the transportation carrier and Nokia immediately.

6 In the same way. install the fan units of other subrack(s). keep in mind the maximum time (two minutes) fans are allowed to be out of operation (refer to Danger warning). 68 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . if required (each three to six months. if any. depending on the amount of dust in the CO). Figure 25 Fan Unit Handles 4 If the system is active. remove the installed fan unit: i Loosen the captive screws (refer to Figure 24) Figure 24 Captive Screws Captive screws ii Pull the unit out of the fan area by the handles (refer to Figure 25). Secure the unit by tightening the captive screws. 7 Mount a dust filter (code 1AD014270005) in the fan unit of each subrack or replace it.Mounting Rack Equipment HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 3 In case of replacement. 5 Gently insert the fan unit into the fan area until the backplane connectors are fully mated.

remove the installed fan unit: i Loosen the captive screws (refer to Figure 26) Figure 26 Captive Screws Captive screws ii Pull the unit out of the fan area by the handles (refer to Figure 27). If damaged. Refer to Table 2. keep in mind the maximum time (two minutes) fans are allowed to be out of operation (refer to Danger warning). 2 Remove the fan unit from its shipping packaging and inspect it for damage. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 69 . Figure 27 Fan Unit Handles 4 If the system is active.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Mounting Rack Equipment Procedure 12 Mounting the Premium Fan Unit 3EC 37533 ND Proceed as follows to install the premium fan unit: 1 Verify if the fan unit type is correct for the rack configuration. do not mount the fan unit but notify the transportation carrier and Nokia immediately. 3 In case of replacement.

install the fan units of other subrack(s). depending on the amount of dust in the CO). 70 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . 6 In the same way. if required (each three to six months. 7 Mount a dust filter (code 1AD014270005) in the fan unit of each subrack or replace it. if any.Mounting Rack Equipment HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 5 Gently insert the fan unit into the fan area until the backplane connectors are fully mated. Secure the unit by tightening the captive screws.

2 Cabinet Overview This section gives an overview of the different cabinets: • FD rack 3FE 28688 AA. refer to Figure 30 • UD rack 3FE 20145 AA. but several can be useful when upgrading or mounting additional equipment.5 UD Combo Rack Extension 7.1 Introduction 7.3 FD Rack Extension 7. refer to Figure 32 Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 71 .1 Introduction This chapter provides the procedures to install a 7302 FD subrack in the following racks: • an FD rack • an XD rack • a UD Combo rack • a UD rack In the field. refer to Figure 28 • FD rack 3FE 20145 GA. refer to Figure 29 • XD rack 3FE 20145 AC. refer to Figure 31 • UD rack 3EC 17482 AC. 7. existing racks are equipped with at least one subrack.6 UD Rack Extension 7.4 XD Rack Extension 7.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks 7 Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks 7. Not all of the procedures described in this chapter are required for installation extensions on site.2 Cabinet Overview 7.

Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 28 FD Rack 3FE 28688 AA 72 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks Figure 29 FD Rack 3FE 20145 GA Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 73 .

Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 30 XD Rack 3FE 20145 AC 74 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks Figure 31 UD Rack 3FE 20145 AA Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 75 .

Note — Due to the other rack uprights for the FD rack. For thermal and cabling reasons.Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 32 UD Rack 3EC 17482 AC 7. 76 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . Warning — Risk of overheating / physical damage to the equipment. any Nokia subracks (with a maximum of 2 active subracks and 1 passive/splitter subrack) must be positioned in the FD cabinet as described below or in accordance with the rack configurations mentioned in section “Rack Configurations”. the fixing position hole number needs to be translated to a vertical height (indicated with indication lines on the upright).3 FD Rack Extension This section describes the procedure for mounting an additional 7302 FD subrack (NFXS-A) in an FD rack (3FE 28688 AA or 3FE 20145 GA) in the field.

7.1 Additional Mounting Considerations The following items must be taken into consideration when mounting additional subracks: • ISAM LT subracks must be mounted at the bottom of the rack on rack vertical pitch number 60 (subrack pitch number 1). the system installation can be completed by inserting the circuit boards and/or by attaching and dressing the required external power. an free air exhaust space of 75 mm must be forerefer ton. • Once all the cables are routed. • All the cables must be routed to the overhead rack or floor within the 600 mm width dimension. 7. alarm and signal interconnect cables: Note — A specific cabling procedure is required due to the quantity of cables in the system.5 mm • for an LT subrack mounted above the lower LT subrack.3.3 Parts List The following parts are required: • One 7302 FD subrack. the system installation is completed by installing the FD cabinet into the equipment line-up (if necessary) and securing the FD cabinet to the floor. a free air inlet is created of about 75 mm below the bottom ISAM subrack. • The distance between 2 indication lines (identical to the distance between 2 mounting holes) is 25 mm. This results in a bottom FD LT mounting position of 60 x 25 = 1500 mm from the top of the rack. the second subrack must be mounted on the vertical pitch number 33 (825 mm) • Above the top ISAM subrack.3.2 Additional Cabling Considerations After the subracks are mounted. • The rack cabling must be completed prior to installing the rack in a line-up due to the quantity of cables and severely limited access once the rack is installed. • No cabling or other equipment is to be positioned in this free air inlet space. This way. the required distance between mounting brackets is 167.3.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks 7. • Further ISAM LT or splitter subracks must be mounted above the first installed subrack with an intermediate free air/cabling space of 75 mm: • for a splitter subrack mounted above the lower LT subrack. 3FE 26685 AAAL or 3FE 26685 AACL Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 77 .

when handling. Procedure 13 Mounting a Second 7302 FD Subrack in an FD Rack 1 Unpack and visually inspect the subrack for physical damage. but mounting positions should respect the available cable feed-through openings in the rack side plates. Do not install damaged equipment. For the procedure. Pay attention to possible sharp edges.Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 7.3). It is advisable to wear protective gloves. Warning — Possibility of equipment damage. Warning — Risk of physical harm or damage when lifting subrack. mount the subrack in the correct position (refer to Table 4 for 3FE 26685 AAAL or Table 6 for 3FE 26685 AACL). refer to section 8. notify the transportation carrier and Nokia immediately. 7. 4 Connect the power cables to the second subrack. Photograph all the damaged equipment. The subrack has to be lifted by two persons.4 XD Rack Extension This section describes the installation of a 7302 FD subrack within the ETSI XD-type rack 3FE 20145 AC that already has an XD subrack mounted in the top position. This extension is similar to the extension in an FD rack (refer to section 7.4 Recommended Tools The following tools are recommended: • TORX M6 screwdriver • Protective gloves.3. 2 If anything is missing or damaged. 5 Install a new fan unit with dust filter in the new subrack.3 for 3FE 26685 AACL. Fix the rack with TORX screws to the rack uprights.3 for 3FE 26685 AAAL or section 9. Keep all the inspection and packing documents as a reference. 78 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . as it can adversely affect other equipment. 3 If nothing is missing or damaged.

Keep all the inspection and packing documents as a reference. 3 If nothing is missing or damaged. notify the transportation carrier and Nokia immediately.4. mount the subrack in the correct position (refer to Table 4). as it can adversely affect other equipment. Do not install damaged equipment. Warning — Possibility of equipment damage. Photograph all the damaged equipment.2 Recommended Tools The following tools are recommended: • TORX M6 screwdriver • Protective gloves.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks Two procedures are given: • Procedure 14: mounting a 7302 FD subrack 3FE 26685 AAAL • Procedure 15: mounting a 7302 FD subrack 3FE 26685 AACL 7.4.1 Parts List The following parts are required: • One 7302 FD subrack. 3FE 26685 AAAL or 3FE 26685 AACL 7. 2 If anything is missing or damaged. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 79 . Procedure 14 Mounting a 7302 FD Subrack 3FE 26685 AAAL in an XD Rack 1 Unpack and visually inspect the subrack for physical damage.

Figure 34 shows an FD subrack installed in an XD rack Figure 33 FD Subrack and XD Rack Fixing Positions Subrack 1 Subrack fixing position 1 Rack fixing position 45 80 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . Pay attention to possible sharp edges. It is advisable to wear protective gloves.Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Fix the rack with TORX screws to the rack uprights. i Align the 7302 FD subrack within the XD rack (refer to Figure 33): • Fixing position 1 of the 7302 FD subrack • Fixing position 45 of the ETSI XD rack ii Fix the rack with TORX screws to the rack uprights. The subrack has to be lifted by two persons. when handling. Warning — Risk of physical harm or damage when lifting subrack.

refer to section 8. refer to Figure 35. which is installed in the XD rack configuration.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks Figure 34 7302 FD Subrack Installed in XD Rack Configuration 4 Connect the power cables to the second subrack.3 for the procedure. i The power cables must be routed through the left vertical cable channel of the rack and can then be routed through the third hole from the bottom in the rack upright towards the 7302 FD power connection point through the side plate of the 7302 FD subrack. requires separate power cable distribution from the CO Power Distribution Point. ii The cables must be connected as shown on Figure 36. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 81 . The 7302 FD subrack.

6 Route the MDF cabling as follows (refer to Figure 37): • Half of the MDF cables of the 7302 FD subrack are routed to the left and half are routed to the right.Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 35 7302 FD Power Cable Routing Figure 36 7302 FD Power Connection 5 Install a new fan unit with dust filter in the new subrack. • In the left and right rack routing areas. • The MDF cables are managed into the vertical cable channels of the rack through the available openings through the rack uprights. the cables are bundled and tied together while routing them up to the top-end. 82 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

2 If anything is missing or damaged.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks Figure 37 XD Rack MDF Cable and Power Cable Routing in Vertical Cable Channel Procedure 15 Mounting a 7302 FD Subrack 3FE 26685 AACL in an XD Rack 1 Unpack and visually inspect the subrack for physical damage. Do not install damaged equipment. as it can adversely affect other equipment. Photograph all the damaged equipment. Warning — Possibility of equipment damage. notify the transportation carrier and Nokia immediately. Keep all the inspection and packing documents as a reference. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 83 .

Pay attention to possible sharp edges.Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 3 If nothing is missing or damaged. The subrack has to be lifted by two persons. Figure 39 shows an FD subrack installed in an XD rack Figure 38 FD Subrack and XD Rack Fixing Positions Subrack 1 Subrack fixing position 1 Rack fixing position 44 84 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . when handling. mount the subrack in the correct position (refer to Table 6). Fix the rack with TORX screws to the rack uprights. Warning — Risk of physical harm or damage when lifting subrack. i Align the 7302 FD subrack within the XD rack (refer to Figure 38): • Fixing position 1 of the 7302 FD subrack • Fixing position 44 of the ETSI XD rack ii Fix the rack with TORX screws to the rack uprights. It is advisable to wear protective gloves.

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks Figure 39 7302 FD Subrack Installed in XD Rack Configuration 4 Connect the power cables to the second subrack. which is installed in the XD rack configuration.3 for the procedure. requires separate power cable distribution from the CO Power Distribution Point. i The power cables must be routed through the left vertical cable channel of the rack and can then be routed through the third hole from the bottom in the rack upright towards the 7302 FD power connection point through the side plate of the 7302 FD subrack. refer to Figure 40. Figure 40 Power Cable Routing Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 85 . The 7302 FD subrack. refer to section 9. ii The cables must be connected as shown on Figure 41.

• The MDF cables are managed into the vertical cable channels of the rack through the available openings through the rack uprights. 6 Route the MDF cabling as follows (refer to Figure 42): • Half of the MDF cables of the 7302 FD subrack are routed to the left and half are routed to the right. the cables are bundled and tied together while routing them up to the top-end.Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 41 7302 FD Power Connection 5 Install a new fan unit with dust filter in the new subrack. • In the left and right rack routing areas. 86 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

This extension is similar to the extension in an FD rack (refer to section 7. Two procedures are given: • Procedure 16: mounting a 7302 FD subrack 3FE 26685 AAAL • Procedure 17: mounting a 7302 FD subrack 3FE 26685 AACL Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 87 .HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks Figure 42 XD Rack MDF Cable and Power Cable Routing in Vertical Cable Channel 7. but mounting positions should respect the available cable feed-through openings in the rack side plates.3).5 UD Combo Rack Extension This section describes the installation of a 7302 FD subrack within the ETSI UD rack 3FE 20145 AA that has already a UD Combo subrack mounted in the top position.

when handling. Do not install damaged equipment. as it can adversely affect other equipment. mount the subrack in the correct position (refer to Table 4).Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 7. 2 If anything is missing or damaged.2 Recommended Tools The following tools are recommended: • TORX M6 screwdriver • Protective gloves. Warning — Possibility of equipment damage. Keep all the inspection and packing documents as a reference. 3FE 26685 AAAL or 3FE 26685 AACL 7. The subrack has to be lifted by two persons. i Align the 7302 FD subrack within the UD Combo rack (refer to Figure 43): • Fixing position 1 of the 7302 FD subrack • Fixing position 59 of the ETSI UD Combo rack ii Fix the rack with TORX screws to the rack uprights.5. It is advisable to wear protective gloves. Photograph all the damaged equipment.5. Procedure 16 Mounting a 7302 FD Subrack 3FE 26685 AAAL in an UD Combo Rack 1 Unpack and visually inspect the subrack for physical damage. notify the transportation carrier and Nokia immediately. Warning — Risk of physical harm or damage when lifting subrack.1 Parts List The following parts are required: • One 7302 FD subrack. Pay attention to possible sharp edges. Figure 44 shows an FD subrack installed in an UD Combo rack 88 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . 3 If nothing is missing or damaged.

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks Figure 43 FD Subrack and UD Combo Rack Fixing Positions Subrack 1 UD Combo (CS 1) Subrack fixing position 1 Rack fixing position 59 Figure 44 7302 FD Subrack Installed in UD Combo Rack Configuration Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 89 .

Figure 45 Power Cable Routing RET B RET A BAT B BAT A Figure 46 Power Cable Connection 90 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 4 The 7302 FD subrack. requires separate power cable distribution from the CO Power Distribution Point: i The power cables must be routed through the left vertical cable channel of the rack and can then be routed through the bottom hole in the rack upright towards the 7302 FD power connection point through the bottom plate of the 7302 FD subrack. refer to Figure 45. which is installed in the UD Combo rack configuration. ii The cables must be connected as shown on Figure 46.

the cables are bundled and tied together while routing them up to the top-end.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks 5 Install a new fan unit with dust filter in the new subrack. • The MDF cables are managed into the vertical cable channels of the rack through the available openings through the rack uprights. 6 Route the MDF cabling as follows (refer to Figure 47): • Half of the MDF cables of the 7302 FD subrack are routed to the left and half are routed to the right. Figure 47 UD Combo Rack MDF Cable and Power Cable Routing in Vertical Cable Channel Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 91 . • In the left and right rack routing areas.

2 If anything is missing or damaged. It is advisable to wear protective gloves. The subrack has to be lifted by two persons. as it can adversely affect other equipment. Photograph all the damaged equipment. Warning — Risk of physical harm or damage when lifting subrack.Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Procedure 17 Mounting a 7302 FD Subrack 3FE 26685 AACL in an UD Combo Rack 1 Unpack and visually inspect the subrack for physical damage. Warning — Possibility of equipment damage. mount the subrack in the correct position (refer to Table 4. Pay attention to possible sharp edges. Do not install damaged equipment. Figure 49 shows an FD subrack installed in an UD Combo rack 92 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . notify the transportation carrier and Nokia immediately. when handling. i Align the 7302 FD subrack within the UD Combo rack (refer to Figure 48): • Fixing position 1 of the 7302 FD subrack • Fixing position 59 of the ETSI UD Combo rack ii Fix the rack with TORX screws to the rack uprights. 3 If nothing is missing or damaged. Keep all the inspection and packing documents as a reference.

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks Figure 48 FD Subrack and UD Combo Rack Fixing Positions Subrack 1 UD Combo (CS 1) Subrack fixing position 1 Rack fixing position 59 Figure 49 7302 FD Subrack Installed in UD Combo Rack Configuration Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 93 .

Figure 50 Power Cable Routing Figure 51 7302 FD Power Connection 5 Install a new fan unit with dust filter in the new subrack. 6 Route the MDF cabling as follows (refer to Figure 52): • Half of the MDF cables of the 7302 FD subrack are routed to the left and half are routed to the right. which is installed in the UD Combo rack configuration. requires separate power cable distribution from the CO Power Distribution Point: i The power cables must be routed through the left vertical cable channel of the rack and can then be routed through the bottom hole in the rack upright towards the 7302 FD power connection point through the bottom plate of the 7302 FD subrack. 94 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . ii The cables must be connected as shown on Figure 51. • In the left and right rack routing areas. the cables are bundled and tied together while routing them up to the top-end. • The MDF cables are managed into the vertical cable channels of the rack through the available openings through the rack uprights. refer to Figure 50.Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 4 The 7302 FD subrack.

This extension is similar to the extension in an FD rack (refer to section 7. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 95 .3).HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks Figure 52 UD Combo Rack MDF Cable and Power Cable Routing in Vertical Cable Channel 7.6 UD Rack Extension This section describes the installation of a 7302 FD subrack (3FE 26685 AA) within the ETSI UD rack (3FE 20145 AA or 3EC 17482 AC) that has already UD subracks mounted in the top position. but mounting positions should respect the available cable feed-through openings in the rack side plates.

7 mm 1AD000100002 12 Tie-wrap diam.76 mm 1AD000100024 10 Label 9x18 mm “Level number in rack” 1AD007660001 1 Label 17.6.1 Parts List The following parts are required: • One 7302 FD subrack.5 .6.5 .helix 1AC 01399 0001 0. range 1. Note — The fixing material is not included with a standard 7302 FD subrack.15.2 Recommended Tools The following tools are recommended: • TORX M6 screwdriver • Protective gloves.6 mm “Trademark” 1AD007490005 1 Cable braid . 7. 96 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . range 1.Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 7.8x44.8x44. 3FE 26685 AA • Mounting kit 3FE 26689 AA which contains the items listed in Table 7 Table 7 Mounting Kit 3FE 26689 AA Description Code Quantity Self-tapping TORX screws M6 x 16mm 1AD002480004 18 Tie-wrap diam.6 mm “7302 ISAM” 1AD007490028 1 Label 17. for wrist band 1AD008490003 1 Elastic arm band 1MΩ 1AD008310003 1 Warning — The TORX screws included in this kit are only usable in UD racks (due to longer length of the TORX screws). They will damage the uprights of the FD rack 3FE 28688 AA.6 m Spiral cable 2400 mm.

Photograph all the damaged equipment. Keep all the inspection and packing documents as a reference. 2 If anything is missing or damaged. notify the transportation carrier and Nokia immediately. in case of a UD rack 3EC 17482 AA ii The cables must be connected as shown on Figure 53 and Figure 54. It is advisable to wear protective gloves. Fix the rack with TORX screws to the rack uprights. in case of a UD rack 3FE 20145 AA • the side openings of the 7302 FD subrack. The subrack has to be lifted by two persons. which is installed in the UD rack configuration. 4 The 7302 FD subrack. when handling. requires separate power cable distribution from the CO Power Distribution Point: i The power cables must be routed through the left vertical cable channel of the rack and can then be routed through: • the bottom hole in the rack upright towards the 7302 FD power connection point through the bottom plate of the 7302 FD subrack. mount the subrack in the correct position (refer to Table 4). Do not install damaged equipment. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 97 . Pay attention to possible sharp edges. i Align the 7302 FD subrack within the UD rack: • Fixing position 1 of the 7302 FD subrack • Fixing position 59 of the ETSI UD rack 3FE 20145 AA • Fixing position flexible for the ETSI UD rack 3EC 17482 AA ii Fix the rack with TORX M6 x 16 mm screws to the rack uprights. Warning — Risk of physical harm or damage when lifting subrack. Warning — Possibility of equipment damage. as it can adversely affect other equipment. 3 If nothing is missing or damaged.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks Procedure 18 Mounting a 7302 FD Subrack in an UD Rack 1 Unpack and visually inspect the subrack for physical damage.

Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 53 Connect Power Cables to Power Module RET B RET A BAT B BAT A Figure 54 7302 FD Power Connection 98 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

6 Route the MDF cabling as follows: • Half of the MDF cables of the 7302 FD subrack are routed to the left and half are routed to the right. the cables are bundled and tied together while routing them up to the top-end. • In the left and right rack routing areas.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks 5 Install a new fan unit with dust filter in the new subrack. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 99 . • The MDF cables are managed into the vertical cable channels of the rack through the available openings through the rack uprights.

Adding a 7302 FD Subrack in Existing Racks HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 100 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

4 Subrack Grounding Connection 8.7 Clock Daisy Chaining 8.6 Alarm Cabling 8.2 Safety Precautions 8.5 Rack Grounding Connection 8.3 Power Cabling for 7302 FD Subrack 8.1 Introduction This chapter describes the rack cabling for racks with the NFXS-A subrack 3FE 26685 AAAL.1 Introduction 8. The following items are described: • Applicable safety precautions • Rack power cables: • Internal power cabling • External power cabling • Power filter • Subrack grounding connections • Rack grounding connections • Alarm cables: • Rack alarm cable • Subrack alarm cable • Rack alarm extension • Fuse alarm • Door alarm • External alarm cable Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 101 .HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AAAL 8 Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AAAL 8.

Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL
AAAL

8.2 Safety Precautions
The following safety precautions apply:
Danger 1 — Before working on the power supply unit, verify if it
is not live.
If the power supply is live, which can deliver -48Vdc or -60Vdc,
you must use an insulated tool kit and consult the manual on
working on live components.
Danger 2 — Avoid risk of electric shock!

Always wear protective gloves and footwear for all handling
tasks.
Carefully follow the instructions.

Warning 1 — Before connecting to the mains power, verify the
specifications of all equipped fan units to ensure the correct
voltage will be supplied (-48 Vdc or -60 Vdc) to these units.
Warning 2 — When no power is supplied, all fasteners
requiring a specific torque must be tightened moderately before
final tightening with a torque wrench or driver.
When power is supplied, tighten fasteners with insulated tools,
according to the specified torque.

8.3 Power Cabling for 7302 FD Subrack

8.3.1 General

8.3.1.1 Power Distribution Frame
7302 FD subracks operate with nominal voltage levels of -48V dc as well as -60V dc
supplied by battery power sources in the CO or cabinet.
In line with ETSI specification ETSI EN 300 132-2 V2, this means that the maximum
allowed BAT voltage level is -40.5V dc, while the minimum allowed BAT voltage level
is -72V dc. These voltage levels refer to the power entry point of the ISAM system
(this is the shelf power connection point for FD equipment).
This power is provided by the Power Distribution Frame (PDF) to the subracks.

102 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685
AAAL

8.3.1.2 External Ground
The FD rack provides one FG on top of the rack. The Safety Ground conductor must
be green-yellow insulated cable (EN60950 or IEC60950 compliant).

8.3.1.3 Cable Routing
Power cables are routed from the PDF to the rack via cable channels overhead or
under the raised floor. They are connected at the input terminal block inside the 7302
FD subrack.
In order to minimize interference and optimize DSL performance, it is advisable, but
not a minimum requirement, to route power cables using separate channels for
signal and power cables.
Keeping a distance of 10 cm between signal and power cables is advisable where it
imposes no practical problems.
Crossing of signal cables with power cables and parallel routing over short distances
are acceptable.

8.3.1.4 Two-Wire Configuration
At delivery, the subrack is standard configured for three-wire powering, which means
that BAT, BATRET and PE must be connected with the PDF. This configuration can
be turned into a two-wire configuration by connecting on the backplane the BATRET
fast-ons to the adjacent FG fast-ons by means of 2 fast-on bridges 1AB 08548 0002
(refer to Figure 55). In case of two-wire connection, BAT and BATRET are connected
with the PDF; BATRET and PE are connected together at PDF and in the shelf.
Figure 55 Fast-on Bridge for Two-Wire Power Configuration

BATRET
FG

Fast-on bridge

Figure 56 shows the location of the fast-on terminals on the backplane of the
7302 FD subrack.

Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 103

Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL
AAAL

Figure 56 Location of Fast-on Terminals on Backplane

Fast-on terminals

8.3.2 Power Unit
The 7302 FD subrack is designed to be used as stand-alone equipment. It is
equipped with a power unit.
The power unit is located at the bottom left of the subrack. The power unit is covered
with a plastic safety cover; refer to Figure 57.

104 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685
AAAL

Figure 57 7302 FD Subrack Power Unit

Power
unit

Safety
cover

Advised torque
for fixing lugs on10 Nm(max torque 12 Nm)
power terminal
bolts

Figure 58 shows the labels on the safety cover.
Figure 58 Safety Cover Labels

Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 105

Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL
AAAL

8.3.3 Internal Power Cabling

8.3.3.1 Power Monitor Cable
In order to detect the status of the power inputs, the power monitor cable assembly
connects BAT A, BAT B and BATRET directly to the battery detection board.
The power monitor cable assembly (code 3FE 26291 AA) is shown in Figure 59.
Figure 59 Power Monitor Cable Assembly
350
RET

460

BAT A
1 2 3 4 5 6

X1 8
BAT B
460

The routing and connection of the power monitor cable is shown in Figure 60.

106 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685
AAAL

Figure 60 Power Monitor Cable Routing and Connection

BATRET
power filter
input

BAT B BAT A
BAT B
circuit circuit
BAT A
BATRET A breaker breaker
BATRET B

The right-most lugs are connected to the power terminal, so the battery detection
board can detect power input without circuit breaker on.
The left-most lugs are connected as follows:
• for BATRET, the left-most lug is connected to the power filter
• for BAT A and BAT B, the left-most lug is connected to the circuit breaker

8.3.3.2 BAT A/BAT B Cable
The BAT A/BAT B cable (code 3FE 27365 AA; refer to Figure 61) is used for routing
from the BAT A and BAT B connectors on the power filter to the circuit breakers.

Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 107

Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL
AAAL

Figure 61 BAT A/BAT B Cable

800

Note — 2 cables are required.

The cable routing and connection is shown in Figure 62.
Figure 62 BAT A/BAT B Cable Routing and Connection
BAT A
BAT B power filter
power filter input
input

BAT A
BAT B circuit
circuit breaker
breaker

108 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685
AAAL

8.3.4 External Power Cabling

8.3.4.1 Cable Type
Table 8 shows the different cables that can be used for external power cabling.
Table 8 External Power Connection Cables

Cable Description Connect to Ω / km Voltage Maximum Maximum
Drop Current Length

Power cable 25 mm2 BAT A 0.84 1.35 V 79 A 26.79 m
BAT B
BATRET A
BATRET B
2
Power cable 35 mm BAT A 0.554 1.35 V 96 A 40.61 m
BAT B
BATRET A
BATRET B
2
Power cable 16 mm BAT A 1.31 1.35 V 30 A 34.35 m
BAT B 1.31 1.35 V 60 A 17.18 m
BATRET A
BATRET B
2
Power cable 10 mm BAT A 2.1 1.35 V 30 A 21.43 m
BAT B
BATRET A
BATRET B

All the power cables have to be equipped with an 8 mm lug at one end, refer to
Figure 63.

Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 109

4. refer to Figure 65 The cables must be connected as shown on the figures.2 Power Cable Routing and Connection The power cables are routed through the left side of the rack and can then be routed to the power unit either through: • an opening in the left-side panel of the subrack. refer to Figure 64 • the bottom of the subrack. 8.Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL AAAL Figure 63 External Power Cable Label 30 L Note — The color of the power cables must be according to local installation practices.3. Figure 64 Power Cable Routing Through the Left RET A BAT A RET B BAT B 110 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . For an example. refer to Figure 64.

Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 111 . This way. the power terminals cannot be touched with fingers when the power cables are routed through the left side of the rack.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AAAL Figure 65 Power Cable Routing Through Bottom of the Subrack RET B RET A BAT B BAT A Note — The width of the holes in the bottom of the subrack is smaller than 12 mm.

Figure 66 Connecting the Power Cables RET A BAT A RET B BAT B 2 Tighten the nuts with a torque of 10 Nm (maximum 12 Nm).5 Power Filter Three power filters are mounted on the backpanel: one for BATRET. 112 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL AAAL Procedure 19 Connecting the Power Cables Proceed as follows to connect the power cables: 1 Connect the power cables as shown in Figure 66. These filters can be removed in the field if they are damaged. The filters are mounted on the backpanel with nuts. one for BAT A and one for BAT B. 8.3.

Figure 67 Mounting the Power Filter 8. Inaccurate grounding connection can cause electric shock or equipment damage when the rack power is switched on. The cover can be removed in the field to adjust the screw on the copper boards if necessary. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 113 .HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AAAL A shielding cover is forerefer ton.4 Subrack Grounding Connection Warning — Possible risk of personal injury or damage to equipment due to inaccurate or faulty ground cabling.

4.1 Cable Type Table 9 shows the different cables that can be used for subrack grounding connection.4. Table 9 Subrack Grounding Connection Cables Cable Description Grounding cable 25 mm2 Yellow/Green Grounding cable 35 mm2 Yellow/Green Grounding cable 16 mm2 Yellow/Green Grounding cable 10 mm2 Yellow/Green All these cables are yellow-green cables equipped with a double 8 mm lug at one end. Figure 68 External Grounding Cable L 8.1.1 External Grounding Connection 8. The cable is routed through an opening in the right side of the subrack to the grounding terminal. The connection and routing of the grounding cable is shown in Figure 69.4.2 Cable Routing and Connection The grounding cable must be assembled when the subrack is stand-alone and will not be used if the subrack is assembled in a rack.1. 114 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL AAAL 8. The grounding cable is connected to the subrack frame with two bolts and nuts.

2. 8.4. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 115 .1 Cable Type The subrack grounding cable (code 3FE 27366 AA) is a 4 mm2 cable with a 4 mm lug and a fast-on connector.2. Figure 70 Subrack Grounding Cable 100 8.4. The cable is shown in Figure 70.2 Internal Grounding Connection A ground cable is installed between the fixed panel and the rotating panel of the power unit to guarantee the reliable connection between the ESD connection point and the ground.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AAAL Figure 69 Subrack Grounding 8.2 Cable Routing and Connection The internal grounding cable is routed and connected as shown in Figure 71.4.

3 Connect the grounding cable via the single hole lug to the rack frame with the nuts and washers present at the PE threaded stud on top of the rack (refer to Figure 72).Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL AAAL Figure 71 Internal Grounding 8. the rack frame has an M10 and M6 bolt and nut. 2 Per local practices. 116 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . Warning — Possible risk of personal injury or damage to equipment due to inaccurate or faulty ground cabling. Inaccurate grounding connection can cause electric shock or equipment damage when the rack power is switched on. The grounding cable has a two-hole lug. Secure the nuts applying a torque of 7 Nm. run it to the top of the rack.5 Rack Grounding Connection The grounding cable of the CO is connected to the rack frame with two bolts and nuts on top. Procedure 20 Connecting the Rack Ground 1 Prepare the grounding cable.

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AAAL Figure 72 Rack Grounding Point Rack grounding point 8. Figure 73 Rack Alarm Cable 0 V for green LED RD 0 V for red LED YE NC 8 NC WH BK RD GN YE 1 BL BL -48V for red & green LED BL ca.1 Rack Alarm Cable Figure 73 shows the rack alarm cable.6 Alarm Cabling 8. 60 mm 60 mm 3100 mm Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 117 .6.

Figure 74 Rack Alarm Cable Connection cable Rack lamps 8.6. refer to Figure 74.1.1 Routing and Fixing the Rack Alarm Cable Figure 75 shows the routing and the fixing positions for the rack alarm cable on the back plate of the cabinet.Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL AAAL The cable is connected to the middle RJ45 connector of the three RJ45 connectors located on the backplane of the lowermost 7302 FD subrack. 118 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

2 Subrack Alarm Cable The subrack alarm cable is used for connecting the alarm between the Battery Detection Board (BDB) and the ACU on the NT board. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 119 .6.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AAAL Figure 75 Fixing Positions of Rack Alarm Cable 1AD 000100008 Rack alarm cable Front view 8.

3 Rack Alarm Extension The subrack alarm cable (code 3FE 26690 AB.2.Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL AAAL 8.6. Figure 77 Rack/Subrack Alarm Cable Routing and Connection 8. The cable is shown in Figure 76.1 Cable Type The subrack alarm cable is a Cat5 signal cable (code 3FE 26690 AA). middle and bottom subrack. Figure 76 Subrack Alarm Cable 12345678 600 87654321 8. 120 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .6.2 Cable Routing and Connection The routing and connection of the subrack alarm cable is shown in Figure 77.2.6. length 850 mm) can be used for the alarm extension between the top.

LOCAL Subrack alarm cable Rack alarm cable Subrack alarm cable Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 121 .HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AAAL The cable must be connected to the RJ45 connectors on the subrack backplane as follows: • The top RJ45 connector is used to connect the alarm cable going to the subrack above (for the lowermost subrack(s)) • The middle RJ45 connector is used to: • connect the alarm cable from the subrack below (for the uppermost subrack(s)) • connect the rack lamps (for the lowermost subrack only) • The lower RJ45 connector is used to connect the alarm cable to the BDB board (for each subrack) The routing and the connection are shown in Figure 78. Figure 78 Rack/Subrack Alarm Extension Rack lamps Rack lamp .UP Rack lamp .DOWN Rack lamp .

Figure 79 Fuse Alarm Cable 1000 The routing of the fuse alarm cables is shown in Figure 80.6.Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL AAAL 8. Figure 80 Fuse Alarm Cable from Backpanel to Circuit Breaker The fuse alarm cables are connected to: • the circuit breakers (refer to Figure 80) • the fast-on connectors CB_ALARM_A and CB_B on the BPA (refer to Figure 80 and Figure 81) 122 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .4 Fuse Alarm for 7302 FD Subrack 8.75 mm2 cable with 2 fast-ons (code 3FE 27752 AA).6.4.1 From Fast-on on Backpanel to Circuit Breaker The fuse alarm cable is a 0.

6. Figure 83 Fuse Alarm Cable between Circuit Breakers 8.2 Between Circuit Breakers The fuse alarm cable is a 0.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AAAL Figure 81 Fuse Alarm Connectors on BPA EEPROM RJ45 RJ45 BATRET FG BATRET FG RJ45 CB_ALARM_A CB_B DOOR_ALARM_A DOOR_B 8. Figure 82 Fuse Alarm Cable 50 Routing and connection is shown in Figure 83.6.5 Door Alarm An interface for door alarm is provided on the 7302 FD subrack.75 mm2 cable with 2 fast-ons (code 3FE 27752 AA).4. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 123 .

75 mm2 and of sufficient length. • The other end must be connected to the door contact. Note — A possible source is TYCO 1-280001-1 with insulation cap TYCO 1-735075-0. • One end of the cable is equipped with a 6. Note — This alarm is emitted when the loop is closed (no alarm when open).81 mm insulated female fast-on connector.Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL AAAL Two cables need to be assembled and routed in order to use the door alarm feature: • The cables are composed of an insulated wire with minimal cross section 0. Figure 85 Door Alarm Connectors on the Backplane EEPROM RJ45 RJ45 BATRET FG BATRET FG RJ45 CB_ALARM_A CB_B DOOR_ALARM_A DOOR_B Figure 86 shows how the cables have to be routed in the 7302 FD subrack 124 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .35x0. Figure 84 Door Alarm Cable The door alarm contact can be connected to the fast-on connectors DOOR_ALARM_A and DOOR_B on the backplane (refer to Figure 85).

Figure 87 Cable 3FE 27753 AA L 8.1 Cable Type The external alarm cable is a signal cable with a Sub-B 15-pins connector (cable code 3FE 27753 AA).6 External Alarm Cable 8.6.6.6. Figure 88 Sub-D 15-pins Male Connector 1 8 9 15 Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 125 . On the CO side.6. The cable is in Figure 87.2 Connector Pinning Figure 88shows the pinning of the connector which must be connected to the subrack.6.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AAAL Figure 86 Door Alarm Cable Routing 8. the connector must be installed by the customer.

126 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . the blue-white twisted pair is used for Miscellaneous Alarm 1A wire and B wire respectively.Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL AAAL Table 10 shows the pinning of the connector on the subrack side and the color of the corresponding wire for the upper and lower external alarm cable. Note — The twisted pairs are used to link the A-wire and B-wire of each signal. for example.

Frame Ground FG 17 . Not connected FG 16 .HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AAAL Table 10 External Alarm Cable Signal Name Type Connectors Description Subrack side CO side Pin Nr. Cable color MISC1_ALA_A I 1 White Miscellaneous Alarm 1 (A wire) MISC1_ALA_B I 9 Blue Miscellaneous Alarm 1 (B wire) MISC2_ALA_A I 2 White Miscellaneous Alarm 2 (A wire) MISC2_ALA_B I 10 Orange Miscellaneous Alarm 2 (B wire) MISC3_ALA_A I 3 White Miscellaneous Alarm 3 (A wire) MISC3_ALA_B I 11 Green Miscellaneous Alarm 3 (B wire) MISC4_ALA_A I 4 White Miscellaneous Alarm 4 (A wire) MISC4_ALA_B I 12 Brown Miscellaneous Alarm 4 (B wire) MISC5_ALA_A I 5 White Miscellaneous Alarm 5 (A wire) MISC5_ALA_B I 13 Grey Miscellaneous Alarm 5 (B wire) MISC1_OUT_A O 6 Red Miscellaneous Alarm Output 1 (A wire) MISC1_OUT_B O 14 Blue Miscellaneous Alarm Output 1 (B wire) MISC2_OUT_A O 7 Red Miscellaneous Alarm Output 2 (A wire) MISC2_OUT_B O 15 Orange Miscellaneous Alarm Output 2 (B wire) 8 . Frame Ground Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 127 .

8. 128 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . The output alarms are indicated by a short circuit. For single shelf operation.6.Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL AAAL Note 1 — The input alarms are implemented using Normally Closed (NC) relays (that is. Note 3 — The following applies for the external CO alarm signals: • These alarms are Normally Open (NO) • Maximum current drain is 100 mA • Voltage is determined by supply voltage (48 or 60 V) • The BATRET voltage of the Alarm wire is different from the BATRET voltage of the power plant (due to a voltage drop in the feeding cables).3 Cable Routing Connection The cable is routed via the right side of the rack and through the opening in the right side of the subrack. Note 2 — This alarm is emitted when the loop is closed (no alarm when open).6. It is strongly advised to add extra inline 100 mA fuses in the BATRET connections to comply in a safe way with the maximum current drain of 100 mA in the BATRET wire. it does not matter which connector is selected. Note — Both connectors are in parallel. closed when no power is applied). The cable is connected to the connectors on the backplane as shown in Figure 89.

At the same time this 8KHz system reference clock is also distributed to the LT boards in the local shelf. Clock daisy chaining is supported on NANT-A DA and NANT-A DB variants.7 Clock Daisy Chaining A clock daisy-chain supports the distribution of an accurate clock signal across multiple shelves without requiring an NT board that can slave to an external clock or that can generate this accurate clock signal itself in each shelf. The clock daisy-chain starts from the BITS_OUT connector of a BITS-capable NT board. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 129 .HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AAAL Figure 89 External Alarm Cable Connection 8. This connector accommodates the 8KHz system reference clock derived from an external clock or from the local clock. the received 8KHz system clock is also distributed to the LT boards in the local shelf. Again. The daisy-chain is further extended by relaying this 8KHz system reference clock from the BITS_IN connector to the BITS_OUT connector of a non-BITS-capable NT board.

that is. For that reason. In such shelves. or a mix of voice LTs and other LTs in one shelf). the distribution of the clock signals from the NANT-A DA is implemented differently for shelves with voice LTs and shelves without voice LTs in order to support their respective most typical cases. Figure 90 Daisy chaining cable L A B 8. The daisy chain cables between these NT boards can be maximum five meter length. 8. Note — The clock requirements of typical applications on typical shelf configurations with voice and without voice are different. 130 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL AAAL The length of the daisy chain can be maximum five NT boards.2 Clock Daisy Chaining Figure 91 shows the clock daisy chaining. NT with BITS or SyncE needs to be used instead of NANT-A Dx clock daisy chain.7. except that one cable can be up to 15 meter.1 Daisy Chaining Cable Figure 90 shows the daisy chaining cable 3FE 28744 AA. if that shelf contains voice LTs (either voice LTs only. Clock Daisy Chain is NOT supported in a shelf configuration without any voice LT. starting with a BITS-capable NT followed by a maximum of four non-BITS-capable NT boards in the daisy chain.7. Clock Daisy Chain can be used in a shelf configurations with redundant NTs.

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AAAL Figure 91 Clock daisy chaining External BITS signal BITS IN BITS OUT 3FE 28744 AA BITS IN BITS OUT 3FE 28744 AA BITS IN BITS OUT Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 131 .

Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL AAAL 132 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AACL 9 Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AACL 9.4 Subrack Grounding Connection 9.1 Introduction This chapter describes the rack cabling for racks with the NFXS-A subrack 3FE 26685 AACL.3 Power Cabling for 7302 FD Subrack 9.1 Introduction 9.5 Rack Grounding Connection 9. The following items are described: • Applicable safety precautions • Rack power cables: • Internal power cabling • External power cabling • Power filter • Subrack grounding connections • Rack grounding connections • Alarm cables: • Rack alarm cable • Subrack alarm cable • Rack alarm extension • Fuse alarm • Door alarm • External alarm cable • Optical fiber management Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 133 .7 Clock Daisy Chaining 9.6 Alarm Cabling 9.2 Safety Precautions 9.

In line with ETSI specification ETSI EN 300 132-2 V2. Danger 2 — Avoid risk of electric shock! Always wear protective gloves and footwear for all handling tasks.3. verify if it is not live.Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL AACL 9. according to the specified torque.1 General 9. which can deliver -48Vdc or -60Vdc. you must use an insulated tool kit and consult the manual on working on live components. If the power supply is live.3. 9. Warning 1 — Before connecting to the mains power. while the minimum allowed BAT voltage level is -72V dc.1 Power Distribution Frame 7302 FD subracks operate with nominal voltage levels of -48V dc as well as -60V dc supplied by battery power sources in the CO or cabinet.1. 134 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . all fasteners requiring a specific torque must be tightened moderately before final tightening with a torque wrench or driver. These voltage levels refer to the power entry point of the ISAM system (this is the shelf power connection point for FD equipment). When power is supplied. Warning 2 — When no power is supplied. verify the specifications of all equipped fan units to ensure the correct voltage will be supplied (-48 Vdc or -60 Vdc) to these units.2 Safety Precautions The following safety precautions apply: Danger 1 — Before working on the power supply unit. this means that the maximum allowed BAT voltage level is -40. tighten fasteners with insulated tools.5V dc.3 Power Cabling for 7302 FD Subrack 9. Carefully follow the instructions. This power is provided by the Power Distribution Frame (PDF) to the subracks.

1. In case of two-wire connection. 9.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AACL 9. it is advisable. Keeping a distance of 10 cm between signal and power cables is advisable where it imposes no practical problems. BATRET and PE must be connected with the PDF. but not a minimum requirement.4 Two-Wire Configuration At delivery. In order to minimize interference and optimize DSL performance. BATRET and PE are connected together at PDF and in the shelf.3. They are connected at the input terminal block inside the 7302 FD subrack. This configuration can be turned into a two-wire configuration by connecting on the backplane the BATRET fast-ons to the adjacent FG fast-ons by means of 2 fast-on bridges 1AB 08548 0002 (refer to Figure 92). The Safety Ground conductor must be green-yellow insulated cable (EN60950 or IEC60950 compliant).3.3.2 External Ground The FD rack provides one FG on top of the rack. to route power cables using separate channels for signal and power cables. 9. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 135 . BAT and BATRET are connected with the PDF.1. Crossing of signal cables with power cables and parallel routing over short distances are acceptable. which means that BAT.3 Cable Routing Power cables are routed from the PDF to the rack via cable channels overhead or under the raised floor. Figure 92 Fast-on Bridge for Two-Wire Power Configuration BATRET FG Fast-on bridge Figure 93 shows the location of the fast-on terminals on the backplane of the 7302 FD subrack. the subrack is standard configured for three-wire powering.1.

The external power interface is located at the bottom of the subrack. The subrack has a specific power unit part. 136 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .2 Power Unit The 7302 FD subrack is designed to be used as stand-alone equipment.3. refer to Figure 94. The external power interface of the power unit is covered with a plastic safety cover.Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL AACL Figure 93 Location of Fast-on Terminals on Backplane Fast-on terminals X6 X1 X2 X22 X21 X19 X20 X40 X41 X23 9.

The following internal battery cables must be used: • 3FE 62346 AB.3 Internal Power Cabling The internal battery cables are used to interconnect the circuit breaker with the power backpanel PDBP-A. refer to Figure 96 Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 137 .3. refer to Figure 95 • code 3FE 62346 AC.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AACL Figure 94 7302 FD Subrack Power Unit 9.

138 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL AACL Figure 95 Cable 3FE 62346 AB +20 350 mm -0 +20 250 mm -0 200 mm +20 -0 Lug for M6 4 3 2 1 Figure 96 Cable 3FE 62346 AC +20 250 mm -0 +20 180 mm -0 +20 170 mm -0 Lug for M6 4 3 2 1 The routing and connection of the internal battery cables is shown in Figure 97.

Table 11 External Power Cable Descriptions Cable Description Connect to Ω / km Voltage Maximum Maximum Drop Current Length Power cable 25 mm2 BAT A 0.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AACL Figure 97 Internal Battery Cable Routing and Connection 9.79 m BAT B BATRET A BATRET B (1 of 2) Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 139 .4.35 V 79 A 26.3.3.1 Cable Type Table 11 shows the different cables that can be used for the external power cabling.4 External Power Cabling 9.84 1.

1AB032050023).31 1.35 m BAT B 1.18 m BATRET A BATRET B 2 Power cable 10 mm BAT A 2.31 1.3.43 m BAT B BATRET A BATRET B (2 of 2) All the power cables have to be equipped with an 8 mm lug at one end (for example.554 1. 140 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL AACL Cable Description Connect to Ω / km Voltage Maximum Maximum Drop Current Length Power cable 35 mm2 BAT A 0.1 1.35 V 60 A 17.2 Power Cable Routing and Connection The external power cables are routed through the left vertical cable channel of the rack and they can be routed to the external power connection terminals at the bottom of the 7302 FD subrack. refer to Figure 98.35 V 30 A 21. refer to Figure 99. 9.61 m BAT B BATRET A BATRET B 2 Power cable 16 mm BAT A 1. Figure 98 External Power Cable Label 30 L Note — The color of the power cables must be according to local installation practices.35 V 30 A 34.35 V 96 A 40. For an example.4. refer to Figure 99.

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AACL Figure 99 External Power Cable Routing Caution — The terminal lugs of the external power cables must be well isolated to avoid unintentional contact outside the isolation cover. Procedure 21 Connecting the Power Cables Proceed as follows to connect the power cables: 1 Connect the power cables as shown in Figure 100 and Figure 101. Figure 100 External Power Interface on Backpanel All M8 nuts are to be fixed with a torque of 10 Nm (maximum 12 Nm) Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 141 .

3.5 Power Filter The EMI power filter. 9. 142 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . The PDBP-A backpanel can be removed in case of failure. is located on the backpanel.Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL AACL Figure 101 Connecting the External Power Cables 2 Tighten the nuts with a torque of 10 Nm (maximum 12 Nm). The EMI filter is covered with a perforated EMC screen. based on common mode chokes.

4.4mm. Inaccurate grounding connection can cause electric shock or equipment damage when the rack power is switched on.1 External Grounding Connection 9.1. 9.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AACL Figure 102 Mounting the Power Filter EMI power filter 9.4. 25 or 35mm2 yellow-green cable equipped with a dual hole lug with hole size 6mm and hole spacing 25.4 Subrack Grounding Connection Warning — Possible risk of personal injury or damage to equipment due to inaccurate or faulty ground cabling.1 Cable Type The grounding cable is a 16. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 143 . Add that the cable can be connected either to left side or right side.

144 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .2 Internal Grounding Connection A ground cable is installed between the fixed panel and the rotating panel of the power unit to guarantee the reliable connection between the ESD connection point and the ground.1. The grounding cable is connected to the subrack frame with two bolts and nuts.Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL AACL Figure 103 External Grounding Cable L 9. The cable can be connected either to the left side or the right side of the subrack. The connection of the grounding cable (on the left side) is shown in Figure 104.4. Figure 104 Subrack Grounding 9.4.2 Cable Routing and Connection The grounding cable must be assembled when the subrack is stand-alone and is not mandatory if the subrack is assembled in a rack. The cable is routed through an opening in the right side or the left side of the subrack to the grounding terminal.

Figure 106 Internal Grounding 9.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AACL 9.2 Cable Routing and Connection The internal grounding cable is routed and connected as shown in Figure 106.4.4. the rack frame has an M10 and M6 bolt and nut.1 Cable Type The subrack grounding cable (code 3FE 27366 AD) is a 4 mm2 yellow-green cable with a 4 mm lug and a fast-on connector. The cable is shown in Figure 105. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 145 .2. The grounding cable has a two-hole lug.5 Rack Grounding Connection The grounding cable of the CO is connected to the rack frame with two bolts and nuts on top. Warning — Possible risk of personal injury or damage to equipment due to inaccurate or faulty ground cabling. Figure 105 Subrack Grounding Cable 160 9.2. Inaccurate grounding connection can cause electric shock or equipment damage when the rack power is switched on.

6. run it to the top of the rack. 2 Per local practices.Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL AACL Procedure 22 Connecting the Rack Ground 1 Prepare the grounding cable.1 Rack Alarm Extension The rack alarm extension cable (code 3FE 26690 AC. 146 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . 3 Connect the grounding cable via the single hole lug to the rack frame with the nuts and washers present at the PE threaded stud on top of the rack (refer to Figure 107). length 1100 mm) can be used for the alarm extension between the bottom and middle subrack and between the middle and top subrack in case of the NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AACL. Figure 107 Rack Grounding Point Rack grounding point 9. Secure the nuts applying a torque of 7 Nm.6 Alarm Cabling 9.

6.2 Door Alarm An interface for door alarm is provided on the 7302 FD subrack. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 147 .HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AACL The cable must be connected to the RJ45 connectors on the subrack backplane as follows: • The left RJ45 connector is used to connect the alarm cable going to the subrack above • The right RJ45 connector is used to: • connect the alarm cable from the subrack below (for the uppermost subrack(s)) • connect the rack lamps (for the lowermost subrack only) The routing and the connection are shown in Figure 108. Figure 108 Rack/Subrack Alarm Extension A 3FE 28979 CA 1AD 00010 0002 3FE 26690 AC A 9.

refer to Figure 112. The CO alarm extension cables are routed as shown in Figure 113. • The other end must be connected to the door contact. Figure 109 Door Alarm Connectors on the Backplane X6 X1 X2 X22 X21 X19 X20 X40 X41 X23 Door alarm connectors Note 1 — A possible source is TYCO 1-280001-1 with insulation cap TYCO 1-735075-0. • One end of the cable is equipped with a 6. The cable is connected on the “CO Alarms up” connector in the lower subrack and on the “CO Alarms down” connector of the upper subrack. 9.81 mm insulated female fast-on connector. The door alarm contact can be connected to the fast-on connectors DOOR_ALARM_A and DOOR_B on the backplane (refer to Figure 109). Note 2 — This alarm is emitted when the loop is closed (no alarm when open).Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL AACL Two cables need to be assembled and routed in order to use the door alarm feature: • The cables are composed of an insulated wire with a minimal cross-section 0. length 1100 mm) can be used for the external alarm extension between the bottom and middle subrack and between the middle and top subrack in case of the RSA-NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AACL.6.75 mm2 and of sufficient length. 148 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .3 External Alarm Extension The external alarm extension cable (code 3FE 29924 AC.35X0.

Table 12 External Alarm Cable Signal Name Type Connectors Description Subrack side CO side Pin Nr. Cable color MISC1_ALA_A I 1 White Miscellaneous Alarm 1 (A wire) MISC1_ALA_B I 9 Blue Miscellaneous Alarm 1 (B wire) MISC2_ALA_A I 2 White Miscellaneous Alarm 2 (A wire) MISC2_ALA_B I 10 Orange Miscellaneous Alarm 2 (B wire) MISC3_ALA_A I 3 White Miscellaneous Alarm 3 (A wire) MISC3_ALA_B I 11 Green Miscellaneous Alarm 3 (B wire) (1 of 2) Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 149 . Figure 110 Cable 3FE 27753 AA L 9.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AACL 9.6. The cable is in Figure 110. the blue-white twisted pair is used for Miscellaneous Alarm 1A wire and B wire respectively. for example. Note — The twisted pairs are used to link the A-wire and B-wire of each signal.2 Connector Pinning Figure 111shows the pinning of the connector which must be connected to the subrack. On the CO side.3.3.1 Cable Type The external alarm cable is a signal cable with a Sub-B 15-pins connector (cable code 3FE 27753 AA). Figure 111 Sub-D 15-pins Male Connector 1 8 9 15 Table 12 shows the pinning of the connector on the subrack side and the color of the corresponding wire for the upper and lower external alarm cable. the connector must be installed by the customer.6.

Cable color MISC4_ALA_A I 4 White Miscellaneous Alarm 4 (A wire) MISC4_ALA_B I 12 Brown Miscellaneous Alarm 4 (B wire) MISC5_ALA_A I 5 White Miscellaneous Alarm 5 (A wire) MISC5_ALA_B I 13 Grey Miscellaneous Alarm 5 (B wire) MISC1_OUT_A O 6 Red Miscellaneous Alarm Output 1 (A wire) MISC1_OUT_B O 14 Blue Miscellaneous Alarm Output 1 (B wire) MISC2_OUT_A O 7 Red Miscellaneous Alarm Output 2 (A wire) MISC2_OUT_B O 15 Orange Miscellaneous Alarm Output 2 (B wire) 8 .3 Cable Routing Connection The cable is routed via the right side of the rack and below the rack. 150 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . Not connected FG 16 .3.6. Frame Ground FG 17 . The cable is connected to the connectors on the backplane as shown in Figure 112. Frame Ground (2 of 2) 9.Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL AACL Signal Name Type Connectors Description Subrack side CO side Pin Nr.

Note 2 — Both connectors are in parallel. For single shelf operation.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AACL Figure 112 External Alarm Cable Connection X6 X1 X2 X22 X21 X19 X20 X40 X41 X23 External alarm cable connection Note 1 — The following applies for the external CO alarm signals: • These alarms are Normally Open (NO) • Maximum current drain is 100 mA • Voltage is determined by supply voltage (48 or 60 V) • The BATRET voltage of the Alarm wire is different from the BATRET voltage of the power plant (due to a voltage drop in the feeding cables). it does not matter which connector is selected. It is strongly advised to add extra inline 100 mA fuses in the BATRET connections to comply in a safe way with the maximum current drain of 100 mA in the BATRET wire. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 151 .

Again. Clock daisy chaining is supported on NANT-A DA and NANT-A DB variants. 152 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . The clock daisy-chain starts from the BITS_OUT connector of a BITS-capable NT board. At the same time this 8KHz system reference clock is also distributed to the LT boards in the local shelf. the received 8KHz system clock is also distributed to the LT boards in the local shelf.7 Clock Daisy Chaining A clock daisy-chain supports the distribution of an accurate clock signal across multiple shelves without requiring an NT board that can slave to an external clock or that can generate this accurate clock signal itself in each shelf. The daisy-chain is further extended by relaying this 8KHz system reference clock from the BITS_IN connector to the BITS_OUT connector of a non-BITS-capable NT board. This connector accommodates the 8KHz system reference clock derived from an external clock or from the local clock.Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL AACL Figure 113 External Alarm Cable Connection B 3FE 29924 AC B 9.

Note — The clock requirements of typical applications on typical shelf configurations with voice and without voice are different. or a mix of voice LTs and other LTs in one shelf). i. NT with BITS or SyncE needs to be used instead of NANT-A Dx clock daisy chain. 9. The daisy chain cables between these NT boards can be maximum five meter length.7.7. Figure 114 Daisy chaining cable L A B 9.2 Clock Daisy Chaining Figure 115 shows the clock daisy chaining. the distribution of the clock signals from the NANT-A DA is implemented differently for shelves with voice LTs and shelves without voice LTs in order to support their respective most typical cases. For that reason.1 Daisy Chaining Cable Figure 114 shows the daisy chaining cable 3FE 28744 AA. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 153 .HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 AACL The length of the daisy chain can be maximum five NT boards. Clock Daisy Chain can be used in a shelf configurations with redundant NTs. In such shelves. if that shelf contains voice LTs (either voice LTs only.e. starting with a BITS-capable NT followed by a maximum of four non-BITS-capable NT boards in the daisy chain. except that one cable can be up to 15 meter. Clock Daisy Chain is NOT supported in a shelf configuration without any voice LT.

Rack Cabling for Racks with NFXS-A 3FE 26685 HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL AACL Figure 115 Clock daisy chaining External BITS signal BITS IN BITS OUT 3FE 28744 AA BITS IN BITS OUT 3FE 28744 AA BITS IN BITS OUT 154 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

3 Dummy Front Panels 10.1 Introduction This chapter gives the procedures to install Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) in: • a 7302 FD subrack • an FD non-MTA splitter subrack Note — For an overview of the supported boards. showing the areas and the slot positions. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 155 .6 Guideline for Board Installation 10.7 Installation Procedures 10. refer to the 7302 ISAM Product Information.2 Subrack Areas and Slot Positions 10.5 Recommended Tools 10. 10.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Installing Boards 10 Installing Boards 10.2 Subrack Areas and Slot Positions This section gives the layout of the different supported subracks.4 Restrictions on Board Combinations 10.1 Introduction 10.

2. not in the NT-B slot or the NTIO slot. Figure 116 Slot Positions in 7302 FD-LT (with NT redundancy) NTIO NT B LT02 LT03 LT04 LT05 LT06 LT07 LT08 LT09 LT10 LT11 LT12 LT13 LT14 LT15 LT16 NTA LT01 Figure 117 Slot Positions in 7302 FD-LT (no NT redundancy) LT02 LT03 LT04 LT05 LT06 LT07 LT08 LT17 LT18 LT09 LT10 LT11 LT12 LT13 LT14 LT15 LT16 NTA LT01 156 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . refer to Figure 121 Note 1 — For systems without NT redundancy.1 7302 FD Subrack For a 7302 FD subrack. the slot positions can vary depending on the used configuration: • a 7302 FD subrack equipped only with LT boards is indicated as 7302 FD-LT: • for the slot positions of a 7302 FD-LT subrack and with NT redundancy. refer to Figure 116 • for the slot positions of a 7302 FD-LT subrack and without NT redundancy. refer to Figure 119 • a 7302 FD subrack equipped with combined LT/splitter boards: • for the slot positions of a 7302 FD subrack equipped with combined LT/splitter boards and with NT redundancy. refer to Figure 117 • a 7302 FD subrack equipped with both LT boards and splitter boards is indicated as 7302 FD-Combo: • for the slot positions of a 7302 FD-Combo subrack and with NT redundancy.Installing Boards HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 10. refer to Figure 120 • for the slot positions of a 7302 FD subrack equipped with combined LT/splitter boards and without NT redundancy. refer to Figure 118 • for the slot positions of a 7302 FD-Combo subrack and without NT redundancy. Note 2 — GPON LT boards can only be mounted in LT slots. all the regular LT slots (LT01 to LT16) need to be filled before the NT-B slot and the NTIO slot can be used as extra LT slot.

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Installing Boards Figure 118 Slot Positions in 7302 FD-Combo (with NT redundancy) NTIO SP01 SP02 SP03 SP04 SP05 SP06 SP07 SP08 NTA NTB LT01 LT02 LT03 LT04 LT05 LT06 LT07 LT08 Figure 119 Slot Positions in 7302 FD-Combo (no NT redundancy) SP01 SP02 SP03 SP04 SP05 SP06 SP07 SP08 NTA SP09 LT01 LT02 LT03 LT04 LT09 LT05 LT06 LT07 LT08 Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 157 .

2.Installing Boards HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 120 Slot Positions in 7302 FD subrack equipped with combined LT/ splitter boards (with NT redundancy) LT/SP 03 LT/SP 05 LT/SP 07 LT/SP 09 LT/SP 11 LT/SP 13 LT/SP 15 LT/SP 02 LT/SP 04 LT/SP 06 LT/SP 08 LT/SP 10 LT/SP 12 LT/SP 14 LT/SP 01 LT/SP 16 NTIO NT B NTA Figure 121 Slot Positions in 7302 FD subrack equipped with combined LT/ splitter boards (no NT redundancy) LT/SP 03 LT/SP 05 LT/SP 07 LT/SP 09 LT/SP 11 LT/SP 13 LT/SP 15 LT/SP 02 LT/SP 04 LT/SP 06 LT/SP 08 LT/SP 17 LT/SP 18 LT/SP 10 LT/SP 12 LT/SP 14 LT/SP 16 LT/SP 01 NTA Table 13 shows the maximum number of boards that can be installed in a 7302 FD subrack for the different configurations. Table 13 Number of Boards Configuration with NT redundancy without NT redundancy 7302 FD-LT 16 LT boards 18 LT boards 7302 FD-Combo 8 LT boards and 8 splitter boards 9 LT boards and 9 splitter boards 7302 FD with combined LT/ 16 LT/SP boards 18 LT/SP boards splitter boards 10.2 FD non-MTA Splitter Subrack Figure 122 gives a view of the slot positions of the FD non-MTA splitter subrack. 158 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

Cabling a dummy panel is done in exactly the same way as cabling of an actual plug in unit. At slot deployment. A dummy front panel never has ejector handles.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Installing Boards Figure 122 Areas and Slot Positions in FD non-MTA Splitter Subrack Slot 01 Slot 02 Slot 03 Slot 04 Slot 05 Slot 06 Slot 07 Slot 08 Slot 17 Slot 18 Slot 09 Slot 10 Slot 11 Slot 12 Slot 13 Slot 14 Slot 15 Slot 16 10. NTIO boards or splitter boards (splitter subrack) when needed. All that needs to be done to install the panel is to position the panel in front of the slot and lock it by fastening it via its two fixation screw (similar to the last step of installing a board.3 Dummy Front Panels Dummy front panels must be mounted on any unused slot of a subrack for the following purposes: • to ensure EMC compliance • to ensure thermal compliance via a correct airflow in the subrack • to ensure safety by avoiding direct contact with backplane connectors • To allow (MDF or optical) pre-cabling towards LT boards (FD-LT subrack). so the same cabling procedures as described in chapters 11 (optical cabling) and 12 (MDF cabling) are applicable. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 159 . see Step 6 of Procedure 23). the dummy front panel is replaced by the appropriate board and the cables are connected to the board. Three types of dummy front panel types exist: • a blank dummy front panel (when pre-cabling is not required) • dummy front panels for MDF pre-cabling • dummy front panels for optical fiber pre-cabling Please refer to the 7302 ISAM FD Product Information Manual for a summary of the different dummy front panels that can be equipped in the 7302 ISAM and to the individual Unit Data Sheet (UDS) for details on the panels.

4 Restrictions on Board Combinations This section is only applicable in case of VDSL deployment in FD Combo subracks (that is. 10.Installing Boards HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Specifically with respect to the dummy front panel for MDF pre-cabling. Note: part B must be removed if 48-pair connectors are fixed on the dummy front panel. the universal plastic cut-out (see Figure 123) allows the mounting of either 48-pair connectors or 72-pair connectors: • 48-pair connectors can be fixed using the snap hooks A and C in Figure 123.4 Nm. 160 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . 10. the GPON LT boards must be placed from the right side of the shelf. • 72-pair connectors can be fixed with a screw on fixation B in Figure 123 Note: fix the screw with a maximum torque of 0.4.1 Restriction on combining GPON LT boards and DSL LT boards in the same subrack When combining GPON LT boards (NGLT-A) with DSL LT boards in the same subrack. with LT boards and splitter boards in the same subrack).2 Supported Mixed LT/Splitter Configurations Figure 124 shows the supported mixed LT/splitter configurations which are supported in the 7302 FD Combo subrack. The connector can be released by inserting a screwdriver in bracket C.4. Figure 123 Universal Plastic Cut-out A B C 10. To avoid interference the GPON LT board should never be placed on the left side of a splitter board for a DSL LT.

• Philips screwdriver M2. splitters and voice LTs in each building block is fixed as shown in Figure 124.6 Guideline for Board Installation This section provides a guideline for the correct installation of a board in the shelf: Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 161 . Note: This screwdriver is only required when the front stiffener must be removed. 10.5. 10. ISDN board and ISDN board The order of xDSL LTs. splitter board and POTS board • quadruplets: LT board.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Installing Boards Figure 124 Supported Board Combinations Duplets Triplets Quadruplets x S x S P x S I I D p D p O D p S S S l S l T S l D D L i L i S L i N N t t t t t t e e e r r r The building blocks of these configurations are one of the following: • duplets: LT board and splitter board • triplets: LT board. Note — The customer should contact the local Customer Services representative for advice if he intends to use another configuration than the configurations recommended above. splitter board. Other combinations are not recommended.5 Recommended Tools The following tools are recommended: • Screwdriver to secure boards • Antistatic wrist strap for handling boards with ESD sensitive devices • Ohmmeter to check connection of wrist strap to earth bounding point.

Guide the board to the right of the slot in the shelf board guides while taking care that the SMD components of the board do not touch the board mounted to the left. 162 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . Figure 125 Guide the board in its slot 2 Pull back the ejector handles.Installing Boards HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Procedure 23 Installing a Board Proceed as follows to install a board: 1 Gently plug the board in the shelf until the front panel of the board touches the shelf.

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Installing Boards Figure 126 Pull back the ejector handles 3 Place one thumb at the bottom left on the front panel next to the mnemonic label and place the other thumb on the front panel below the top ejector handle. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 163 .

5 Push both ejector handles simultaneously to completely insert the board in the shelf slot. 164 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .Installing Boards HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 127 Push the board in place 4 Push with the lower thumb and guide with the top thumb. now you should refer to the ejector handles moving in.

Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 165 .HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Installing Boards Figure 128 Lock the ejector handles 6 Lock the board in place by fastening the fixation screws.

Installing Boards HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 129 Fasten the lower fixation screw 166 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

Table 14 shows the applicable procedures. Table 14 Applicable Procedures Procedure Procedure Installing ESD Sensitive Boards 24 Removing the Stiffener 25 Installing the NT Boards 26 Installing an NT I/O Board 27 Installing LT Boards in 7302 FD Subrack 28 Installing Splitter Boards in 7302 FD Subrack 29 (1 of 2) Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 167 .7 Installation Procedures This section describes the installation procedures of the boards supported in your system.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Installing Boards Figure 130 Fasten the upper fixation screw 10.

168 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . • Transport and store boards in ESD protective bags or boxes • Make sure to wear a grounded wrist strap before handling • DO NOT touch circuit traces or components on the board • Handle boards at front and side edges only. Procedure 1 Review requirements (IEC 61340-5-x) for handling ESD boards. Most boards and powered equipment contain devices that are susceptible to ESD. it carries the label of Figure 132. Figure 131 ESD Awareness Symbol Caution — Risk of damage to equipment with ESD sensitive devices. Ensure that ESD conditions meet requirements of IEC 61340-5-x. Other procedures describing installation of ESD sensitive boards refer to this general procedure.Installing Boards HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Procedure Procedure Installing Combined LT/Splitter Boards in 7302 FD Subrack 30 Installing Splitter Boards in an FD non-MTA Splitter Subrack 31 (2 of 2) Procedure 24 Installing ESD Sensitive Boards This general procedure describes the installation of plug-in boards containing devices that susceptible to ESD. 2 Put on the antistatic wrist strap and connect it to the Earth Bonding Point at the bottom of the 7302 FD subrack. ESD could damage these or other devices in unconnected circuit conditions. Carefully follow these rules when handling ESD sensitive boards. General Boards or assemblies with ESD sensitive devices are labelled or tagged with the ESD awareness symbol shown in Figure 131.

). it must measure 1 MΩ +/. 6 Slide the boards into the slot and seat the boards firmly into the chassis backplane by pushing on the front stiffener of the boards. if any. 5 Perform specific steps.20% to ground. 7 Lock the board in place with the fixation screws located at the top and the bottom of the faceplate of the board (refer to Figure 133). for boards to be installed (for example. switches.. 4 Remove the board from the ESD protective bag.. jumper setting. Caution — Refer to section “Guideline for Board Installation” for the correct procedure..HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Installing Boards Figure 132 Label for Earth Bonding Point EARTH BONDING POINT 3 Test the ESD wrist strap with the ohmmeter to ensure effectiveness. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 169 .

for making an NT redundant configuration).Installing Boards HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 133 Fixation Screws Fixation screws A/4 FOR SPL A/60 FOR LT B/4 FOR SPL B/60 FOR LT 10. gasket foam is attached on the stiffener to ensure EMI shielding. 170 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . refer to Figure 135.1 5mm Stiffener To adjust the difference between the width of the NT board (30mm) and the width of the LT board (25mm). Note — In case the stiffener is removed (for example. One M2. it should be retained for later use when the system is converted back to an 18 LT system. Also.5 screw is enclosed in the 5mm stiffener assembly to mount the part in the subrack.7. a 5mm stiffener (refer to Figure 134) is mounted by default beside the slot for NTB in all delivered 7302 FD subracks. The stiffener is a sheet-metal part made of 1mm stainless steel board.

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Installing Boards Figure 134 5mm Stiffener Figure 135 Position of 5 mm Stiffener 5 mm stiffener Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 171 .

that is. 172 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . Procedure 25 Removing the Stiffener Proceed as follows: 1 To mount the 5mm stiffener: i Insert the bottom of the stiffener in the hole in the fiber channel Figure 136 Insert Stiffener 5mm stiffener (3FE 27034 AAAA) Fiber channel (3FE 27264 AAAA) ii Tighten the fixation screw. change the configuration of a 7302 FD subrack from 16LT to 18LT. Note — It is not recommended to perform the inverse operation.Installing Boards HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL If the 7302 FD subrack will be used in a 16LT configuration. this stiffener has to be removed before the NT board can be installed in slot NTB/LT18.

Note — Before the NT board can be installed in slot NTB. if any. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 173 . Refer to Procedure 25.5x3 screw 5mm stiffener 2 To remove the stiffener: i Remove the fixation screw ii Remove the stiffener Procedure 26 Installing the NT Boards General A 7302 FD subrack has one or two redundant Network Termination (NT) boards. in slot NT B (refer to Figures 118).HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Installing Boards Figure 137 Tighten screw M2. the redundant board. The single (first) NT board is inserted in slot NT A. the 5 mm front stiffener has to be removed.

174 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . Procedure 1 Remove the NT board from its ESD protective bag. Make sure to wear the antistatic wrist strap. When installing optical boards or handling optical fibers.Installing Boards HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 138 NT Slots in 7302 FD Subrack NT A NT B A/4 FOR SPL A/60 FOR LT B/4 FOR SPL B/60 FOR LT Danger — Risk of eye damage or skin burns by LASER emission. Carefully follow ESD safety precautions. Put end caps on open connectors to protect against unexpected emission. Caution — Risk of damage by ESD when board is not connected. This board contains devices that are susceptible to damage caused by ESD in unconnected circuit conditions. never look inside connectors of boards or fibers when these are not connected.

that is. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 175 . • the green “A/S” LED is steady on. If not done properly. Then it displays an enabling operation signal. • the green “PWR” LED is steady on. 5 Install the second NT board in slot NT B in the same manner. The NT I/O applique is a single board installed which is installed in the NT I/O slot between the two NT slots of the 7302 FD subrack. Procedure 27 Installing an NT I/O Board General Each subrack containing one or two redundant NT boards can have an NT I/O applique. refer to Figure 139. that is. special attention should be paid that the solder side of the NT board does not come into contact with the EMC shielding plate adjacent to the NT slot. • the red “ALM” LED is off. The board first displays a heartbeat signal. Caution 2 — When sliding the NT board into the slot. Caution 1 — Refer to section “Guideline for Board Installation” for the correct procedure. the green “PWR” LED is flashing. 3 Secure the board in place with the fixation screws. 4 Wait until the NT board in the NT A slot is fully operational. this may cause damage at the solder side of the NT board.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Installing Boards 2 Slide the NT board in the NT A slot of the subrack (refer to Figure 138) and seat the board firmly into the chassis backplane by pushing on the front stiffener of the board.

2 Remove the NT I/O applique from its protective bag. 176 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .Installing Boards HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 139 Installing NT I/O Board in 7302 FD Subrack NTIO A/4 FOR SPL A/60 FOR LT B/4 FOR SPL B/60 FOR LT Procedure 1 Locate the single NT I/O slot between the two NT slots.(Figure 139).

the 7302 FD subrack can house up to 18 Line Termination (LT) boards. this may cause damage at the solder side of the NTIO board.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Installing Boards 3 Slide the board in the NT I/O slot of the subrack (refer to Figure 139) and seat the board firmly into the chassis backplane by pushing on the front stiffener of the board. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 177 . Procedure 28 Installing LT Boards in 7302 FD Subrack General Depending on the configuration. special attention should be paid that the solder side of the NTIO board does not come into contact with the EMC shielding plate adjacent to the NTIO slot. 4 Secure the board in place with the fixation screws. Caution 2 — When sliding the NTIO board into the slot. Caution 1 — Refer to section “Guideline for Board Installation” for the correct procedure. If not done properly. Refer to Table 15.

When doing so.Installing Boards HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Table 15 Number of Boards Configuration with NT redundancy without NT redundancy 7302 FD Combo 8 LT boards 9 LT boards 7302 FD LT 16 LT boards 18 LT boards Caution — Please take care when inserting a new LT board adjacent to an already installed (and fully-cabled) splitter board. 178 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . and when later in time a second LT board/splitter board pair is installed. after which the board can be secured in place with the fixation screws. This situation occurs when a first LT board/splitter board pair is already installed (with all the required cabling). make sure that the component side of the newly installed LT board does not touch the front connectors of the adjacent splitter board. special attention should be paid that the solder side of the LT board does not come into contact with the connectors of the adjacent splitter board. When sliding the new LT board into the LT slot. We advise the following steps to control this process: • First. seat the LT board firmly into the chassis backplane by pushing on the front stiffener of the board. this may cause damage at the solder side of the LT board. Optional tie-wrap hooks are forerefer ton on the connectors for this purpose. Figure 140 shows the slots for the LTs when the 7302 FD subrack is used in Combo configuration and with NT redundancy. If not done properly. • Second. make sure that all the front cables and the front connectors are positioned straight onto the already installed splitter board (that is. without torsion).

Caution 1 — Refer to section “Guideline for Board Installation” for the correct procedure. If not done properly. Caution 2 — When sliding the LT board into slot 9. 3 Slide the LT board in the appropriate LT slot (refer to Figure 140) and seat the board firmly into the chassis backplane by pushing on the front stiffener of the board. This board contains devices that are susceptible to damage caused by ESD in unconnected circuit conditions. this may cause damage at the solder side of the LT board. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 179 . Caution — Risk of damage by ESD when board is not connected.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Installing Boards Figure 140 Installing LT Boards in 7302 FD Combo Subrack A/4 FOR SPL A/60 FOR LT B/4 FOR SPL B/60 FOR LT Procedure 1 Locate the free LT slots for mounting the LT boards. 2 Remove the LT board from its ESD protective bag. Carefully follow ESD safety precautions. Make sure to wear the antistatic wrist strap. Refer to Figure 140. special attention should be paid that the solder side of the LT board does not come into contact with the EMC shielding plate adjacent to the LT slot.

the green “PWR” LED is flashing. that is. The board first displays a heartbeat signal. Refer to Table 16. that is. install all the planned LTs of the subrack. The splitter boards are placed to the right of the corresponding LT board. Then it displays an enabling operation signal. 5 In the same way. • the green “PWR” LED is steady on. the 7302 FD subrack can house up to 9 splitter boards. • the red “ALM” LED is off. Procedure 29 Installing Splitter Boards in 7302 FD Subrack General Depending on the configuration.Installing Boards HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 4 Secure the board in place with the fixation screws. 180 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . Table 16 Number of Boards Configuration with NT redundancy without NT redundancy 7302 FD Combo 8 SP boards 9 SP boards Figure 141 shows the slots for the splitter boards when the 7302 FD subrack is used in Combo configuration and with NT redundancy.

Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 181 . if present (refer to “MDF Cabling”). 4 Slide the splitter board in the appropriate splitter slot (refer to Figure 141) and seat the board firmly into the chassis backplane by pushing on the front stiffener of the board. Caution — Refer to section “Guideline for Board Installation” for the correct procedure. 3 Remove the splitter from its protective bag. 5 Secure the board in place with the fixation screws.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Installing Boards Figure 141 Installing Splitter Boards in 7302 FD Combo Subrack A/4 FOR SPL A/60 FOR LT B/4 FOR SPL B/60 FOR LT Procedure 1 Locate the AP slot corresponding with the slot which is housing the LT in the 7302 FD subrack. 2 Disconnect the MDF cables and remove the dummy plate.

7 In the same way. Figure 142 Installing Combined LT/Splitter Boards in 7302 FD Subrack 182 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . Table 17 Number of Boards Configuration with NT redundancy without NT redundancy 7302 FD with combined LT/splitter boards 16 LT/SP boards 18 LT/SP boards Figure 142 shows the slots for the combined LT/splitter boards when the 7302 FD subrack is used with NT redundancy. to the four front plate connectors. the 7302 FD subrack can house up to 18 combined LT/splitter boards. if any. install a splitter for each equipped LT board in the 7302 FD subrack. Refer to Table 17.Installing Boards HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 6 Connect the MDF cables. Procedure 30 Installing Combined LT/Splitter Boards in 7302 FD Subrack General Depending on the configuration.

Refer to Figure 140. Carefully follow ESD safety precautions. 3 Slide the combined LT/splitter board in the appropriate slot (refer to Figure 142) and seat the board firmly into the chassis backplane by pushing on the front stiffener of the board. • the red “ALM” LED is off. that is. special attention should be paid that the solder side of the board does not come into contact with the EMC shielding plate adjacent to the slot.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Installing Boards Procedure 1 Locate the free slots for mounting the combined LT/splitter boards. If not done properly. • the green “PWR” LED is steady on. the green “PWR” LED is flashing. Make sure to wear the antistatic wrist strap. The board first displays a heartbeat signal. Caution — Risk of damage by ESD when board is not connected. Each board is inserted in the AP slot that corresponds with the LT slot housing the LT board. Then it displays an enabling operation signal. This board contains devices that are susceptible to damage caused by ESD in unconnected circuit conditions. 2 Remove the combined LT/splitter board from its ESD protective bag. Caution 1 — Refer to section “Guideline for Board Installation” for the correct procedure. that is. one per LT board installed in the corresponding 7302 FD subrack. 5 In the same way. Caution 2 — When sliding the combined LT/splitter board into slot 9. install all the planned combined LT/splitter boards of the subrack. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 183 . Procedure 31 Installing Splitter Boards in an FD non-MTA Splitter Subrack General The FD non-MTA splitter subrack can house up to eighteen splitter boards. 4 Secure the board in place with the fixation screws. this may cause damage at the solder side of the board.

to the six front plate connectors. 4 Insert the board in the AP slot and secure with front plate screws. 3 Remove the splitter board from its protective bag. install a splitter for each DSL LIM equipped in the 7302 FD subrack (maximum eighteen). The AP slot number and the LT slot number must be identical. 5 Connect MDF cables. if present (refer to “MDF Cabling”).Installing Boards HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Procedure 1 Locate the AP slot corresponding with the slot which is housing the LT in the 7302 FD subrack. Caution — Refer to section “Guideline for Board Installation” for the correct procedure. 184 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . if any. 2 Disconnect the six MDF cables and remove the dummy plate. 6 In the same way.

3 Optional fiber protection and bending protection items.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Fiber Optic Cable Management 11 Fiber Optic Cable Management 11.2 Fiber Optic Handling and Acceptance Criteria 11.1 Introduction This chapter describes the fiber optic cable management for the 7302 FD subrack.4 Managing Fiber Optic Cables for LT Boards 11. It is based on the following concepts: 1 Vertical routing of the optical fibers out of the rack towards overhead fiber cable trays is done in the two vertical cable channels located at the front left and front right side of the rack.2 Fiber Optic Handling and Acceptance Criteria 11. scratches.2. for the connections to perform properly. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 185 .1 Introduction 11.3 Managing Fiber Optic Cables for NT Boards and NTIO Boards 11. and other surface distortions. Fiber optic connectors and receptacles must be clean and free of cracks. pits. 11. 2 Fiber routing and management within the 7302 FD subracks towards the dedicated fiber outlets of the subrack.1 General This section describes the handling of fiber optic devices and acceptance criteria for fiber optic device inspections.

otherwise the fiber optic equipment may become contaminated. it is an industry best practice to use APC-based connections or spliced connections to avoid any potential network problems. Warning 1 — Always inspect and.Fiber Optic Cable Management HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Observe the following: Danger — Never look into the end of an optical fiber while optical power is being applied to the fiber. Warning 2 — Always use the proper cleaning materials. The fibers and connectors may be connected to a laser transmitter. if necessary. clean the fiber optic connectors before connecting them to any equipment.2. 11. 186 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . Warning 4 — While cleaning a fiber optic connector. Warning 3 — Clean fiber optic receptacles only when the receptacles are connected for the first time. avoid eye exposure to open-ended fibers and optical connectors. do not touch the surface of the connector with your fingers. When cleaning or taking measurements.2 Handling considerations Figure 143 shows the main parts of a fiber optic cable. Note — In a fiber distribution network. or if there is evidence of contamination. Nokia recommends that the unused ports of splitters be terminated into an APC- based connector.

• Keep dust and contaminants away from fiber optic surfaces. • Do not crush or damage fibers by placing objects on top of a cable or a connector. • Do not allow cables to support any weight. • Do not use cable ties to secure fiber optic cables. • Handle cables with care. • Do not expose the cable to excessive heat. • Do not touch the fiber cable end-faces. • Do not allow connectors to strike or drag across work surfaces. • Keep dust caps on connectors and input/output plugs on receptacles until just prior to installation. • Store unused dust caps and plugs in an anti-static. • The bend radius for single-mode optical fiber cable should not be less than 102 mm. and the bend radius for multimode optical fiber cable is 152 mm. or by rough handling while mounting other nearby devices. • Connect or disconnect a connector by holding the sides of the connector and pulling gently. including the floor.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Fiber Optic Cable Management Figure 143 Parts of a fiber optic cable Core Cladding Ferrule Connector Boot Cable Consider the following when handling fiber optic devices and accessories. zipper-locked plastic bag for future use. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 187 . avoid twisting the cable while turning its connectors or routing the cable during installation. • Do not pull on the boot of the connector.

• For inspection purposes.2. including the first-time installation of components still in their original packaging.3. a video monitor. use the acceptance criteria of the most stringent zone. The result of an inspection can be one of three conditions: • preferred • acceptable • unacceptable Table 18 Single-mode end-face inspection acceptance criteria Zone Diameter Acceptance criteria (number and size) Non-removable (contamination of Scratches pits) (1 of 2) 188 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .Fiber Optic Cable Management HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL • Replace dust caps and plugs if they: • fall on the floor • are cracked or damaged in any way • are dirty or exposed to dust in the environment 11. • For multifiber cable.2. each end-face must meet the inspection criteria. To perform inspections. and accessories. The zones referred to in Table 18 are illustrated in Figure 144. pits are to be treated the same as non-removable contamination.3 Acceptance criteria for fiber optic device inspections Fiber optic connectors and receptacles must be visually inspected before every connection.1 Acceptance criteria Acceptance criteria for single-mode end-faces are provided in Table 18. • When measuring oddly shaped contamination (non-round shapes). • Loose contamination of any kind is not acceptable and must be cleaned from the end-face. After the fiber optic devices pass inspection and the connection is made. 11. The following guidelines apply to acceptance criteria. use a video microscope. • If contamination falls across more than one zone. use the largest dimension. it is not necessary to disassemble the connection for inspection.

the zones are not shown to scale. Quantity: 2 max. Epoxy zone 120 to 130 µm Quantity: no limit No limit Diameter: 10 µm Contact zone 130 to 250 µm Quantity: no limit No limit Diameter: 10 µm (2 of 2) Figure 144 Single-mode end-face zones Core Core zone Cladding zone Epoxy zone Contact zone The preferred condition of an end-face is shown in Figure 145. scratches. or any defect. Figure 145 also identifies the end-face zones shown in Figure 144. Diameter: 5 µm max. Figure 145 Preferred condition of fiber optic end-face Core and core zone Cladding zone Epoxy zone Contact zone Table 19 illustrates acceptable and unacceptable conditions. There should be no evidence of contamination. Width: 2 µm max. and the core and core zones are shown as one zone. For clarity.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Fiber Optic Cable Management Zone Diameter Acceptance criteria (number and size) Core 9 µm None None Core zone <50 µm None None Cladding zone 50 to 120 µm Quantity: 3 max. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 189 .

or pits in within cladding core zone single-mode fiber zone.Fiber Optic Cable Management HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Table 19 Acceptable and unacceptable conditions for fiber optic end-fac- es Criteria Acceptable Unacceptable Contamination. particles or pits in cladding or epoxy large particle in multi-mode fiber zone cladding zone Diameter is < Diameter is > 10 µm 10 µm 190 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . but outside core zone Diameter is < 5 µm Contamination in Contamination contact zone (large particle) in Diameter is < cladding zone 10 µm Diameter is > 10 µm — — Removable contamination (oil) Scratches in One scratch in One scratch single-mode fiber cladding zone. or through core multiple scratches in a contact zone Contamination Contamination in Contamination. Contamination Contamination in particles.

11.25 mm. 2. or be at least 38 mm.4 Fiber optic jumper cable care Use the following guidelines to care for fiber optic jumper cables.0 mm) • cassette cleaner (reel type or equivalent).5 Inspection of fiber optic devices You need the following items to perform an inspection of fiber optic devices (receptacles. cover the end connectors with the dust caps.2. cable jacket. • The radius of the bend should meet the specifications of the manufacturer. or any sharp bending. and connectors): • 200x video microscope • video monitor • adapters for connectors and receptacles • instructions for the use of the kit components • items for cleaning: • optical grade stick cleaners (swabs) that have a tightly wrapped tip (1. twisting. • Store all unused fiber optic jumper cables in a cabinet. or lint-free. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 191 . • Ensure there is no tension on the fiber optic cable. ferrule. • When the fiber-optic jumper cable is not in use.2. or lay them flat in a cupboard. and 4.50 mm. or kinks (micro-bends). • Hang all unused fiber jumper optic cables on a cable rack.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Fiber Optic Cable Management 11. nonabrasive cloths • pure optical-grade isopropyl alcohol for cleaning connector end-faces • a can of contaminant-free compressed air (dry nitrogen) for removing dust from the receptacles or the connectors (ferrule and end-face surfaces) Note — Do not use commercially compressed air or house air.

2 If this is not a first-time inspection. Use a microscope and video monitor when inspecting the end-face. 3 Using the inspection kit. or other signs of damage. Danger — Never look into the end of an optical fiber while optical power is being applied to the fiber. If the connector does not pass acceptance criteria given in “Acceptance criteria for fiber optic device inspections”. 6 Using the inspection kit. cuts. When cleaning or taking measurements. for example scratches. Note — Do not use the cable if there is damage.Fiber Optic Cable Management HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Procedure 32 Inspection of fiber optic devices Proceed as follows: 1 Disconnect any power to the fiber optic device before inspection or cleaning. inspect the connector. it does not pass acceptance criteria given in “Acceptance criteria for fiber optic device inspections”). or damaged guide holes (badly worn or out-of-round). cracks. The fibers and connectors may be connected to a laser transmitter. Note — Do not use the cable if there is damage. kinks. inspect the receptacle. clean the receptacle (refer to Procedure “Clean the Fiber Optic Receptacles”). 192 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . 4 Inspect the cable jacket for nicks. bends. clean the connector (refer to Procedure “Clean the Fiber Optic Cable Connectors”). gently disconnect the fiber optic connector from the receptacle. avoid eye exposure to open-ended fibers and optical connectors. 5 Inspect the ferrule for signs of damage. If the receptacle is contaminated (that is.

apply a short burst of air to the end-face to remove the contaminant. Note 1 — Do not use optical devices that do not function properly. 8 STOP. clean the receptacle using a stick cleaner saturated with optical-grade isopropyl alcohol. Nokia recommends that the unused ports of splitters be terminated into an APC-based connector. ii Use a new stick for each port. it is an industry best practice to use APC-based connections or spliced connections to avoid any potential network problems. i Put the stick in the receptacle and gently rotate it. Note — Do not allow the extension tube of the can to touch the bottom surface of the receptacle. and check for proper function. and it appears the contaminant can be dislodged using canned compressed air.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Fiber Optic Cable Management 7 Reconnect the connector and receptacle. Note 2 — In a fiber distribution network. 4 If the receptacle still fails the inspection. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 193 . 2 If the receptacle fails the inspection. Procedure 33 Clean the Fiber Optic Receptacles Proceed as follows: 1 Clean the receptacle using a dry stick cleaner. This procedure is complete. 3 Re-inspect the receptacle. repeat step 1 and step 2 several times. i Insert the stick in the receptacle and gently rotate it. If the receptacle fails the inspection. making three full rotations and using a lifting/plucking motion each time you stop to re-grip the stick. iii Re-inspect the receptacle. as described in step 1. iii Re-inspect the receptacle. ii Remove any alcohol residue using a dry stick cleaner.

repeat cleaning and inspecting several times or until the receptacle passes the inspection as described in “Acceptance criteria for fiber optic device inspections”. 5 Re-inspect the connector. 6 If necessary. 4 Remove any alcohol residue by gently wiping the ferrule and end-face surfaces with a dry section of cleaner cassette. Note — Do not use a receptacle that does not pass inspection. 3 If the connector fails the inspection. Procedure 34 Clean the Fiber Optic Cable Connectors Proceed as follows: 1 Clean the connector by gently wiping the ferrule and end-face surfaces using a cleaner cassette or a dry lint-free cloth.Fiber Optic Cable Management HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 5 If necessary. clean the connector by gently wiping the ferrule and end- face surfaces using a cleaner cassette that has a drop of optical-grade isopropyl alcohol applied to it. 2 Re-inspect the connector. Note — You may need to open the cleaner cassette window by hand to apply the alcohol to the cassette. 6 STOP. This procedure is complete. repeat step 1 through step 5 until the connector passes the inspection. 194 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . or a lint-free cloth. use a lint-free cloth that has a drop of optical-grade isopropyl alcohol applied to it. Alternately.

9 If the connector fails the inspection.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Fiber Optic Cable Management 7 If the connector continues to fail inspection after several attempts at cleaning. only a live test informs you if a connector cannot be used. 8 Re-inspect the connector. repeat step 1 through step 5 again.3 Managing Fiber Optic Cables for NT Boards and NTIO Boards This section provides the steps to route and connect network cables for NT boards and NTIO boards in the 7302 FD LT subrack. This procedure is complete. Note — Do not allow the extension tube of the can to touch the fiber. compressed air to remove any dust or debris. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 195 . 10 Re-inspect the connector. 11. 11 STOP. However. use the canned. Note — Typically you should not use a cable that does not pass inspection. Fiber optic cables are used to connect the NT boards and NTIO boards to the optical source.

SFP+ or XFP) . Procedure 35 Routing Fiber Cables from NTs and NTIO Proceed as follows to route and connect the fiber cables to the NT board(s) and the NTIO board (if equipped): 1 Prepare fiber optic cables for the equipped NT unit(s) and the NTIO board. The number of receptacles depends on the board type. 196 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . The NTs and NTIO are populated with a customer-defined combination of pluggable optical modules that provide the bandwidth the specific ISAM system deployment requires. Note 1 — For an overview of the supported optical modules (SFP. The number and type of pluggable optical modulesdeployed in each installation determine the cable loading needed for the boards.1 Optic modules The NTs can be populated with either single-mode or multimode pluggable optical modules. which are not equipped with optical modules modules. The NTIO can be populated with either single-mode or multimode optical modules. Note 2 — It is advised to protect the cages. Each of the connectors has a Tx port and an Rx port. refer to the 7302 ISAM Product Information manual. with dust cover 1AD 00847 0003 in order to prevent dust intrusion.2 Fiber cables Standard single mode and/or multimode fiber cables with LC connectors are connected to the pluggable optical modules for transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) purposes. with the following information: • the NT connection name • Tx or Rx. 2 Label each cable for future identification. 11.3.Fiber Optic Cable Management HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 11. at both ends. depending on which port is used for the connection 3 In the rack. run the fibers from the top (overhead cabling) or from the bottom (raised floor cabling).3. refer to local plans for details.

Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 197 . refer to Figure 146. The dimensions of the routing area are shown in Figure 147. Only in case of standard fiber type. by way of the rack-inlet to the subrack Figure 146 Bottom Fiber Management Cable exit opening Cable Fiber bending management exit opening ii Route the fiber cables through the left cable inlet opening in the subrack (refer to Figure 146) iii Route the fiber cables through the fiber bend guides in the horizontal cable channel Note — The optical fibers can be pushed behind the protective brushes into a separate (vertical) fiber tray (maximum 8 fibers).HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Fiber Optic Cable Management 4 Route the fiber cables for the NT board and the NTIO board (if equipped) as follows: i Route the fibers through the left fiber duct. the number of fibers is limited to 23.

Fiber Optic Cable Management HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 147 Protective Brushes in the Vertical Fiber Tray Figure 148 Dimensions of Routing Area in the Vertical Fiber Tray 198 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

10 STOP. per local codes. the number of fibers is limited to 23. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 199 . The dimensions of the routing area are shown in Figure 147. This procedure is complete. by way of the rack-inlet to the subrack ii Route the fiber cables through the right cable inlet opening in the subrack (refer to Figure 146) iii Route the fiber cables through the fiber bend guides in the horizontal cable channel Note — The optical fibers can be pushed behind the protective brushes into a separate (vertical) fiber tray (maximum 8 fibers). if present. run the fibers from the rack top by way of overhead guides. Only in case of standard fiber type. connect the fibers to the appropriate Rx and Tx connector. 9 Repeat for the next shelf with NT unit(s). 8 At the ODF.4 Managing Fiber Optic Cables for LT Boards This section provides the steps to route and connect the fiber optic cables for the LT boards in the 7302 FD LT subrack. 11. 6 In the CO. 7 On the front panel of each NT unit. or from the rack bottom under raised floor to the Optical Distribution Frame (ODF).HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Fiber Optic Cable Management 5 Route the fiber cables for the redundant NT board (if equipped) as follows: i Route the fibers through the right fiber duct. refer to Figure 146. Fiber optic cables are used to connect the LT boards to the optical source. connect the cables as prescribed per local codes.

This must be accounted for upfront by the customer during the planning of the fiber routing in the customer’s system. Note 4 — In the case of bidirectional fiber optic cables as used with the NGLT-x boards. 200 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . Depending on the type of SFP (refer to Note 3. • Uni-directional = two physically separated fibers for the transmit (Tx) and receive signals (Rx) and • Bi-directional = both Tx and Rx signals share the same fiber.2 Fiber Management Kit The elements which are required to correctly route the fiber optic cables for the LT boards in the subrack are available in a fiber management kit (code 3FE 61087 AA). which are not equipped with optical modules modules. Note 2 — It is advised to protect the cages. i.Fiber Optic Cable Management HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 11. Note 3 — A difference exists between uni-directional and bi- directional pluggable optical modules. refer to Figure 149: these elements are mounted on the cable management area (refer to Figure 154) • 2 fiber bend control elements (code 3FE 29345 AA).4. The number and type of pluggable optical module deployed in each installation determine the cable loading needed for the boards. refer to Figure 150: these elements are mounted on the side plate of the subrack (refer to Figure 155) Note — When the breakout cable (3FE 68599 xx) for NELT-B or FELT-B is deployed.e.1 Optic modules The LTs can be populated with pluggable optical modules. 4). the transmit and receive signals are carried on the same fiber and only have one optical connector. This kit contains: • 19 fiber management elements (code 3FE 24348 AB). refer to the 7302 ISAM Product Information manual. The LT boards are populated with a customer-defined combination of pluggable optical modules that provide the bandwidth the specific ISAM system deployment requires. with dust cover 1AD 00847 0003 in order to prevent dust intrusion. 1 or 2 optical fibers are required to connect to the SFP.4. refer to local plans for details. Note 1 — For an overview of the supported pluggable optical modules. 11. then the fiber bend control elements 3FE 29345 AA must not be mounted.

then the number of optical fibers that can be used is somewhat limited as shown in Table 20 and Table 22. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 201 .1 Fiber capacity limitations (for single fibers only) When the fiber bend control elements 3FE 29345 AA are used.2.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Fiber Optic Cable Management Figure 149 Fiber Management Element Figure 150 Fiber Bend Control Element 11.4.

6 mm • For redundant NT system 16 NELT boards (8 boards in each side of the subrack) with 36 fibers per slot • For non-redundant NT system 18 NELT boards (9 boards in each side of the subrack) with 36 fibers per slot Table 21 Fiber Management Capacity per Subrack for FELT-x Boards Cable type Diameter Maximum Number of Cables per Subrack Single fiber 3 mm 10 FELT boards (5 boards in each side of the subrack) with 16 fibers per slot 2 mm 16 FEL T boards (8 boards in each side of the subrack) with 36 fibers per slot 1.6 mm 16 NGLT-x boards (8 boards in each side of the subrack) with 8 fibers per slot Note — The FELT-B and NGLT-x boards must only be used in ISAM systems with an FD 320Gbps NT board.Fiber Optic Cable Management HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Table 20 Fiber Management Capacity per Subrack for NELT-x Boards Cable type Diameter Maximum Number of Cables per Subrack Single fiber 3 mm 10 NELT boards (5 boards in each side of the subrack) with 16 fibers per slot 2 mm • For redundant NT system 16 NELT boards (8 boards in each side of the subrack) with 36 fibers per slot • For non-redundant NT system 18 NELT boards (9 boards in each side of the subrack) with 36 fibers per slot 1.6 mm 16 FELT boards (8 boards in each side of the subrack) with 36 fibers per slot Table 22 Fiber Management Capacity per Subrack for NGLT-x Boards Cable type Fiber Cable Maximum Number of Cables per Subrack Diameter Single fiber 3 mm 16 NGLT-x boards (8 boards in each side of the subrack) with 8 fibers per slot 1. 202 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

4.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Fiber Optic Cable Management 11. with SC/UPC connectors The type of optical fibers must be selected in line with the particular pluggable optical module to guarantee the overall optical budget in the system and its correct functioning! Loss of optical power as a result of a mismatch in material must be avoided at all cost! In case of xELT-B only a special type of breakout fiber cable is available that makes the cabling easier. see also chapter 11. The duplex LC/PC connectors must be connected to the ports of the NELT-B or FELT-B board and the LC/APC connectors must be connected to the ODF.3.4. interference with the rack door can occur.2.4. the rack door cannot be closed (unless using rack adaptation). with LC/PC or LC/UPC connectors • for PON. This cable is has a diameter of 18 x 1. a special type of breakout cable 3FE 68599 xx can be used that will save a lot of space.2 Breakout cable (NELT-B and FELT-B only) For NELT-B and FELT-B boards.4 mm and is equipped with nine duplex LC/PC connectors (color blue) and 18 LC/APC connectors (color green). see Chapter 11.e.1 General Standard single mode fiber cables with LC connectors can be connected to certain board types using pluggable optical modules for transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) purposes. it can lead to operational issues because without angled connectors.3 or • use a door extension frame.4. see also chapter 11.4.3.4.3.4.4. • use a special type of fibers with an angled connector at the LT-side.3.3.3 Fiber cable types 11. NELT-x and FELT-x. see also Chapter 11. i. Two breakout cables must be used for each equipped board.4. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 203 . see chapter 11. Warning — Since this cable doesn’t use 90 degrees angled connectors at the LT side.3. 11. more specifically.4. This can be avoided using a rack extender.3. There are multiple ways to avoid this issue. In case the subrack is mounted in an ETSI rack and fiber cables are equipped in combination with pluggables.1. • for NT.

60 11.00 2.00 220.00 520.80 2.30 8.05 2.00 88.55 2.40 11.50 5.00 12.00 230.70 7.00 50.00 320.50 94.00 740.20 15.90 9.35 1.00 78.00 D 0.80 17.00 H 0.50 114.40 8.45 2.00 390.85 5.00 700.00 36.75 5.00 23.00 P 0.80 9.30 6.00 205.35 3.55 3.20 10.00 450.60 1.00 490.00 42.95 5.00 20.60 3.50 1.00 660.00 48.00 65.80 14.50 43.50 25.50 45.00 135.00 165.00 330.80 12.50 41.00 280.55 5.00 820.40 4.00 480.50 47.00 116.10 4.00 130.20 3.90 7.95 3.50 86.00 72.40 6.70 3.00 4.00 21.10 2.00 M 0.00 145.00 940.30 3.00 F 0.00 125.00 310.00 3.20 18.00 500.00 440.50 33.00 71.00 720.20 2.00 25.00 840.35 4.00 112.00 108.00 300.00 370.50 23.00 15.00 560.70 2.00 155.00 C 0.00 980.00 17.00 360.20 1.80 19.00 75.00 W 0.00 210.00 170.00 215.55 1.10 8.00 51.40 13.75 3.00 29.00 680.00 1.00 150.00 260.50 29.00 900.45 3.00 62.30 2.00 24.65 2.00 40.25 3.20 6.50 49.65 5.00 175.60 14.65 1.00 160.00 104.00 77.00 57.90 5.20 8.00 190.00 32.50 26.00 185.00 56.00 380.00 69.90 3.50 35.50 102.00 53.00 140.70 1.00 470.90 1.00 B 0.50 82.00 920.00 780.50 20.70 5.00 34.00 640.50 90.25 1.00 570.00 68.10 3.85 1.00 420.00 63.00 540.00 270.50 106.70 9.30 1.00 760. Figure 152 gives an overview of the different possible combinations (in meters).30 4.05 4.00 250. Figure 152 Cable Length Denomination Combinations First letter Second letter A B C D E F G H J K L M N P R A 0.00 610.00 92.00 T 0.00 100.00 26.00 S 0.00 200.00 530.40 1.00 400.50 118.35 2.50 21.25 2.40 16.00 1000.60 19.15 3.Fiber Optic Cable Management HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 151 Optical breakout cable for NELT-B and FELT-B LC/PC LC/APC 830 mm 812 mm 793 mm 775 mm 756 mm 738 mm 719 mm 2800 mm 701 mm 682 mm 02 02 01 01 04 04 03 03 06 06 05 05 08 08 07 07 10 10 3FE68599xxAA 09 09 12 12 11 11 14 14 13 13 16 16 15 15 18 18 17 17 L The breakout cable is available in different lengths (‘L’ in Figure 151).00 28.00 30.00 Y 0.00 460.00 N 0.80 1.00 550.50 3.00 38.00 22.50 22.80 5.50 27.50 28.00 580.00 G 0.60 5.50 39.00 120.00 E 0.60 2.00 27.75 2.10 1.40 3.00 960.45 1.00 180.75 1.00 66.50 9.85 2.00 204 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .00 46.60 9.60 16.80 3.00 880.15 2.00 6.00 I 0.00 96.10 6.25 4.00 59.85 3.00 860.50 98.50 24.15 4.00 K 0.00 74.20 4.00 340.05 1.60 7.00 60.40 2.00 8.00 350.00 44.00 R 0.00 54.00 800.50 37.95 2.00 84.00 L 0.80 7.40 18.20 13.00 510.00 240.00 80.15 1.90 2.00 V 0.00 195.00 430.45 4.00 600.65 3.50 2.50 110.50 31.50 7.00 590.00 410.05 3.00 290.00 620.95 1.00 10.

The dimensions of this extender are shown in Figure 153.3.4.3 Fiber with angled connector To avoid the previously mentioned door closing issues (see Chapter 11.3.3. see Table 23 for their specifics and ordering codes.1) four versions (different lengths) of a special fiber with an angled connector are offered to be used with NELT-B and FELT-B boards.4. It consists of two door adapter brackets (together with a number of screws) to be fitted onto the top and bottom of the rack. please contact your Nokia representative. is the use of a rack door adapter/extender.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Fiber Optic Cable Management 11.4.4 Rack Door Extension An alternative way to avoid issues with a non-closing (ETSI) rack door in case of using standard fibers in combination with a pluggable. A 2 mm thick steel indoor door extender is available (ordering code 1AD 17975 0001) to be used on a 19 inch ETSI rack. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 205 . 11. Table 23 Fiber with angled connector Cable type Length Ordering code CA SM SX 1.6 LCU90-SCA YL LSZH G652A 5m 1AB 47009 0001 10 m 1AB 47008 0001 15 m 1AB 47007 0001 20 m 1AB 47006 0001 If other cable types/lengths are needed.

Fiber Optic Cable Management HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 153 ETSI Rack Door Extender 118 59 5 30 108 Door stops This will expand the depth of the rack with about 3cm so this needs to be taken into consideration during floor preparation (see chapter 4. 206 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .2).

refer to Figure 154. Make sure the two clamps are locked in the opening correctly. Make sure the clamp is locked in the hole correctly.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Fiber Optic Cable Management Procedure 36 Mounting the Fiber Management Elements Proceed as follows to mount the fiber management elements for the LT boards: 1 Mount the fiber management elements 3FE 24348 AB: i Press the fiber management element into the hole in the rear of the cable management. Figure 154 Fiber Management Fiber management (3FE 24348 AB) Cable management (3FE 26206 AA) ii Press the fiber management element into the opening in the front of the cable management. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 207 . refer to Figure 154.

make sure the clamp catches hold tightly of the subrack side plate. refer to Figure 155.Fiber Optic Cable Management HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 2 Mount the fiber bend control element 3FE 29345 AA: i Press the fiber bend control element into the four slots in the subrack side plate. Make sure the extruded parts are locked correctly in the slot. Figure 155 Fiber Bend Control 3FE 29345 AA ii At the same time. refer to Figure 155 3 Figure 156 shows the subrack with all the fiber management elements mounted 208 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

It is also recommended to use protection tubes in the rack cabling areas to clearly separate the fiber optic cables from the MDF cabling. The MDF cables are routed in the rear of the MDF cable area.4. it is advisable to deploy the fiber optic cables from the side to the middle of a subrack and to deploy the MDF cables from the middle to the side of the subrack. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 209 . Note — The fiber cables must be routed in front of the MDF cables in the MDF cable area. To avoid interference. as shown in Figure 157.4 Routing Fiber Optic Cables from LT Boards Fiber optic cables from LT boards must be routed through the MDF cable area and then up to the top of the subrack.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Fiber Optic Cable Management Figure 156 Top Fiber Management 11.

Figure 158 Fiber management kit 3FE 71136 AA An example of such a rather generic (FD/FX) fiber management kit is 3FE 71136 AA. that exists out of one fiber bracket. 210 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . It is advisable to use additional cable management accessories to route and fix the fiber optic cables.Fiber Optic Cable Management HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 157 Tube for fibers MDF cable area Power cables Tubes for fibers Caution — When routing the fiber optic cables. care must be taken that the airflow is not obstructed. one mechanical saddle wire and a screw. do consult the Nokia price list and contact your Nokia representative. For other fiber management accessories. see Figure 158.

5 Run the fibers through the fiber bend control element 3FE 29345 AA Caution — For LT boards mounted in slot 01 and slot 16: Fiber cables coming from boards mounted in these positions have to be routed via the fiber management elements of respectively position 02 and position 15 (refer to Figure 159) to prevent a sharp. 2 For non-GPON LTs label each cable for future identification. run the fibers from the top. uncontrolled bend in the fiber cable. 3 In the rack. at both ends.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Fiber Optic Cable Management Procedure 37 Routing Fiber Cables from LTs Proceed as follows to route and connect the fiber cables to the LT boards: 1 Prepare fiber optic cables for the equipped LT units. the fibers should be threaded through the cable channel to the opening at the top of the shelf. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 211 . 4 Run the fibers left and/or right through cable inlets and ducts: i to the left fiber duct for boards in slots 01 to 08 ii to the right fiber duct for boards in slots 09 to 16 and positions NTIO/17 and NTB/18 Note — Whether using overhead or raised floor cabling. with the following information: • the LT connection name • Tx or Rx. depending on which port is used for the connection.

because otherwise the entrance of the fiber bend control element 3FE 29345 AA is partially blocked. or from the rack bottom under raised floor to the Optical Distribution Frame (ODF). run the fibers from the rack top by way of overhead guides.Fiber Optic Cable Management HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 159 Routing Fiber Optic Cables from LT Boards Front view Top view 6 Run the fibers through the appropriate fiber management element 3FE 24348 AB Note — For LT boards mounted in position 01 and position 16: It is advisable to run the fibers first through the fiber bend control element 3FE 29345 AA and then to place the fiber management elements 3FE 24348 AB for slot 01 and slot 16. 7 For non-GPON LTs run the fibers straight down to the LT board 8 In the CO. 212 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . per local codes.

with the following information: • the LT connection name • the port number 3 In the CO. connect the LC/PC connectors of the breakout cable to the appropriate SFPs.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Fiber Optic Cable Management 9 On the front panel of each LT unit. per local codes. Figure 160 and Figure 161 show an example for correct fiber optic cable routing. run the optical breakout cables from the rack top by way of overhead guides to the Optical Distribution Frame (ODF). Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 213 . This procedure is complete. 4 In the rack. connect the fibers into the appropriate SFP. 2 Label each cable for future identification. 10 STOP. 9 STOP. Procedure 38 Routing Optical Breakout Cables from NELT-B and FELT-B Boards Proceed as follows to route and connect the optical breakout cables from the NELT-B and FELT- B boards: 1 Prepare the optical breakout cables for the equipped boards. This procedure is complete. 5 Run the optical breakout cables left and/or right through cable inlets and ducts: i to the left fiber duct for boards in slots 01 to 08 ii to the right fiber duct for boards in slots 09 to 16 and positions NTIO/17 and NTB/18 (positions 17 and 18 for NELT-B only) 6 Run the optical breakout cables through the appropriate fiber management element 3FE 24348 AB. run the optical breakout cables from the top of the rack. 8 On the front panel of each NELT-B or FELT-B board. at both ends. 7 Run the optical breakout cables straight down to the appropriate board.

Fiber Optic Cable Management HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 160 Fiber routing example: front view 214 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Fiber Optic Cable Management Figure 161 Fiber routing example: top view Note — The additional cable management accessories shown in the figures above are not supplied by Nokia. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 215 .

Fiber Optic Cable Management HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 216 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

5 Interconnection Cabling in Rack with 7302 FD-Combo Subrack (72-line) 12.8 POTS and LINE Cabling for 7302 FD-Combo Subrack (72-line) 12.2 General Information and Cable Routing Guidelines 12.6 POTS and LINE Cabling (2x24-pair) for 7302 FD-Combo Subrack (48- line) 12.13 MDF Cabling in Rack with 7302 FD-LT Subrack (72-line) 12.9 Intra-rack Cabling Between FD Splitter Subrack and 7302 FD-LT Subrack (48-line) 12.12 POTS and LINE Cabling in Rack with FD Splitter Subrack and 7302 FD- LT Subrack (72-line) 12.7 POTS and LINE Cabling (96-pair) for 7302 FD-Combo Subrack (48-line) 12.3 Procedures 12.4 Interconnection Cabling in Rack with 7302 FD-Combo Subrack (48-line) 12.11 POTS and LINE Cabling in Rack with FD Splitter Subrack and 7302 FD- LT Subrack (48-line) 12.1 Introduction 12.14 Intra.10 Intra-rack Cabling Between FD Splitter Subrack and 7302 FD-LT Subrack (72-line) 12.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling 12 MDF Cabling 12.and Inter-Shelf Cabling for Subracks equipped with POTS and ISDN LT Boards Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 217 .

1 Introduction 12. Connecting xDSL equipment to non-compliant POTS line boards could result in damage to xDSL equipment.1 Overview This chapter describes the procedures to install MDF cables: • between 7302 FD-Combo subrack and Main Distribution Frame (MDF) in the CO • between installed subracks: • 7302 FD-LT and FD splitter subrack • between splitter subracks and MDF. 12. Warning — Possibility of damage to equipment.2 General Information and Cable Routing Guidelines This section gives general information and cable routing guidelines for MDF cabling.1. Non-compliant POTS line boards may not have the required secondary surge protection or current limiting function during specific. • POTS and LINE cables are used to connect splitter boards in the 7302 FD-Combo subrack or in the splitter subrack to the MDF. Note — The following applies for a 7302 FD subrack: • A 7302 FD-LT subrack is a 7302 FD subrack equipped only with LT boards. 12.2 Cables • xDSL cables are used to connect a 7302 FD-LT subrack. either: • with a splitter subrack • directly to the MDF. • A 7302 FD-Combo subrack is a 7302 FD subrack equipped with LT boards and splitter boards.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 12. valid operation states.1. 218 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

2. The cables of the same subrack are kept together by properly grouping and tying them together.1 Labeling The cable ends are labeled for identification and destination and can have other markings depending on local practices. then the cable code is mentioned as for “xx” defines the cable length.4 MDF Cable Length When a cable can have different lengths. For each splitter in a splitter subrack.2. the cables are bundled and tied together while routing them up to top-end (for overhead cabling) or down to bottom-end (for raised floor cabling). Figure 162 gives an overview of the different possible combinations. routed to the MDF via overhead rack cable guides or under the raised floor (raised floor office) within the 600 mm width dimension. per local practices. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 219 . 12. For example. left xDSL connectors) and half of them are routed to the right (right AP slots. Cable bundling facilitates the identification of cables/wires at the MDF side and makes it possible to replace the entire MDF cable set of one subrack. 12.3 Routing to the MDF Cables bundles are.2 Routing Inside the Rack Half of the MDF cables in a rack are routed to the left (left AP slots. POTS) are first routed up and the lower two cables are routed down. right xDSL connectors).2.2.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling 12. 3FE 29405 HL is the code for a cable type 3FE 29405 with a length of 25 m. 12. In the left and right rack routing areas. before they are routed into the left and right rack cable areas. if required. the upper two cables (LINE.

MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 162 MDF Cable Length Denomination Combinations C C B B A A -F -F -F -F -F -F -1 -1 -0 -1 -0 -0 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 -1 -0 -1 -0 -1 -0 -F -F -F -F -F -F C C B B A A 2 1 2 1 2 1 -1 -0 -1 -0 -1 -0 -A -A -A -A -A -A C C B B A A C C B B A A -A -A -A -A -A -A -1 -0 -1 -0 -1 -0 2 1 2 1 2 1 227 mm 19.8 mm Connector Y Connector X 220 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

then fit the LINE connectors. in the guides overhead and under the raised floor. • Keep the cables in the correct order when bundling and routing. Note 2 — Bundle and route the cables in an orderly and efficient way. first fit the POTS connectors. allows for proper cable guiding along the sides of the rack (such bend control gives substantial “stiffness” to the cable tree.5 MDF Cabling Guidelines The following guidelines must be observed when installing MDF cabling: Note 1 — The order of MDF cabling is not compulsory. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 221 . Note 3 — It is preferred (but not required) to complete the rack cabling prior to installing the rack in a line-up due to the quantity of cables and reduced access once the rack is installed. • When cabling the upper part of the splitter area. as shown in Figure 163 and Figure 164. then fit the POTS connectors. They connect to four or eight successive splitters (the connectors of one 96-pair cable fit four adjacent LINE or POTS connectors). When cabling the lower part.2. first fit the LINE connectors. thus not requiring extra cable fixtures and/or tie-wraps) • The cables can be tie-wrapped to each other to make the bundle even more “stiff” for vertical routing along the rack sides. thus not requiring tie-wrapping the cables to the rack • Put the cable (bundles) as tight as possible to each other.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling 12. However. The order in which MDF cables are installed in the following procedures can. Efficiently use all the space available in the areas between the racks. but must not be applied. it is recommended to: • Run 96-pair cables by two or four. • Proper bend control of MDF cables.

MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 163 MDF Cable Bend Control 222 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Figure 164 MDF Cable Bundle Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 223 .

8 Nm and maximum 1 Nm for 72-line connectors. when VDSL deployment is forerefer ton. it is recommended to: • Apply shielded POTS and LINE cables between the MDF and the rack (Nokia always provides shielded cables) • Connect.6 Handling Baillocks The MDF cables are plugged into the connectors on the LT boards and the splitter boards and are locked in place with baillocks.4 Nm for 48-line connectors • minimum 0. 12. To comply with EMC. the shielding of each MDF cable to the ground at the MDF end. It is recommended to upgrade the LINE SIDE cabling of the subrack. Caution 2 — Risk of EMC disturbance when MDF cables are not shielded. refer to Figure 165. if possible.2.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Caution 1 — Risk of performance degradation for VDSL when non-VDSL-specific cables are used for LINE cabling. Caution 3 — For cable connectors with hex socket screw: When securing these connectors. the applicable torque is: • maximum 0. When MDF cables have no or insufficient shielding. 224 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . xDSL over POTS with xDSL over ISDN or SHDSL). certainly when mixing different xDSL signal types (for example. the xDSL and POTS signals carried could suffer from EMC disturbance.

Figure 166 shows an example of a slotted angled screwdriver Figure 166 Slotted Angled Screwdriver Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 225 .HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Figure 165 Baillocks Baillocks This section describes the procedures to fix the baillocks of the MDF cable connectors using a slotted angled screwdriver.

refer to Figure 167.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL The use of this tool is required for locking or unlocking baillocks which are difficult to reach and lock. Note — The following applies when removing MDF connectors: • BOTH baillocks have to be unlocked before the MDF connector may be removed. 226 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . refer to Figure 168. This may damage the connector contacts. • Check whether the MDF connector is not damaged • Locking and unlocking the baillocks with the tool requires some skill and exercise Procedure 39 Locking Baillocks using the Slotted Angled Screwdriver Proceed as follows to lock a baillock using the slotted angled screwdriver: 1 Place one end of the tool behind the baillock. • Avoid excessive tilting when removing the MDF connector. Figure 167 Place Tool Behind Baillock 2 Lock the baillock in place by pulling the tool downward.

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Figure 168 Lock the Baillock Procedure 40 Installation and Removal of the DSL MDF Connector Proceed as follows to install or remove the DSL MDF connector. both on the LT board as on the splitter board: 1 For the installation or removal of the DSL MDF connector on the LT board. the following applies: • the bottom baillock can be locked or unlocked by hand • use the tool for locking or unlocking the top baillock. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 227 . refer to Figure 169.

MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 169 Lock/unlock Top Baillock on LT Board 2 For the installation or removal of the DSL MDF connector on the splitter board. Figure 170 Lock/unlock Bottom Baillock on Splitter Board 228 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . refer to Figure 170. the following applies: • the top baillock can be locked or unlocked by hand • use the tool for locking or unlocking the bottom baillock.

refer to Figure 172. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 229 . the following applies: • the bottom baillock of the POTS connector can be locked or unlocked by hand • use the tool for locking or unlocking the top baillock. refer to Figure 171. the following applies: • the bottom baillock of the LINE connector can be locked or unlocked by hand • use the tool for locking or unlocking the top baillock. Figure 171 Lock/unlock the Top Baillock of the LINE Connector 2 For the installation or removal of the POTS MDF connector.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Procedure 41 Installation and Removal of the POTS and LINE MDF Connectors Proceed as follows to install or remove the POTS and LINE MDF connectors: 1 For the installation or removal of the LINE MDF connector.

5 • for the POTS and LINE cabling between the splitter boards in the 7302 FD-Combo subrack and the MDF: • for 48-lines boards cabling with 2x24-pair cables: refer to 12.6 • for 48-lines boards cabling with 96-pair cables: refer to 12.3 Procedures The following procedures are described in this chapter: 12.1 Procedure for 7302 FD-Combo If the 7302 FD subrack is used in Combo configuration (that is.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 172 Lock/unlock the Top Baillock of the POTS Connector 12. the subrack is equipped with LT boards and splitter boards): • for the internal cabling between the LT boards and the splitter boards in the 7302 FD-Combo subrack: • for 48-lines boards: refer to 12.7 • for 72-lines boards: refer to 12.4 • for 72-lines boards: refer to 12.8 230 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .3.

3 Procedures for 7302 FD-LT equipped with 72-line Boards Only If the 7302 FD subrack is equipped with 72-line boards only.13.11 • for 72-lines boards: refer to 12.9 • for 72-lines boards: refer to 12.10 • for the POTS and LINE cabling between the FD splitter subrack and the MDF: • for 48-lines boards: refer to 12. the subrack is only equipped with LT boards) and in combination with an FD splitter subrack: • for the intra-rack cabling: • for 48-lines boards: refer to 12. Figure 173 shows an example. refer to 12.3.4 MDF Cables for Subracks Equipped with POTS LT Boards Section 12. 12. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 231 .HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling 12.4 Interconnection Cabling in Rack with 7302 FD-Combo Subrack (48-line) This section describes the cabling procedure for ADSL interconnection cabling (48- line) between the LT boards and the splitter boards in a 7302 FD-Combo subrack.14 describes the MDF cables to be used for: • subracks equipped with 48-line POTS LT boards and 48-line FD splitter boards • subracks equipped with 24-line ISDN LT boards and 48-line FD splitter boards • subracks equipped with 48-line POTS LT boards and 72-line FD splitter boards • subracks equipped with 48-line POTS LT boards and 96-line FD splitter boards Note — All the procedures are described for fully equipped subracks.3.3.12 12. 12.2 Procedures for 7302 FD-LT and FD Splitter Subracks If the 7302 FD subrack is used in LT configuration (that is.

232 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . 175 mm long cable (3FE 27677 AA). refer to Figure 174.1 Cable Type The required cable is an S-shaped.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 173 Interconnection Cabling (48-line) in Rack with 7302 FD-Combo Subrack A/4 FOR SPL A/60 FOR LT B/4 FOR SPL B/60 FOR LT 12.4.

Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 233 .4.2 Number of MDF Cables For a subrack equipped with 8 LT boards and 8 splitter boards (refer to Figure 175).HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Figure 174 S-Shaped Interconnection Cable (48-line) 175 Solder side 76 100 1 25 Note — Refer to Appendix 16.4 for the wiring list of the CHAMP100 connectors. 8 cables are required. 9 cables are required. Figure 175 7302 FD-Combo Subrack with 8 LT Boards and 8 Splitter Boards NTIO NT B SP01 SP02 SP03 SP04 SP05 SP06 SP07 SP08 NTA LT01 LT02 LT03 LT04 LT05 LT06 LT07 LT08 For a subrack equipped with 9 LT boards and 9 splitter boards (refer to Figure 176). 12.

refer to Figure 177.4. refer to section “Handling Baillocks”. 234 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .4.4 Cabling Diagram Figure 178 shows the cabling diagram for installing the ADSL interconnection cables in a 7302 FD-Combo subrack (configuration with 8 LT boards and 8 splitter boards is shown).3 Connection/Locking The cables are plugged into the connectors on the LT boards and the splitter boards and are locked in place with baillocks. Figure 177 Baillocks Baillocks Note — For more information on locking and unlocking baillocks.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 176 7302 FD-Combo Subrack with 9 LT Boards and 9 Splitter Boards LT 09 SP09 SP01 SP02 SP03 SP04 SP05 SP06 SP07 SP08 NTA LT01 LT02 LT03 LT04 LT05 LT06 LT07 LT08 12. 12.

Figure 179 shows a cabled 7302 FD-Combo subrack Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 235 .5 Parts List Required parts are: • Eight (or nine) S-shaped interconnection cables (3FE 27677 AA) per equipped 7302 FD-Combo subrack.4. Procedure 42 Interconnection Cabling in 7302 FD-Combo Subrack 1 Prepare the S-shaped interconnection cables for the 7302 FD-Combo subracks. ii Connect the other end to the lower connector of the adjacent splitter board. eight (or nine) cables per installed subrack. refer to Figure 178. 2 For each cable: i Connect one end to the connector on the LT board.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Figure 178 Installing ADSL Interconnection Cables in 7302 FD-Combo Subrack NTIO NT B SP01 SP02 SP03 SP04 SP05 SP06 SP07 SP08 NTA LT01 LT02 LT03 LT04 LT05 LT06 LT07 LT08 12.

MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 179 7302 FD-Combo Interconnection Cabling 12.5 Interconnection Cabling in Rack with 7302 FD-Combo Subrack (72-line) This section describes the cabling procedure for ADSL interconnection cabling (72- line) between the LT boards and the splitter boards in a 7302 FD-Combo subrack. 236 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . Figure 180 shows an example.

This cable consists of three individual 24-line cables and two Metral-HDXS-72 connectors. Length is 140 mm. Refer to Figure 181.5.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Figure 180 Interconnection Cabling (72-L) in Rack with 7302 FD-Combo Subrack 12.1 Cable Type The required cable is the S-cable 3FE 60300 AA. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 237 .

1 A- -1 -0 0 -F -F F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- -F -F -1 -0 B- A- 12 0 12 01 C C 2 2 B.1 B- A.7 for the pin mapping of the Metral-HDXS-72 connectors.2 Number of MDF Cables For a subrack equipped with 8 LT boards and 8 splitter boards (refer to Figure 182).1 B- A.5.1 12 A.1 12 01 C C B.1 12 A.1 12 01 C C B. 9 cables are required.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 181 S-Cable (72-line) 2 B. 238 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . 8 cables are required. 12. Figure 182 7302 FD-Combo Subrack with 8 LT Boards and 8 Splitter Boards NTIO NT B SP01 SP02 SP03 SP04 SP05 SP06 SP07 SP08 NTA LT01 LT02 LT03 LT04 LT05 LT06 LT07 LT08 For a subrack equipped with 9 LT boards and 9 splitter boards (refer to Figure 183).1 A- -1 -0 0 -A -A A- A- A- A- A- A- A- A- -A -A -1 -0 B- A- 12 0 12 01 C C 2 BUNDLE C BUNDLE B BUNDLE A 140 Connector Y Connector X Note — Refer to Appendix 16.

r. the screw. refer to Figure 181. a screwdriver with ball hex tip M2.3 Connection/Locking The connector marked with “X” must be connected to the LT board (upper) and the connector marked with “Y” must be connected to the splitter board (lower).t.8 Nm and maximum 1 Nm.5 Cabling Diagram Figure 185 shows the cabling diagram for installing the 72-line ADSL interconnection cables in a 7302 FD-Combo subrack (configuration with 8 LT boards and 8 splitter boards is shown).5.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Figure 183 7302 FD-Combo Subrack with 9 LT Boards and 9 Splitter Boards LT 09 SP09 SP01 SP02 SP03 SP04 SP05 SP06 SP07 SP08 NTA LT01 LT02 LT03 LT04 LT05 LT06 LT07 LT08 12.5. Figure 184 Screwdriver with Ball Hex Tip 12. This type of screwdriver permits to work in an angle w. 12. The cable connectors have to be fixed with a torque of minimum 0.4 Recommended Tools To secure the connectors on the passive splitter boards.5 is required.5. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 239 .

240 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .6 Parts List Required parts are: • Eight (or nine) S-shaped interconnection cables (3FE 60300 AA) per equipped 7302 FD-Combo subrack.5.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 185 Installing ADSL Interconnection Cables in 7302 FD-Combo Subrack NTIO NT B SP01 SP02 SP03 SP04 SP05 SP06 SP07 SP08 NTA LT01 LT02 LT03 LT04 LT05 LT06 LT07 LT08 12.

6 POTS and LINE Cabling (2x24-pair) for 7302 FD-Combo Subrack (48-line) This section describes the POTS and LINE cabling procedure with 2x24-pair cables for: • 7302 FD-Combo subracks equipped with LT boards and splitter boards • 7302 FD subracks equipped with NALS-x boards Note — The NALS-x board is a multiDSL combined LT/splitter board. refer to the UDS.1 POTS and LINE Cabling for 7302 FD-Combo Subracks equipped with LT Boards and Splitter Boards Figure 186 shows an example of the POTS/LINE cabling with 2x24-pair cables for a 7302 FD-Combo subrack equipped with LT boards and splitter boards. refer to Figure 181. For more information on the NALS-x board. ii Connect the connector marked with “Y” to the lower connector of the adjacent splitter board. 2 For each cable: i Connect the connector marked with “X” on the LT board. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 241 . 12.6.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Procedure 43 Interconnection Cabling in 7302 FD-Combo Subrack 1 Prepare the S-shaped interconnection cables for the 7302 FD-Combo subracks. 12. eight (or nine) cables per installed subrack.

6.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 186 POTS/LINE Cabling for 7302 FD-Combo subrack with 2x24-pair Cables LINE LINE POTS POTS A/4 FOR SPL A/60 FOR LT B/4 FOR SPL B/60 FOR LT 12. 242 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .1. refer to Figure 187.1 Cable Type The required cable is an MDF cable with two bundles of 24-pair cables and one CHAMP100 connector.

for example. and so on.6. “KH”: 60 m. 200 mm ca. 12.4 for the wiring list of the CHAMP100 connector. Refer to “MDF Cable Length”. “HA”: 20 m.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Figure 187 2x24-pair MDF Cable Solder side 76 100 51 75 26 50 1 25 L ca. 200 mm Blue Table 24 shows the MDF cables that can be used. “HL”: 25 m.2 Number of MDF Cables Table 25 gives the required number of MDF cables. Note 2 — Refer to Appendix 16. 60 mm Orange ca.1. Table 24 MDF Cables Connections Code ADSL (ETSI) 3FE 26725 xx SHDSL (ETSI) 3FE 26725 xx VDSL (ETSI) 3FE 26725 xx Note 1 — “xx” defines the cable length. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 243 .

1. Number of 2x24-pair Cables per Splitter Slot per Subrack 8 LT boards and 8 splitters (Figure 188) 2 (1 for POTS and 1 for LINE) 16 9 LT boards and 9 splitters (Figure 189) 2 (1 for POTS and 1 for LINE) 18 Figure 188 7302 FD-Combo Subrack with 8 LT Boards and 8 Splitter Boards NTIO NT B SP01 SP02 SP03 SP04 SP05 SP06 SP07 SP08 NTA LT01 LT02 LT03 LT04 LT05 LT06 LT07 LT08 Figure 189 7302 FD-Combo Subrack with 9 LT Boards and 9 Splitter Boards LT 09 SP09 SP01 SP02 SP03 SP04 SP05 SP06 SP07 SP08 NTA LT01 LT02 LT03 LT04 LT05 LT06 LT07 LT08 12.6. refer to section “Handling Baillocks”. Note — For more information on locking and unlocking baillocks. refer to Figure 177.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Table 25 Number of 2x24-pair MDF Cables for Rack with 7302 FD-Combo Subrack 7302 FD-Combo equipped with. 244 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .3 Connection/Locking The cables are plugged into the connectors on the splitter boards and are locked in place with baillocks.

Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 245 .HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling 12.6.1. Figure 190 Installing 2x24-pair MDF Cables in 7302 FD-Combo Subrack POTS 01 POTS 02 POTS 03 POTS 04 POTS 05 POTS 06 POTS 07 POTS 08 LINE 01 LINE 02 LINE 03 LINE 04 LINE 05 LINE 06 LINE 07 LINE 08 A/4 FOR SPL A/60 FOR LT B/4 FOR SPL B/60 FOR LT Note — Only the POTS cabling is shown in Figure 190.4 Cabling Diagram Figure 190 shows the cabling diagram for installing the 2x24-pair MDF cables in a 7302 FD-Combo subrack (configuration with 8 LT boards and 8 splitter boards is shown).

2 Label 16 cables for the first subrack. refer to Table 25. Procedure 44 2x24 MDF Cabling in 7302 FD-Combo Subrack 1 Prepare the 2x24-pair MDF cables for the 7302 FD-Combo subracks. • Tie-wraps (5 mm x 190 mm) for tying up and/or bundling cables.5 Parts List Required parts are: • 16 (or 18) 2x24-pair MDF cables (3FE 26725 AA) per equipped 7302 FD-Combo subrack. Note — The procedure will be given for the installation of 16 cables. Refer to Figure 190 for the position of the connectors on the splitter boards and to Table 26 to define the labels. 16 (or 18) cables per installed subrack.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 12.1. 246 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .6. • Lacing cord for tying up and/or bundling cables.

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Table 26 Overview MDF Cabling for 7302 FD-Combo Subrack Routing 2x24-pair Cable Bundle Splitter Splitter board Cable Label Color board Connector Pair Numbers Left POTS 01 Blue SP 01 POTS (upper) POTS 01-24 Orange POTS 25-48 POTS 02 Blue SP 02 POTS (upper) POTS 49-72 Orange POTS 73-96 POTS 03 Blue SP 03 POTS (upper) POTS 97-120 Orange POTS 121-144 POTS 04 Blue SP 04 POTS (upper) POTS 145-168 Orange POTS 169-192 Right POTS 05 Blue SP 05 POTS (upper) POTS 193-216 Orange POTS 217-240 POTS 06 Blue SP 06 POTS (upper) POTS 241-264 Orange POTS 265-288 POTS 07 Blue SP 07 POTS (upper) POTS 289-312 Orange POTS 313-336 POTS 08 Blue SP 08 POTS (upper) POTS 337-360 Orange POTS 361-384 Left LINE 01 Blue SP 01 LINE (lower) LINE 01-24 Orange LINE 25-48 LINE 02 Blue SP 02 LINE (lower) LINE 49-72 Orange LINE 73-96 LINE 03 Blue SP 03 LINE (lower) LINE 97-120 Orange LINE 121-144 LINE 04 Blue SP 04 LINE (lower) LINE 145-168 Orange LINE 169-192 Right LINE 05 Blue SP 05 LINE (lower) LINE 193-216 Orange LINE 217-240 LINE 06 Blue SP 06 LINE (lower) LINE 241-264 Orange LINE 265-288 LINE 07 Blue SP 07 LINE (lower) LINE 289-312 Orange LINE 313-336 LINE 08 Blue SP 08 LINE (lower) LINE 337-360 Orange LINE 361-384 Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 247 .

3 Install the four 2x24-pair MDF cables for POTS for the left part: POTS 01 to POTS 04. i Run the four 2x24-pair cables from the overhead guide down (overhead cabling) or from the raised floor up (raised floor cabling) via the left side cable area of the rack to the upper subrack. Refer to Table 26 and Figure 190..). block number. 5 Properly arrange the eight 2x24-pair cables in the cabling area and route them to the top rack entry (overhead routing) or under the raised floor (raised floor routing). 248 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . the labels can also contain information about connection at the local MDF (MDF style.. ii Connect each cable to the LINE connector on the appropriate splitter board: • Cable LINE 01 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP01 • Cable LINE 02 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP02 • Cable LINE 03 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP03 • Cable LINE 04 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP04 iii Secure the connectors with baillocks.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Note — Besides pair numbering.. ii Connect each cable to the POTS connector on the appropriate splitter board: • Cable POTS 01 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP01 • Cable POTS 02 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP02 • Cable POTS 03 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP03 • Cable POTS 04 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP04 iii Secure the connectors with baillocks. Tie up the cables with tie wraps at regular distances and use the rack cable supports to attach cable bundles. 4 Install the four 2x24-pair cables for LINE for the left part: LINE 01 to LINE 04. cable number. Refer to Table 26 and Figure 190. i Run the four 2x24-pair cables from the overhead guide down (overhead cabling) or from the raised floor up (raised floor cabling) via the left side cable area of the rack to the upper subrack.

sixteen in case of two subracks) to the MDF. 7 Install the four 2x24-pair cables for LINE for the right part: LINE 05 to LINE 08. 8 Properly arrange the eight 2x24-pair cables in the cabling area and route them to the top rack entry (overhead routing) or under the raised floor (raised floor routing). Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 249 . Tie up the cables with tie wraps at regular distances and use the rack cable supports to attach cable bundles. i Run the four 2x24-pair cables from the overhead guide down (overhead cabling) or from the raised floor up (raised floor cabling) via the right side cable area of the rack to the upper subrack. i Run the four 2x24-pair cables from the overhead guide down (overhead cabling) or from the raised floor up (raised floor cabling) via the right side cable area of the rack to the upper subrack.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling 6 Install the four 2x24-pair cables for POTS for the right part: POTS 05 to POTS 08. Follow the procedures prescribed by local practices. ii Connect each cable to the POTS connector on the appropriate splitter board: • Cable POTS 05 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP05 • Cable POTS 06 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP06 • Cable POTS 07 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP07 • Cable POTS 08 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP08 iii Secure the connectors with baillocks. Refer to the MDF cabling guidelines. Refer to Table 26 and Figure 190. ii Connect each cable to the LINE connector on the appropriate splitter board: • Cable LINE 05 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP05 • Cable LINE 06 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP06 • Cable LINE 07 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP07 • Cable LINE 08 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP08 iii Secure the connectors with baillocks. 9 Route the MDF cables (eight for one. Refer to Table 26 and Figure 190.

6. Table 27 Number of 2x24-pair MDF Cables for Rack with 7302 FD Subrack with NALS-x Boards 7302 FD equipped with.2.2 Number of Cables Table 27 gives the required number of MDF cables.1 Cable Type The required cable is an MDF cable with two bundles of 24-pair cables and one CHAMP100 connector (code 3FE 26725 xx).6. 12.6. 12.2 POTS and LINE Cabling for 7302 FD Subracks equipped with NALS-x Boards This section describes the POTS and LINE cabling procedure with 2x24-pair cables between the NALS-x boards in a 7302 FD-Combo subrack and the MDF.2. refer to Figure 187. Number of 2x24-pair Cables per NALS-x Slot per Subrack 16 NALS-x boards 2 (1 for POTS and 1 for LINE) 32 18 NALS-x boards 2 (1 for POTS and 1 for LINE) 36 Figure 191 7302 FD-Combo Subrack with 16 NALS-x Boards LT/SP 03 LT/SP 05 LT/SP 07 LT/SP 09 LT/SP 11 LT/SP 13 LT/SP 15 LT/SP 02 LT/SP 04 LT/SP 06 LT/SP 08 LT/SP 10 LT/SP 12 LT/SP 14 LT/SP 01 LT/SP 16 NTIO NT B NTA 250 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 12.

3 Connection/Locking The cables are plugged into the connectors on the splitter boards and are locked in place with baillocks. Procedure 45 2x24 MDF Cabling in 7302 FD Subrack equipped with NALS-x Boards 1 Prepare the 2x24-pair MDF cables for the 7302 FD subracks. 2 Label 16 cables for the first subrack. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 251 . refer to Figure 177. 32 (or 38) cables per installed subrack.2. Note — For more information on locking and unlocking baillocks. refer to section “Handling Baillocks”.6.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Figure 192 7302 FD-Combo Subrack with 18 NALS-x Boards LT/SP 03 LT/SP 05 LT/SP 07 LT/SP 09 LT/SP 11 LT/SP 13 LT/SP 15 LT/SP 02 LT/SP 04 LT/SP 06 LT/SP 08 LT/SP 17 LT/SP 18 LT/SP 10 LT/SP 12 LT/SP 14 LT/SP 16 LT/SP 01 NTA 12. Note — This procedure describes the 2x24 MDF cabling for a 7302 FD subrack equipped with 16 NALS-x boards. Refer to Table 28 to define the labels.

MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Table 28 Overview MDF Cabling for 7302 FD Subrack with NALS-x Boards Routing 2x24-pair Cable Bundle NALS-x NALS-x board Cable Label Color board Connector Pair Numbers Left LINE 01 Blue 01 LINE (upper LINE 01-24 connector) Orange LINE 25-48 LINE 02 Blue 02 LINE 49-72 Orange LINE 73-96 LINE 03 Blue 03 LINE 97-120 Orange LINE 121-144 LINE 04 Blue 04 LINE 145-168 Orange LINE 169-192 LINE 05 Blue 05 LINE 193-216 Orange LINE 217-240 LINE 06 Blue 06 LINE 241-264 Orange LINE 265-288 LINE 07 Blue 07 LINE 289-312 Orange LINE 313-336 LINE 08 Blue 08 LINE 337-360 Orange LINE 361-384 Right LINE 09 Blue 09 LINE (upper LINE 385-408 connector) Orange LINE 409-432 LINE 10 Blue 10 LINE 433-456 Orange LINE 457-480 LINE 11 Blue 11 LINE 481-504 Orange LINE 505-528 LINE 12 Blue 12 LINE 529-552 Orange LINE 553-576 LINE 13 Blue 13 LINE 577-600 Orange LINE 601-624 LINE 14 Blue 14 LINE 625-648 Orange LINE 649-672 LINE 15 Blue 15 LINE 673-696 Orange LINE 697-720 LINE 16 Blue 16 LINE 721-744 Orange LINE 745-768 (1 of 2) 252 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Routing 2x24-pair Cable Bundle NALS-x NALS-x board Cable Label Color board Connector Pair Numbers Left POTS 01 Blue 01 POTS (lower POTS 01-24 connector) Orange POTS 25-48 POTS 02 Blue 02 POTS 49-72 Orange POTS 73-96 POTS 03 Blue 03 POTS 97-120 Orange POTS 121-144 POTS 04 Blue 04 POTS 145-168 Orange POTS 169-192 POTS 05 Blue 05 POTS 193-216 Orange POTS 217-240 POTS 06 Blue 06 POTS 241-264 Orange POTS 265-288 POTS 07 Blue 07 POTS 289-312 Orange POTS 313-336 POTS 08 Blue 08 POTS 337-360 Orange POTS 361-384 Right POTS 09 Blue 09 POTS (lower POTS 385-408 connector) Orange POTS 409-432 POTS 10 Blue 10 POTS 433-456 Orange POTS 457-480 POTS 11 Blue 11 POTS 481-504 Orange POTS 505-528 POTS 12 Blue 12 POTS 529-552 Orange POTS 553-576 POTS 13 Blue 13 POTS 577-600 Orange POTS 601-624 POTS 14 Blue 14 POTS 625-648 Orange POTS 649-672 POTS 15 Blue 15 POTS 673-696 Orange POTS 697-720 POTS 16 Blue 16 POTS 721-744 Orange POTS 745-768 (2 of 2) Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 253 .

.). 3 Install the eight 2x24-pair MDF cables for LINE for the left part: LINE 01 to LINE 08..MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Note — Besides pair numbering. 254 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . block number. Refer to Table 28 and Figure 193. cable number. the labels can also contain information about connection at the local MDF (MDF style..

• Cable LINE 08 to the LINE connector of NALS-x board 08 Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 255 .HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Figure 193 Position of Connectors for LINE Cables LINE 01 LINE 02 LINE 03 LINE 04 LINE 05 LINE 06 LINE 07 LINE 08 LINE 09 LINE 10 LINE 11 LINE 12 LINE 13 LINE 14 LINE 15 LINE 16 NALS-x 01 NALS-x 02 NALS-x 03 NALS-x 04 NALS-x 05 NALS-x 06 NALS-x 07 NALS-x 08 NALS-x 09 NALS-x 10 NALS-x 11 NALS-x 12 NALS-x 13 NALS-x 14 NALS-x 15 NALS-x 16 i Run the eight 2x24-pair cables from the overhead guide down (overhead cabling) or from the raised floor up (raised floor cabling) via the left side cable area of the rack to the upper subrack. ii Connect each cable to the LINE connector on the appropriate NALS-x board: • Cable LINE 01 to the LINE connector of NALS-x board 01 • Cable LINE 02 to the LINE connector of NALS-x board 02 • ...

Refer to Table 28 and Figure 194.. 256 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . ii Connect each cable to the POTS connector on the appropriate NALS-x board: • Cable POTS 01 to the POTS connector of NALS-x board 01 • Cable POTS 02 to the POTS connector of NALS-x board 02 • . 4 Install the eight 2x24-pair cables for POTS for the left part: POTS 01 to POTS 08. 5 Properly arrange the sixteen 2x24-pair cables in the cabling area and route them to the top rack entry (overhead routing) or under the raised floor (raised floor routing).MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL iii Secure the connectors with baillocks.. Figure 194 POTS 01 Position of Connectors for POTS Cables POTS 02 POTS 03 POTS 04 POTS 05 POTS 06 POTS 07 POTS 08 POTS 09 POTS 10 POTS 11 POTS 12 POTS 13 POTS 14 POTS 15 POTS 16 NALS-x 01 NALS-x 02 NALS-x 03 NALS-x 04 NALS-x 05 NALS-x 06 NALS-x 07 NALS-x 08 NALS-x 09 NALS-x 10 NALS-x 11 NALS-x 12 NALS-x 13 NALS-x 14 NALS-x 15 NALS-x 16 i Run the eight 2x24-pair cables from the overhead guide down (overhead cabling) or from the raised floor up (raised floor cabling) via the left side cable area of the rack to the upper subrack. • Cable POTS 04 to the POTS connector of NALS-x board 08 iii Secure the connectors with baillocks.

• Cable POTS 08 to the POTS connector of NALS-x board 16 iii Secure the connectors with baillocks. i Run the eight 2x24-pair cables from the overhead guide down (overhead cabling) or from the raised floor up (raised floor cabling) via the right side cable area of the rack to the upper subrack. ii Connect each cable to the LINE connector on the appropriate NALS-x board: • Cable LINE 05 to the LINE connector of NALS-x board 09 • Cable LINE 06 to the LINE connector of NALS-x board 10 • . Refer to the MDF cabling guidelines.. 8 Properly arrange the sixteen 2x24-pair cables in the cabling area and route them to the top rack entry (overhead routing) or under the raised floor (raised floor routing). 7 Install the eight 2x24-pair cables for POTS for the right part: POTS 09 to POTS 16..HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Tie up the cables with tie wraps at regular distances and use the rack cable supports to attach cable bundles. Refer to Table 28 and Figure 194. • Cable LINE 08 to the LINE connector of NALS-x board 16 iii Secure the connectors with baillocks. 6 Install the eight 2x24-pair cables for LINE for the right part: LINE 09 to LINE 16. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 257 . 9 Route the MDF cables (thirty two cables for one subrack) to the MDF. Follow the procedures prescribed by local practices. i Run the eight 2x24-pair cables from the overhead guide down (overhead cabling) or from the raised floor up (raised floor cabling) via the right side cable area of the rack to the upper subrack. ii Connect each cable to the POTS connector on the appropriate NALS-x board: • Cable POTS 05 to the POTS connector of NALS-x board 09 • Cable POTS 06 to the POTS connector of NALS-x board 10 • .. Refer to Table 28 and Figure 193. Tie up the cables with tie wraps at regular distances and use the rack cable supports to attach cable bundles..

Figure 195 POTS/LINE Cabling for 7302 FD-Combo subrack with 96-pair Cables LINE LINE POTS POTS A/4 FOR SPL A/60 FOR LT B/4 FOR SPL B/60 FOR LT 258 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .7 POTS and LINE Cabling (96-pair) for 7302 FD- Combo Subrack (48-line) This section describes the POTS and LINE cabling procedure with 96-pair cables between the splitter boards in a 7302 FD-Combo subrack and the MDF. Figure 195 shows an example.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 12.

1 Cable Type The required cable is an MDF cable with 4 bundles of 24-pair cables and two CHAMP100 connectors. refer to Table 30.7. The 24-pair cables are color coded.4 for the wiring list of the CHAMP100 connectors. “HA”: 20 m. Refer to “MDF Cable Length”. and so on. Figure 196 96-pair MDF Cable Solder side 76 100 635 1 25 Brown Green Connector B Orange Blue 610 Connector A Table 29 shows the MDF cables that can be used. “HL”: 25 m. “KH”: 60 m.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling 12. refer to Figure 196. Note 2 — Refer to Appendix 16. Table 29 MDF Cables Connections Code ADSL (ETSI) 3FE 26726 xx SHDSL (ETSI) 3FE 26726 xx VDSL (ETSI) 3FE 26726 xx Note 1 — “xx” defines the cable length. for example. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 259 .

7.line 24 Brown Line 25 .MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Table 30 24-pair Bundle .Line Number Distribution Connector Bundle Line Number on the Connector Connector A Blue Line 01 .line 48 12. Table 31 Number of 96-pair MDF Cables for Rack with 7302 FD-Combo Subrack 7302 FD-Combo equipped with.2 Number of MDF Cables Table 31 gives the required number of MDF cables.line 48 Connector B Green Line 01 . Number of 96-pair Cables per Splitter Slot per Subrack 8 LT boards and 8 splitters (Figure 197) 1 (one 96-pair cable serves 2 slots) 8 9 LT boards and 9 splitters (Figure 198) 1 (one 96-pair cable serves 2 slots) 9 Figure 197 7302 FD-Combo Subrack with 8 LT Boards and 8 Splitter Boards NTIO NT B SP01 SP02 SP03 SP04 SP05 SP06 SP07 SP08 NTA LT01 LT02 LT03 LT04 LT05 LT06 LT07 LT08 Figure 198 7302 FD-Combo Subrack with 9 LT Boards and 9 Splitter Boards LT 09 SP09 SP01 SP02 SP03 SP04 SP05 SP06 SP07 SP08 NTA LT01 LT02 LT03 LT04 LT05 LT06 LT07 LT08 260 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .line 24 Orange Line 25 .

refer to Figure 177. Note — For more information on locking and unlocking baillocks.4 Cabling Diagram Figure 199 shows the cabling diagram for installing the 96-pair MDF cables in a 7302 FD-Combo subrack (configuration with 8 LT boards and 8 splitter boards is shown).HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling 12.7. 12. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 261 .3 Connection/Locking The cables are plugged into the connectors on the splitter boards and are locked in place with baillocks. refer to section “Handling Baillocks”.7.

5 Parts List Required parts are: • 8 (or 9) 96-pair MDF cables (3FE 26726 AA) per equipped 7302 FD-Combo subrack. • Tie-wraps (5 mm x 190 mm) for tying up and/or bundling cables • Lacing cord for tying up and/or bundling cables.7.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 199 Installing 96-pair MDF Cables in 7302 FD-Combo Subrack O O G B G B B r B r r r r r l a l a e o e o u n u n e w e w e g e g n n n n POTS 01 e e POTS 02 POTS 03 POTS 04 POTS 05 POTS 06 POTS 07 POTS 08 LINE 01 LINE 02 LINE 03 LINE 04 LINE 05 LINE 06 LINE 07 LINE 08 A/4 FOR SPL A/60 FOR LT B/4 FOR SPL B/60 FOR LT Only the POTS cabling is shown in Figure 199 12. refer to Table 31. 262 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

2 Label 8 cables for the first subrack. Refer to Figure 199 for the position of the connectors on the splitter boards and to Table 32 to define the labels.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Procedure 46 96 MDF Cabling in 7302 FD-Combo Subrack 1 Prepare the 96-pair MDF cables for the 7302 FD-Combo subracks. Table 32 Overview MDF Cabling for 7302 FD-Combo Subrack Routing 96-pair Cable Splitter Splitter board Bundle Cable Label (1) board connector Color Pair Numbers Left POTS 01 SP 01 POTS (upper) Blue POTS 01-24 Orange POTS 25-48 SP 02 POTS (upper) Green POTS 49-72 Brown POTS 73-96 POTS 02 SP 03 POTS (upper) Blue POTS 97-120 Orange POTS 121-144 SP 04 POTS (upper) Green POTS 145-168 Brown POTS 169-192 Right POTS 03 SP 05 POTS (upper) Green POTS 193-216 Brown POTS 217-240 SP 06 POTS (upper) Blue POTS 241-264 Orange POTS 265-288 POTS 04 SP 07 POTS (upper) Green POTS 289-312 Brown POTS 313-336 SP 08 POTS (upper) Blue POTS 337-360 Orange POTS 361-384 Left LINE 01 SP 01 LINE (lower) Blue LINE 01-24 Orange LINE 25-48 SP 02 LINE (lower) Green LINE 49-72 Brown LINE 73-96 LINE 02 SP 03 LINE (lower) Blue LINE 97-120 Orange LINE 121-144 SP 04 LINE (lower) Green LINE 145-168 Brown LINE 169-192 (1 of 2) Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 263 . 8 (or 9) cables per installed subrack.

block number. ii Connect each cable to the LINE connector on the appropriate splitter board: • Cable LINE 01 (short) to the LINE connector of splitter board SP01 • Cable LINE 01 (long) to the LINE connector of splitter board SP02 • Cable LINE 02 (short) to the LINE connector of splitter board SP03 • Cable LINE 02 (long) to the LINE connector of splitter board SP04 iii Secure the connectors with baillocks.. ii Connect each cable to the POTS connector on the appropriate splitter board: • Cable POTS 01 (short) to the POTS connector of splitter board SP01 • Cable POTS 01 (long) to the POTS connector of splitter board SP02 • Cable POTS 02 (short) to the POTS connector of splitter board SP03 • Cable POTS 02 (long) to the POTS connector of splitter board SP04 iii Secure the connectors with baillocks. i Run the two 96-pair cables from the overhead guide down (overhead cabling) or from the raised floor up (raised floor cabling) via the left side cable area of the rack to the upper subrack. 264 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . i Run the two 96-pair cables from the overhead guide down (overhead cabling) or from the raised floor up (raised floor cabling) via the left side cable area of the rack to the upper subrack.. 3 Install the two 96-pair MDF cables for POTS for the left part: POTS 01 and POTS 02.). the labels can also contain information about connection at the local MDF (MDF style. 4 Install the two 96-pair cables for LINE for the left part: LINE 01 and LINE 02.. Refer to Table 32 and Figure 199.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Routing 96-pair Cable Splitter Splitter board Bundle Cable Label (1) board connector Color Pair Numbers Right LINE 03 SP 05 LINE (lower) Green LINE 193-216 Brown LINE 217-240 SP 06 LINE (lower) Blue LINE 241-264 Orange LINE 265-288 LINE 04 SP 07 LINE (lower) Green LINE 289-312 Brown LINE 313-336 SP 08 LINE (lower) Blue LINE 337-360 Orange LINE 361-384 (2 of 2) Note (1) Besides pair numbering. cable number. Refer to Table 32 and Figure 199.

i Run the two 96-pair cables from the overhead guide down (overhead cabling) or from the raised floor up (raised floor cabling) via the right side cable area of the rack to the upper subrack. ii Connect each cable to the POTS connector on the appropriate splitter board: • Cable POTS 03 (long) to the POTS connector of splitter board SP05 • Cable POTS 03 (short) to the POTS connector of splitter board SP06 • Cable POTS 04 (long) to the POTS connector of splitter board SP07 • Cable POTS 04 (short) to the POTS connector of splitter board SP08 iii Secure the connectors with baillocks. Tie up the cables with tie wraps at regular distances and use the rack cable supports to attach cable bundles. Refer to Table 32 and Figure 199. Refer to the MDF cabling guidelines. 8 Properly arrange the four 96-pair cables in the cabling area and route them to the top rack entry (overhead routing) or under the raised floor (raised floor routing). i Run the two 96-pair cables from the overhead guide down (overhead cabling) or from the raised floor up (raised floor cabling) via the right side cable area of the rack to the upper subrack. 9 Route the MDF cables (eight for one. Tie up the cables with tie wraps at regular distances and use the rack cable supports to attach cable bundles. Refer to Table 32 and Figure 199. ii Connect each cable to the LINE connector on the appropriate splitter board: • Cable LINE 03 (long) to the LINE connector of splitter board SP05 • Cable LINE 03 (short) to the LINE connector of splitter board SP06 • Cable LINE 04 (long) to the LINE connector of splitter board SP07 • Cable LINE 04 (short) to the LINE connector of splitter board SP08 iii Secure the connectors with baillocks. 6 Install the two 96-pair cables for POTS for the right part: POTS 03 and POTS 04. sixteen in case of two subracks) to the MDF. 7 Install the two 96-pair cables for LINE for the right part: LINE 03 to LINE 04. Follow the procedures prescribed by local practices.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling 5 Properly arrange the four 96-pair cables in the cabling area and route them to the top rack entry (overhead routing) or under the raised floor (raised floor routing). Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 265 .

“HA”: 20 m.8.7 for the pin mapping of the Metral-HDXS-72 connector. and so on. refer to Figure 200.2 Number of MDF Cables Table 33 gives the required number of MDF cables. for example. “KH”: 60 m.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 12.1 Cable Type The required cable is an MDF cable with 3 bundles of 24-pair cables and a Metral-HDXS-72 connector. “HL”: 25 m. Refer to “MDF Cable Length”. 12. 12. Figure 200 72-pair MDF Cable C C B- B- A- A- -F -F F- F- F- F- -1 -0 12 01 12 01 2 1 01 12 12 01 1 2 -0 -1 A- A- A- A- -A -A A- B- A- B- C C BUNDLE C BUNDLE B BUNDLE A GREEN ORANGE BLUE L The cable code is 3FE 60227 xx. Note 1 — “xx” defines the cable length.8 POTS and LINE Cabling for 7302 FD-Combo Subrack (72-line) This section describes the POTS and LINE cabling procedure with 72-pair cables between the 72-line splitter boards in a 7302 FD-Combo subrack and the MDF.8. 266 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . Note 2 — Refer to Appendix 16.

r.5 is required.8.8 Nm and maximum 1 Nm. a screwdriver with ball hex tip M2. 12.3 Connection/Locking The cables are plugged into the connectors on the splitter boards. the screw.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Table 33 Number of 72-pair MDF Cables for Rack with 7302 FD-Combo Subrack 7302 FD-Combo equipped with. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 267 . Number of 72-pair Cables per Splitter Slot per Subrack 8 LT boards and 8 splitters (Figure 201) 2 16 9 LT boards and 9 splitters (Figure 202) 2 18 Figure 201 7302 FD-Combo Subrack with 8 LT Boards and 8 Splitter Boards NTIO NT B SP01 SP02 SP03 SP04 SP05 SP06 SP07 SP08 NTA LT01 LT02 LT03 LT04 LT05 LT06 LT07 LT08 Figure 202 7302 FD-Combo Subrack with 9 LT Boards and 9 Splitter Boards LT 09 SP09 SP01 SP02 SP03 SP04 SP05 SP06 SP07 SP08 NTA LT01 LT02 LT03 LT04 LT05 LT06 LT07 LT08 12.t. This type of screwdriver permits to work in an angle w.8.4 Recommended Tools To secure the connectors on the passive splitter boards. The cable connectors have to be fixed with a torque of minimum 0.

268 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .6 Parts List Required parts are: • 8 (or 9) 72-pair MDF cables (3FE 60227 xx) per equipped 7302 FD-Combo subrack.8.5 Cabling Diagram Figure 204 shows the cabling diagram for installing the 96-pair MDF cables in a 7302 FD-Combo subrack (configuration with 8 LT boards and 8 splitter boards is shown). Figure 204 Installing 72-pair MDF Cables in 7302 FD-Combo Subrack POTS 01 POTS 02 POTS 03 POTS 04 POTS 05 POTS 06 POTS 07 POTS 08 LINE 01 LINE 02 LINE 03 LINE 04 LINE 05 LINE 06 LINE 07 LINE 08 12.8.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 203 Screwdriver with Ball Hex Tip 12. refer to Table 33. • Tie-wraps (5 mm x 190 mm) for tying up and/or bundling cables • Lacing cord for tying up and/or bundling cables.

2 Label 8 cables for the first subrack.. block number.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Procedure 47 96 MDF Cabling in 7302 FD-Combo Subrack 1 Prepare the 72-pair MDF cables for the 7302 FD-Combo subracks.. Refer to Figure 204 for the position of the connectors on the splitter boards and to Table 34 to define the labels.). cable number. 8 (or 9) cables per installed subrack.. Table 34 Overview 72-line MDF Cabling for 7302 FD-Combo Subrack Routing 72-pair Cable Label Splitter board Cable Pair Numbers Left POTS 01 SP 01 POTS 01-72 POTS 02 SP 02 POTS 73-144 POTS 03 SP 03 POTS 145-216 POTS 04 SP 04 POTS 217-288 Right POTS 05 SP 05 POTS 289-360 POTS 06 SP 06 POTS 361-432 POTS 07 SP 07 POTS 433-504 POTS 08 SP 08 POTS 505-576 Left LINE 01 SP 01 LINE 01-72 LINE 02 SP 02 LINE 73-144 LINE 03 SP 03 LINE 145-216 LINE 04 SP 04 LINE 217-288 Right LINE 05 SP 05 LINE 289-360 LINE 06 SP 06 LINE 361-432 LINE 07 SP 07 LINE 433-504 LINE 08 SP 08 LINE 505-576 Note — Besides pair numbering. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 269 . the labels can also contain information about connection at the local MDF (MDF style.

POTS 03 and POTS 04. POTS 02.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 3 Install the four 72-pair MDF cables for POTS for the left part: POTS 01. ii Connect each cable connector to the LINE connector on the appropriate splitter board: • Cable LINE 01 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP01 • Cable LINE 02 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP02 • Cable LINE 03 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP03 • Cable LINE 04 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP04 iii Fix each cable bundle from the LINE connector to the cable bundle of the corresponding POTS connector with a tie-wrap. LINE 03 and LINE 04. ii Connect each cable connector to the POTS connector on the appropriate splitter board: • Cable POTS 01to the POTS connector of splitter board SP01 • Cable POTS 02 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP02 • Cable POTS 03 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP03 • Cable POTS 04 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP04 4 Install the four 72-pair cables for LINE for the left part: LINE 01. LINE 02. Refer to Table 34. refer to Figure 205. i Run the four 72-pair cables from the overhead guide down (overhead cabling) or from the raised floor up (raised floor cabling) via the left side cable area of the rack to the upper subrack. 270 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . Refer to Table 34. i Run the four 72-pair cables from the overhead guide down (overhead cabling) or from the raised floor up (raised floor cabling) via the left side cable area of the rack to the upper subrack.

then the insertion or extraction of an adjacent board could result in damage to the cables. ii Connect each cable to the POTS connector on the appropriate splitter board: • Cable POTS 05 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP05 • Cable POTS 06 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP06 • Cable POTS 07 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP07 • Cable POTS 08 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP08 Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 271 . Tie up the cables with tie wraps at regular distances and use the rack cable supports to attach cable bundles. POTS 04. POTS 05 and POTS 06. If this should be the case.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Figure 205 Add an extra tie-wrap per slot Extra tie-wrap Note — This must be done to avoid that the cables bend outside the slot width. i Run the four 72-pair cables from the overhead guide down (overhead cabling) or from the raised floor up (raised floor cabling) via the right side cable area of the rack to the upper subrack. 5 Properly arrange the 72-pair cables in the cabling area and route them to the top rack entry (overhead routing) or under the raised floor (raised floor routing). 6 Install the four 72-pair cables for POTS for the right part: POTS 03. Refer to Table 34.

sixteen in case of two subracks) to the MDF. 8 Properly arrange the 72-pair cables in the cabling area and route them to the top rack entry (overhead routing) or under the raised floor (raised floor routing).1 Cable Type The required MDF cable is a double 24-pair cable with two male CHAMP100 connectors. Follow the procedures prescribed by local practices. ii Connect each cable to the LINE connector on the appropriate splitter board: • Cable LINE 05 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP05 • Cable LINE 06 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP06 • Cable LINE 07 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP07 • Cable LINE 08 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP08 iii Fix each cable bundle from the LINE connector to the cable bundle of the corresponding POTS connector with a tie-wrap.9. 272 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . Refer to Table 34. then the insertion or extraction of an adjacent board could result in damage to the cables. Refer to the MDF cabling guidelines. 12.9 Intra-rack Cabling Between FD Splitter Subrack and 7302 FD-LT Subrack (48-line) This section describes the procedure for the intra-rack cabling between an FD Splitter subrack and a 7302 FD-LT subrack in the same rack. 9 Route the MDF cables (eight for one.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 7 Install the four 72-pair cables for LINE for the right part: LINE 03 to LINE 04. i Run the four 72-pair cables from the overhead guide down (overhead cabling) or from the raised floor up (raised floor cabling) via the right side cable area of the rack to the upper subrack. If this should be the case. refer to Figure 205. 12. Note — This must be done to avoid that the cables bend outside the slot width. The CHAMP100 connectors are 90° connectors and fit on the connector of the LT board and the splitter board. Tie up the cables with tie wraps at regular distances and use the rack cable supports to attach cable bundles.

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling

Two different intra-rack cables can be used, depending on the rack configuration
(refer to Table 2 and Table 3). When an FD splitter subrack is used in rack
configuration:
• 3FE 29852 AA (refer to Figure 208) or 3FE 62445 AA, then the following intra-rack
cable can be used:
• the intra-rack cable 3FE 27677 AA (refer to Figure 206 for the cable and Figure 208
for the routing)
• 3FE 29853 AA, deployed in Combo configuration (that is, first subrack is an FD
splitter subrack, second subrack is an FD subrack with LT boards only and third
subrack is an FD subrack with POTS LT boards only):
• the intra-rack cable 3FE 27677 AA is used between the first and the second subrack
• the intra-rack cable 3FE 29916 CC (refer to Figure 207) is used to connect the POTS
interface on the splitter boards of the between the first and the third subrack
• 3FE 29853 AA, deployed in the configuration FD splitter subrack / FD subrack
with LT boards / FD subrack with LT boards and splitter boards:
• the intra-rack cable 3FE 27677 AA is used between the first and the second subrack
• the cable 3FE 27677 AA (refer to Figure 206) is used in the third subrack (refer to
section 12.4)

Figure 206 Intra-rack Cable 3FE 27677 AA
View Y View Z
76 100 76 100

1 25 1 25

175 mm

Y Z

Connector B Connector A

Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 273

MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL

Figure 207 Intra-rack cable 3FE 29916 xx
View Y View Z
25 1 76 100

100 76 1 25

Y Z

Connector B Connector A

Note — Refer to Appendix 16.5 for the wiring list of the 48-line
intra-rack cable.

274 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling

Figure 208 Intra-rack Cabling for Rack Configuration 3FE 29852 AA

Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 275

MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL

Figure 209 Intra-rack Cabling for Rack Configuration 3FE 29853 AA

FD splitter FD splitter
subrack subrack

3FE 27677 AA

FD LT subrack FD LT subrack
equipped with 3FE 29916 CC equipped with
FD LT boards FD LT boards

FD LT subrack
FD Combo
equipped with
subrack
POTS LT boards

FD Combo configuration

12.9.2 Number of Intra-rack Cables
One intra-rack cable is required for each equipped LT board in the 7302 FD
subrack(s).

276 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling

12.9.3 Connection/Locking
The CHAMP100 connector is plugged into the connector on the LT board and the
splitter board and is locked in place with baillocks (refer to Figure 177).
Note — For more information on locking and unlocking
baillocks; refer to section “Handling Baillocks”.

12.9.4 Cabling Diagram for 3FE 27677 AA
Figure 210 shows the diagram for the intra-rack cabling with cable 3FE 27677 AA
between an FD splitter subrack and a 7302 FD-LT subrack.
Figure 210 Cabling for Intra-rack Cable 3FE 27677 AA

12.9.5 Parts List
Required parts are:
• Intra-rack cables 3FE 27677 AA (one for each equipped LT board in the 7302 FD
subrack), refer to Figure 206.

Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 277

MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL

Procedure 48 Intra-rack Cabling with Cable 3FE 27677 AA

1 Prepare the cables for intra-rack cabling.

These cables connect the ADSL lines between 7302 FD-LT and FD splitter subrack in the
same rack. Refer to Figure 210.

2 For each cable:

i Connect one end to the connector on the LT board.

ii Guide the cable through the finger guides on both subracks.

iii Connect the other end to the lower connector of the adjacent splitter board; refer to
Figure 210.

12.9.6 Cabling Diagram for 3FE 29916 BP
Figure 211 shows the diagram for the intra-rack cabling with cable 3FE 29916 BP
between an FD splitter subrack and a 7302 FD-LT subrack.

278 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling

Figure 211 Cabling for Intra-rack Cable 3FE 29916 BP

3FE 29916 BP

12.9.7 Parts List
Required parts are:
• Intra-rack cables 3FE 29916 BP (one for each equipped POTS board in the 7302
FD subrack), refer to Figure 207.

Procedure 49 Intra-rack Cabling with Cable 3FE 29916 BP

1 Prepare the cables for intra-rack cabling.

These cables connect the ADSL lines between the 7302 FD Splitter subrack and the 7302
FD LT subrack (bottom subrack) in the same rack. Refer to Figure 211.

2 Label all the cables referring to Table 35.

Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 279

MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL

Table 35 Intra-rack Cabling in Rack with 7302 FD Splitter and 7302 FD-LT
Subrack

Routing 7302 FD Splitter Subrack Wire Pair 7302 FD LT Subrack
Numbering
Slot Label Slot Label

Left LT01 ADSL01 ADSL 01-48 LT01 ADSL01

LT02 ADSL02 ADSL 49-96 LT02 ADSL02

LT03 ADSL03 ADSL 97-144 LT03 ADSL03

LT04 ADSL04 ADSL 145-192 LT04 ADSL04

LT05 ADSL05 ADSL 193-240 LT05 ADSL05

LT06 ADSL06 ADSL 241-288 LT06 ADSL06

LT07 ADSL07 ADSL 289-336 LT07 ADSL07

LT08 ADSL08 ADSL 337-384 LT08 ADSL08

Right LT09 ADSL09 ADSL 385-432 LT09 ADSL09

LT10 ADSL10 ADSL 433-480 LT10 ADSL10

LT11 ADSL11 ADSL 481-528 LT11 ADSL11
LT12 ADSL12 ADSL 529-576 LT12 ADSL12

LT13 ADSL13 ADSL 577-624 LT13 ADSL13

LT14 ADSL14 ADSL 625-672 LT14 ADSL14

LT15 ADSL15 ADSL 673-720 LT15 ADSL15

LT16 ADSL16 ADSL 721-768 LT16 ADSL16

3 Install the eight left-side cables, starting with ADSL 01 and proceeding to the right with
ADSL 02, ADSL 03,... to ADSL 08.

For each cable:

i Run the cable from the FD splitter subrack, via the left cable area, to the 7302 FD LT
subrack (refer to Figure 211).

ii Plug the CHAMP100 connector into the connector on the LT board in the 7302 FD LT
subrack.

iii Plug the other CHAMP100 connector into the POTS connector on the appropriate
splitter board in the FD splitter subrack.

iv Secure the CHAMP100 connectors with baillocks.

4 Install the eight right-side cables, starting with ADSL 16 and proceeding to the left with
ADSL 15, ADSL 14,... to ADSL 09.

280 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09

8 Cabling Diagram for 3FE 29916 CC Figure 212 shows the diagram for the intra-rack cabling with cable 3FE 29916 CC between an FD splitter subrack and a 7302 FD POTS subrack. to the 7302 FD LT subrack (refer to Figure 211). ii Plug the CHAMP100 connector into the connector on the LT board in the 7302 FD LT subrack. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 281 . iii Plug the other CHAMP100 connector into the POTS connector on the appropriate splitter board in the FD splitter subrack. via the left cable area. iv Secure the CHAMP100 connectors with baillocks. 12. 5 Properly arrange the cable overlength in the rack cable channels and tie them up with tie- wraps to the rack uprights at regular distances.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling For each cable: i Run the cable from the FD splitter subrack.9.

MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 212 Cabling for Intra-rack Cable 3FE 29916 CC FD splitter FD LT POTS only 12.9. refer to Figure 207.9 Parts List Required parts are: • Intra-rack cables 3FE 29916 CC (one for each equipped POTS board in the 7302 FD subrack). 282 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

to the 7302 FD POTS subrack (bottom subrack) (refer to Figure 212)..HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Procedure 50 Intra-rack Cabling with Cable 3FE 29916 CC 1 Prepare the cables for intra-rack cabling. starting with POTS 01 and proceeding to the right with POTS 02. via the left cable area. to POTS 08.. These cables connect the POTS lines between the 7302 FD Splitter subrack (top subrack) and the 7302 FD POTS subrack (bottom subrack) in the same rack. Refer to Figure 212. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 283 . Table 36 Overview Intra-rack Cabling in Rack with 7302 FD Splitter and 7302 FD POTS Subrack Routing 7302 FD Splitter Subrack Wire Pair 7302 FD POTS Subrack Numbering Slot Label Slot Label Left LT01 POTS01 POTS 01-48 LT01 POTS01 LT02 POTS02 POTS 49-96 LT02 POTS02 LT03 POTS03 POTS 97-144 LT03 POTS03 LT04 POTS04 POTS 145-192 LT04 POTS04 LT05 POTS05 POTS 193-240 LT05 POTS05 LT06 POTS06 POTS 241-288 LT06 POTS06 LT07 POTS07 POTS 289-336 LT07 POTS07 LT08 POTS08 POTS 337-384 LT08 POTS08 Right LT09 POTS09 POTS 385-432 LT09 POTS09 LT10 POTS10 POTS 433-480 LT10 POTS10 LT11 POTS11 POTS 481-528 LT11 POTS11 LT12 POTS12 POTS 529-576 LT12 POTS12 LT13 POTS13 POTS 577-624 LT13 POTS13 LT14 POTS14 POTS 625-672 LT14 POTS14 LT15 POTS15 POTS 673-720 LT15 POTS15 LT16 POTS16 POTS 721-768 LT16 POTS16 3 Install the eight left-side cables. ii Plug the CHAMP100 connector into the connector on the POTS board in the 7302 FD POTS subrack (bottom subrack). 2 Label all the cables referring to Table 36. POTS 03.. For each cable: i Run the cable from the FD splitter subrack (top subrack).

. iv Secure the CHAMP100 connectors with baillocks..10. POTS 14. ii Plug the CHAMP100 connector into the connector on the POTS board in the 7302 FD POTS subrack (bottom subrack). via the left cable area. iv Secure the CHAMP100 connectors with baillocks. For each cable: i Run the cable from the FD splitter subrack (top subrack). to POTS 09. iii Plug the other CHAMP100 connector into the top connector on the appropriate splitter board in the FD splitter subrack (top subrack). starting with POTS 16 and proceeding to the left with POTS 15.. 12. to the 7302 FD POTS subrack (bottom subrack) (refer to Figure 212). 4 Install the eight right-side cables.1 Cable Type The required MDF cable consists of three individual 24-pair cables and two Metral-HDXS-72 cable connectors (3FE 60399 AA). 284 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . 5 Properly arrange the cable overlength in the rack cable channels and tie them up with tie- wraps to the rack uprights at regular distances.10 Intra-rack Cabling Between FD Splitter Subrack and 7302 FD-LT Subrack (72-line) This section describes the procedure for the 72-line intra-rack cabling between an FD Splitter subrack and a 7302 FD-LT subrack in the same rack. 12.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL iii Plug the other CHAMP100 connector into the top connector on the appropriate splitter board in the FD splitter subrack (top subrack).

4 Recommended Tools To secure the connectors on the boards. The cable connectors have to be fixed with a torque of minimum 0.1 A- -1 -0 0 -F -F F- F- F- F- F- F- F- F- -F -F -1 -0 B- A- 12 0 12 01 C C 2 2 B. This type of screwdriver permits to work in an angle w.1 12 01 C C B.1 A- -1 -0 0 -A -A A- A- A- A- A- A- A- A- -A -A -1 -0 B- A- 12 0 12 01 C C 2 BUNDLE C BUNDLE B BUNDLE A 210 Connector Y Connector X Note — Refer to Appendix 16.t. 12.10. the screw.10. The connectors are secured with screws.r.8 Nm and maximum 1 Nm.1 12 A.1 12 A.10. 12. a screwdriver with ball hex tip M2.1 B- A.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Figure 213 Intra-rack Cable 3FE 60399 AA 2 B.7 for the pin mapping of the Metral-HDXS-72 connector. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 285 . 12.2 Number of Intra-rack Cables One intra-rack cable is required for each equipped LT board in the 7302 FD subrack(s).3 Connection/Locking The connector marked “Y” is connected to the LT board and the connector marked “X” is connected to the splitter board.1 12 01 C C B.5 is required.1 B- A.

10.10. Figure 215 Intra-rack Cabling 12. refer to Figure 213.5 Cabling Diagram Figure 215 shows the diagram for the intra-rack cabling between an FD splitter subrack and a 7302 FD-LT subrack.6 Parts List Required parts are: • Intra-rack cables 3FE 3FE 60399 AA (one for each equipped LT board in the 7302 FD subrack).MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 214 Screwdriver with Ball Hex Tip 12. 286 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

11 POTS and LINE Cabling in Rack with FD Splitter Subrack and 7302 FD-LT Subrack (48- line) This section describes the MDF cabling procedure for a rack with an FD splitter subrack and a 7302 FD-LT subrack.11.7. only the cabling procedure for the LINE cables is applicable. ii Guide the cable through the finger guides on both subracks. 12. • The complete cabling procedure is applicable for the following rack configurations: • 3FE 29852 AA • 3FE 29853 AA.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Procedure 51 Intra-rack Cabling with Cable 3FE 60399 AA 1 Prepare the cables for intra-rack cabling. the subrack with LT boards and splitter boards) refer to section 12.6 or section 12. These cables connect the ADSL lines between 7302 FD-LT and FD splitter subrack in the same rack. iii Connect the connector marked “X” to the lower connector of the splitter board above and secure it in place with the screws. • For the rack configuration 3FE 29853 AA. Refer to Figure 215. deployed in Combo configuration (FD splitter. 12. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 287 .1 FD Splitter Boards The FD splitter subrack has 16 (or 18) AP slots in its splitter area. 2 For each cable: i Connect the connector marked “Y” to the LT board and secure it in place with the screws. refer to Figure 215. FD-LT boards FD-POTS). each slot can house one FD splitter board supporting 48 xDSL subscriber lines (Figure 216). deployed in the configuration FD splitter subrack / FD subrack with LT boards / FD subrack with LT boards and splitter boards Note — For the POTS and LINE cabling for the third FD subrack in configuration 3FE 29853 AA (that is.

MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 216 MDF Connectors on FD Splitter Board POTS 1.2 Cable Type The required cable is an MDF cable with 4 bundles of 24-pair cables and two CHAMP100 connectors.48 LINE 1 . Figure 217 96-pair MDF Cable Solder side 76 100 635 1 25 Brown Green Connector B Orange Blue 610 Connector A 288 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . refer to Figure 217.48 POTS LINE xDSL 12.11.

Table 38 Overview MDF Cables for Rack with one FD-SP and one FD-LT Subrack MDF Cables Number of 96-pair Cables Total Number of MDF Cables per Rack Type Routing per Subrack per Rack LINE FD-SP to MDF 8 (or 9) 8 (or 9) 8 (or 9) (96-pair) POTS FD-SP to MDF 8 (or 9) 8 (or 9) 8 (or 9) (96-pair) 12.4 Connection/Locking The cables are plugged into the connectors on the splitter boards and are locked in place with baillocks. “KH”: 60 m.line 24 Orange Line 25 .11.Line Number Distribution Connector Bundle Line Number on Connector Connector A Blue Line 01 . for example. “HL”: 25 m. Refer to “MDF Cable Length”. “HA”: 20 m. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 289 . The 24-pair cables are color coded. Note 2 — Refer to Appendix 16. refer to Table 37. refer to section “Handling Baillocks”. and so on.4 for the wiring list of the CHAMP100 connectors.line 48 Connector B Green Line 01 .line 48 12.line 24 Brown Line 25 . refer to Figure 177.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling The cable code is 3FE 29387 xx. Note — For more information on locking and unlocking baillocks.11. Note 1 — “xx” defines the cable length.3 Number of MDF Cables Table 38 gives the required number of MDF cables. Table 37 24-pair Bundle .

11. • Tie-wraps (5 mm x 190 mm) for tying up and/or bundling cables • Lacing cord for tying up and/or bundling cables.5 Cabling Diagram Figure 218 shows the cabling diagram for installing the MDF cables in an FD splitter subrack (only POTS cables are shown. Figure 218 Installing MDF Cables in FD splitter Subrack O O G B G B B r B r r r r r l a l a e o e o u n u n e w e w e g e g n n n n e e POTS 01 POTS 02 POTS 03 POTS 04 POTS 05 POTS 06 POTS 07 POTS 08 POTS 09 POTS 10 POTS 11 POTS 12 POTS 13 POTS 14 POTS 15 POTS 16 LINE 01 LINE 02 LINE 03 LINE 04 LINE 05 LINE 06 LINE 07 LINE 08 LINE 09 LINE 10 LINE 11 LINE 12 LINE 13 LINE 14 LINE 15 LINE 16 12.11. cabling for LINE cables is similar). 290 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .6 Parts List Required parts are: • 16 MDF cables (96-pair): 8 for POTS and 8 for LINE.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 12.

Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 291 . 2 Label eight cables for LINE and eight cables for POTS.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Procedure 52 POTS and LINE Cabling in Rack with FD Splitter Subrack 1 Prepare sixteen 96-pair MDF cables for FD splitter subrack: eight for POTS and eight for LINE. Refer to Figure 218 and to Table 39 to apply the correct label.

MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Table 39 Overview MDF Cabling for 7302 FD-Combo Subrack Routing 96-pair Cable Splitter board Bundle Cable Label Color Pair Numbers Left POTS 01 SP 01 Blue POTS 01-24 Orange POTS 25-48 SP 02 Green POTS 48-72 Brown POTS 73-96 POTS 02 SP 03 Blue POTS 97-120 Orange POTS 121-144 SP 04 Green POTS 145-168 Brown POTS 169-192 POTS 03 SP 05 Green POTS 193-216 Brown POTS 217-240 SP 06 Blue POTS 241-264 Orange POTS 265-288 POTS 04 SP 07 Green POTS 289-312 Brown POTS 313-336 SP 08 Blue POTS 337-360 Orange POTS 361-384 LINE 01 SP 01 Blue LINE 01-24 Orange LINE 25-48 SP 02 Green LINE 48-72 Brown LINE 73-96 LINE 02 SP 03 Blue LINE 97-120 Orange LINE 121-144 SP 04 Green LINE 145-168 Brown LINE 169-192 LINE 03 SP 05 Green LINE 193-216 Brown LINE 217-240 SP 06 Blue LINE 241-264 Orange LINE 265-288 LINE 04 SP 07 Green LINE 289-312 Brown LINE 313-336 SP 08 Blue LINE 337-360 Orange LINE 361-384 (1 of 2) 292 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Routing 96-pair Cable Splitter board Bundle Cable Label Color Pair Numbers Right POTS 05 SP 09 Green POTS 385-408 Brown POTS 409-432 SP 10 Blue POTS 433-456 Orange POTS 457-480 POTS 06 SP 11 Green POTS 481-504 Brown POTS 505-528 SP 12 Blue POTS 529-552 Orange POTS 553-576 POTS 07 SP 13 Green POTS 577-600 Brown POTS 601-624 SP 14 Blue POTS 625-648 Orange POTS 649-672 POTS 08 SP 15 Green POTS 673-696 Brown POTS 697-720 SP 16 Blue POTS 721-744 Orange POTS 745-768 LINE 05 SP 09 Green LINE 385-408 Brown LINE 409-432 SP 10 Blue LINE 433-456 Orange LINE 457-480 LINE 06 SP 11 Green LINE 481-504 Brown LINE 505-528 SP 12 Blue LINE 529-552 Orange LINE 553-576 LINE 07 SP 13 Green LINE 577-600 Brown LINE 601-624 SP 14 Blue LINE 625-648 Orange LINE 649-672 LINE 08 SP 15 Green LINE 673-696 Brown LINE 697-720 SP 16 Blue LINE 721-744 Orange LINE 745-768 (2 of 2) Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 293 .

i Run the four 96-pair cables from the overhead guide down (overhead cabling) or from the raised floor up (raised floor cabling) via the left side cable area of the rack to the FD splitter subrack. POTS 02. i Run the two 96-pair cables from the overhead guide down (overhead cabling) or from the raised floor up (raised floor cabling) via the left side cable area of the rack to the FD splitter subrack. 294 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . POTS 03 and POTS 04. ii Enter the four 96-pair cables via the left rack hole. LINE 02. LINE 03 and LINE 04. Refer to Table 39 and Figure 218. 4 Install the four 96-pair cables for LINE for the left part: LINE 01.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 3 Install the four 96-pair MDF cables for POTS for the left part: POTS 01. Refer to Table 39 and Figure 218. 5 Properly arrange the eight 96-pair cables and tie up the cables with tie wraps at regular distances and use the rack cable supports to attach cable bundles. ii Enter the four 96-pair cables via the left rack hole. iii Connect each cable to the LINE connector on the appropriate splitter board: • Cable LINE 01 (short) to the LINE connector of splitter board SP01 • Cable LINE 01 (long) to the LINE connector of splitter board SP02 • Cable LINE 02 (short) to the LINE connector of splitter board SP03 • Cable LINE 02 (long) to the LINE connector of splitter board SP04 • Cable LINE 03 (short) to the LINE connector of splitter board SP05 • Cable LINE 03 (long) to the LINE connector of splitter board SP06 • Cable LINE 04 (short) to the LINE connector of splitter board SP07 • Cable LINE 04 (long) to the LINE connector of splitter board SP08 iv Secure the connectors with baillocks. iii Connect each cable to the POTS connector on the appropriate splitter board: • Cable POTS 01 (short) to the POTS connector of splitter board SP01 • Cable POTS 01 (long) to the POTS connector of splitter board SP02 • Cable POTS 02 (short) to the POTS connector of splitter board SP03 • Cable POTS 02 (long) to the POTS connector of splitter board SP04 • Cable POTS 03 (short) to the POTS connector of splitter board SP05 • Cable POTS 03 (long) to the POTS connector of splitter board SP06 • Cable POTS 04 (short) to the POTS connector of splitter board SP07 • Cable POTS 04 (long) to the POTS connector of splitter board SP08 iv Secure the connectors with baillocks.

ii Enter the four 96-pair cables via the right rack hole. 7 Install the four 96-pair cables for LINE for the right part: LINE 01. iii Connect each cable to the POTS connector on the appropriate splitter board: • Cable POTS 05 (long) to the POTS connector of splitter board SP09 • Cable POTS 05 (short) to the POTS connector of splitter board SP10 • Cable POTS 06 (long) to the POTS connector of splitter board SP11 • Cable POTS 06 (short) to the POTS connector of splitter board SP12 • Cable POTS 07 (long) to the POTS connector of splitter board SP13 • Cable POTS 07 (short) to the POTS connector of splitter board SP14 • Cable POTS 08 (long) to the POTS connector of splitter board SP15 • Cable POTS 08 (short) to the POTS connector of splitter board SP16 iv Secure the connectors with baillocks. LINE 02. 8 Properly arrange the eight 96-pair cables and tie up the cables with tie wraps at regular distances and use the rack cable supports to attach cable bundles. i Run the two 96-pair cables from the overhead guide down (overhead cabling) or from the raised floor up (raised floor cabling) via the right side cable area of the rack to the FD splitter subrack. ii Enter the four 96-pair cables via the right rack hole. POTS 03 and POTS 04.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling 6 Install the four 96-pair MDF cables for POTS for the right part: POTS 01. Refer to Table 39 and Figure 218. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 295 . POTS 02. iii Connect each cable to the LINE connector on the appropriate splitter board: • Cable LINE 05 (long) to the LINE connector of splitter board SP09 • Cable LINE 05 (short) to the LINE connector of splitter board SP10 • Cable LINE 06 (long) to the LINE connector of splitter board SP11 • Cable LINE 06 (short) to the LINE connector of splitter board SP12 • Cable LINE 07 (long) to the LINE connector of splitter board SP13 • Cable LINE 07 (short) to the LINE connector of splitter board SP14 • Cable LINE 08 (long) to the LINE connector of splitter board SP15 • Cable LINE 08 (short) to the LINE connector of splitter board SP16 iv Secure the connectors with baillocks. Refer to Table 39 and Figure 218. LINE 03 and LINE 04. i Run the four 96-pair cables from the overhead guide down (overhead cabling) or from the raised floor up (raised floor cabling) via the right side cable area of the rack to the FD splitter subrack.

72 LINE 1 .12 POTS and LINE Cabling in Rack with FD Splitter Subrack and 7302 FD-LT Subrack (72- line) This section describes the MDF cabling procedure for a rack with an FD splitter subrack and a 7302 FD-LT subrack (72-line).MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 9 Route the MDF cables (eight for one. 12. sixteen in case of two subracks) to the MDF. 12. Follow the procedures prescribed by local practices. 10 At the MDF. each slot can house one FD splitter board supporting 72 xDSL subscriber lines (Figure 219).72 POTS LINE xDSL 296 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .12. Figure 219 MDF Connectors on FD Splitter Board POTS 1. Refer to the MDF cabling guidelines. Refer to the MDF cabling guidelines. connect POTS and LINE cable pairs as prescribed by local practices.1 72-line FD Splitter Boards The FD splitter subrack has 16 (or 18) AP slots in its splitter area.

and so on. “KH”: 60 m. “HA”: 20 m. Note 2 — Refer to Appendix 16.7 for the pin mapping of the Metral-HDXS-72 connector. “HL”: 25 m. Figure 220 C 72-pair MDF Cable C B- B- A- A- -F -F F- F- F- F- -1 -0 12 01 12 01 2 1 01 12 12 01 1 2 -0 -1 A- A- A- A- -A -A A- B- A- B- C C BUNDLE C BUNDLE B BUNDLE A GREEN ORANGE BLUE L The cable code is 3FE 60227 xx. refer to Figure 220.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling 12.3 Number of MDF Cables Table 40 gives the required number of MDF cables.12. Note 1 — “xx” defines the cable length.12. Refer to “MDF Cable Length”. Table 40 Overview 72-line MDF Cables for Rack with one FD-SP and one FD-LT Subrack MDF Cables Number of 72-pair Cables Total Number of MDF Cables per Rack Type Routing per Subrack per Rack LINE FD-SP to MDF 16 (or 18) 16 (or 18) 8 (or 9) (96-pair) POTS FD-SP to MDF 16 (or 18) 16 (or 18) 8 (or 9) (96-pair) Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 297 . 12.2 Cable Type The required cable is an MDF cable with 3 bundles of 24-pair cables and a Metral-HDXS-72 connector. for example.

5 is required.6 Cabling Diagram Figure 222 shows the cabling diagram for installing the MDF cables in an FD splitter subrack (only POTS cables are shown.12. cabling for LINE cables is similar).t.8 Nm and maximum 1 Nm.4 Connection/Locking The cables are plugged into the connectors on the splitter boards and are secured with screws.5 Recommended Tools To secure the connectors on the boards. the screw.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 12. a screwdriver with ball hex tip M2. The cable connectors have to be fixed with a torque of minimum 0. Figure 221 Screwdriver with Ball Hex Tip 12. 298 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .r. This type of screwdriver permits to work in an angle w.12. 12.12.

Refer to Figure 222 for the position of the connectors on the splitter boards and to Table 41 to define the labels.7 Parts List Required parts are: • 16 MDF cables 3FE 60227 xx (72-pair): 8 for POTS and 8 for LINE. Procedure 53 POTS and LINE Cabling in Rack with FD Splitter Subrack (72-line) 1 Prepare 32 72-pair MDF cables for FD splitter subrack: sixteen for POTS and sixteen for LINE.12. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 299 .HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Figure 222 Installing MDF Cables in FD splitter Subrack POTS 01 POTS 02 POTS 03 POTS 04 POTS 05 POTS 06 POTS 07 POTS 08 POTS 09 POTS 10 POTS 11 POTS 12 POTS 13 POTS 14 POTS 15 POTS 16 LINE 01 LINE 02 LINE 03 LINE 04 LINE 05 LINE 06 LINE 07 LINE 08 LINE 09 LINE 10 LINE 11 LINE 12 LINE 13 LINE 14 LINE 15 LINE 16 12. 2 Label the cables for the first subrack. • Tie-wraps (5 mm x 190 mm) for tying up and/or bundling cables • Lacing cord for tying up and/or bundling cables.

MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Table 41 Overview 72-line MDF Cabling for 7302 FD-Combo Subrack Routing Signal 72-pair Cable Splitter board Cable Label Pair Numbers Left POTS POTS 01 SP 01 POTS 01-72 POTS 02 SP 02 POTS 73-144 POTS 03 SP 03 POTS 145-216 POTS 04 SP 04 POTS 217-288 POTS 05 SP 05 POTS 289-360 POTS 06 SP 06 POTS 361-432 POTS 07 SP 07 POTS 433-504 POTS 08 SP 08 POTS 505-576 LINE LINE 01 SP 01 LINE 01-72 LINE 02 SP 02 LINE 73-144 LINE 03 SP 03 LINE 145-216 LINE 04 SP 04 LINE 217-288 LINE 05 SP 05 LINE 289-360 LINE 06 SP 06 LINE 361-432 LINE 07 SP 07 LINE 433-504 LINE 08 SP 08 LINE 505-576 Right POTS POTS 09 SP 09 POTS 577-648 POTS 10 SP 10 POTS 649-720 POTS 11 SP 11 POTS 721-792 POTS 12 SP 12 POTS 793-864 POTS 13 SP 13 POTS 865-936 POTS 14 SP 14 POTS 937-1008 POTS 15 SP 15 POTS 1009-1080 POTS 16 SP 16 POTS 1081-1152 LINE 09 SP 09 LINE 577-648 LINE LINE 10 SP 10 LINE 649-720 LINE 11 SP 11 LINE 721-792 LINE 12 SP 12 LINE 793-864 LINE 13 SP 13 LINE 865-936 LINE 14 SP 14 LINE 937-1008 LINE 15 SP 15 LINE 1009-1080 LINE 16 SP 16 LINE 1081-1152 300 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

. LINE 02. POTS 02. cable number. LINE 04. Refer to Table 41. POTS 03. ii Connect each cable connector to the POTS connector on the appropriate splitter board and secure with the screws: • Cable POTS 01 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP01 • Cable POTS 02 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP02 • Cable POTS 03 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP03 • Cable POTS 04 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP04 • Cable POTS 05 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP05 • Cable POTS 06 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP06 • Cable POTS 07 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP07 • Cable POTS 08 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP08 4 Install the eight 72-pair cables for LINE for the left part: LINE 01.. POTS 05. block number. POTS 07 and POTS 08. 3 Install the eight 72-pair MDF cables for POTS for the left part: POTS 01. i Run the eight 72-pair cables from the overhead guide down (overhead cabling) or from the raised floor up (raised floor cabling) via the left side cable area of the rack to the upper subrack. i Run the eight 72-pair cables from the overhead guide down (overhead cabling) or from the raised floor up (raised floor cabling) via the left side cable area of the rack to the upper subrack. LINE 03. ii Connect each cable connector to the LINE connector on the appropriate splitter board and secure with the screws: • Cable LINE 01 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP01 • Cable LINE 02 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP02 • Cable LINE 03 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP03 • Cable LINE 04 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP04 • Cable LINE 05 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP05 • Cable LINE 06 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP06 • Cable LINE 07 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP07 • Cable LINE 08 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP08 iii Fix each cable bundle from the LINE connector to the cable bundle of the corresponding POTS connector with a tie-wrap.. Refer to Table 41.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Besides pair numbering. LINE 06 LINE 07 and LINE 08. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 301 . LINE 05. the labels can also contain information about connection at the local MDF (MDF style. POTS 04.). POTS 06. refer to Figure 223.

ii Connect each cable connector to the POTS connector on the appropriate splitter board and secure with the screws: • Cable POTS 09 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP09 • Cable POTS 10 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP10 • Cable POTS 11 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP11 • Cable POTS 12 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP12 • Cable POTS 13 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP13 • Cable POTS 14 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP14 • Cable POTS 15 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP15 • Cable POTS 16 to the POTS connector of splitter board SP16 302 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . POTS 10. POTS 13. POTS 15 and POTS 16. 6 Install the eight 72-pair MDF cables for POTS for the right part: POTS 09. i Run the eight 72-pair cables from the overhead guide down (overhead cabling) or from the raised floor up (raised floor cabling) via the left side cable area of the rack to the upper subrack. POTS 12. then the insertion or extraction of an adjacent board could result in damage to the cables. If this should be the case.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 223 Add an extra tie-wrap per slot Extra tie-wrap Note — This must be done to avoid that the cables bend outside the slot width. POTS 11. Refer to Table 41. POTS 14. 5 Properly arrange the 72-pair cables in the cabling area and route them to the top rack entry (overhead routing) or under the raised floor (raised floor routing). Tie up the cables with tie wraps at regular distances and use the rack cable supports to attach cable bundles.

then the insertion or extraction of an adjacent board could result in damage to the cables. connect POTS and LINE cable pairs as prescribed by local practices. LINE 03. LINE 04. Follow the procedures prescribed by local practices. Refer to the MDF cabling guidelines. 8 Properly arrange the 72-pair cables in the cabling area and route them to the top rack entry (overhead routing) or under the raised floor (raised floor routing).HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling 7 Install the eight 72-pair cables for LINE for the left part: LINE 01. If this should be the case. LINE 02. Refer to the MDF cabling guidelines. 10 At the MDF. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 303 . Refer to Table 41. LINE 06 LINE 07 and LINE 08. 9 Route the MDF cables to the MDF. Note — This must be done to avoid that the cables bend outside the slot width. 12. Tie up the cables with tie wraps at regular distances and use the rack cable supports to attach cable bundles. ii Connect each cable connector to the LINE connector on the appropriate splitter board and secure with the screws: • Cable LINE 09 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP09 • Cable LINE 10 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP10 • Cable LINE 11 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP11 • Cable LINE 12 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP12 • Cable LINE 13 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP13 • Cable LINE 14 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP14 • Cable LINE 15 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP15 • Cable LINE 16 to the LINE connector of splitter board SP16 iii Fix each cable bundle from the LINE connector to the cable bundle of the corresponding POTS connector with a tie-wrap. Figure 224 shows an example. i Run the eight 72-pair cables from the overhead guide down (overhead cabling) or from the raised floor up (raised floor cabling) via the left side cable area of the rack to the upper subrack. refer to Figure 223.13 MDF Cabling in Rack with 7302 FD-LT Subrack (72-line) This section describes the cabling procedure for the cabling between the (72-line) LT boards in a 7302 FD-LT subrack and the MDF. LINE 05.

refer to Figure 225.1 Cable Type The required cable is an MDF cable with 3 bundles of 24-pair cables and a Metral-HDXS-72 connector (cable code is 3FE 60227 xx).13. 304 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 224 MDF Cabling (72-line) in Rack with 7302 FD-LT Subrack 12.

12. 16 cables are required. Figure 226 7302 FD-LT Subrack with 16 LT Boards NTIO NT B LT02 LT03 LT04 LT05 LT06 LT07 LT08 LT09 LT10 LT11 LT12 LT13 LT14 LT15 LT16 NTA LT01 For a subrack equipped with 18 LT boards (refer to Figure 227). 18 cables are required. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 305 .13.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Figure 225 72-pair MDF Cable C C B- B- A- A- -F -F F F F F -1 -0 -1 -0 -1 -0 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 12 12 01 1 2 0 -0 -1 A- A- A- A- -A -A A- B- A- B- C C BUNDLE C BUNDLE B BUNDLE A GREEN ORANGE BLUE L Note — Refer to Appendix 16.7 for the wiring list of the 72-line connectors.2 Number of MDF Cables For a subrack equipped with 16 LT boards (refer to Figure 226).

Figure 228 Screwdriver with Ball Hex Tip 12. The cable connectors have to be fixed with a fixing torque of min 0. the screw.13. 306 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 227 7302 FD-LT Subrack with 18 LT Boards LT02 LT03 LT04 LT05 LT06 LT07 LT08 LT17 LT18 LT09 LT10 LT11 LT12 LT13 LT14 LT15 LT16 NTA LT01 12.8 Nm and max 1 Nm.3 Recommended Tools To secure the connectors on the passive splitter boards.t.r.4 Cabling Diagram Figure 229 shows the cabling diagram for installing the MDF cables (72-pair) in a 7302 FD-LT subrack (configuration with 8 LT boards is shown).13. a screwdriver with ball hex tip M2. This type of screwdriver permits to work in an angle w.5 is required.

5 Parts List Required parts are: • Sixteen (or eighteen) 72-pair MDF cables 3FE 60227 xx per equipped 7302 FD- LT subrack. connect the connector of the cable to the connector on the LT board. 2 For each cable. Procedure 54 MDF Cabling in 7302 FD-LT Subrack with 72-line LT Boards 1 Prepare the MDF cables for the 7302 FD-LT subracks.13. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 307 .HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Figure 229 Installing MDF Cables in 7302 FD-LT Subrack LINE 01 LINE 02 LINE 03 LINE 04 LINE 05 LINE 06 LINE 07 LINE 08 LINE 09 LINE 10 LINE 11 LINE 12 LINE 13 LINE 14 LINE 15 LINE 16 12. sixteen (or eighteen) cables per installed subrack. refer to Figure 229.

the internal cable to connect the POTS interface on the FD splitter board and the interface on the POTS LT boards is called the U-cable (3FE 29916 AL).5 for the wiring list of the 48-line intra-rack cable. Figure 230 Cable 3FE 29916 AL Front view Front view Connector B Connector A L Note — Refer to Appendix 16.14.1 48-line POTS LT boards and 48-line FD Splitter boards In the configuration with POTS LT boards and FD splitter boards in the same FD-Combo subrack.14 Intra.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 12. 308 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . This cable consists of two individual 24-pair cables connecting two CHAMP100 connectors. refer to Figure 230. Figure 231 shows the cable routing.and Inter-Shelf Cabling for Subracks equipped with POTS and ISDN LT Boards This section describes the MDF cables to be used for subracks equipped with: • 48-line POTS LT boards and 48-line FD Splitter boards • 24-line ISDN BA LT boards and 48-line FD splitter boards • 48-line POTS LT boards and 72-line FD splitter boards • 48-line POTS LT boards and 96-line FD splitter boards • 72-line POTS LT boards and 72-line FD splitter boards • 72-line POTS LT boards and 48-line FD splitter boards • 72-line Combined POTS/Splitter LT boards 12.

then cable 3FE 61183 xx has to be used. “X1” are the first 24 lines (L1-L24) and “X2” are the next 24 lines (L25-L48). This cable can be used either for cabling between different shelves via the side rack cable area or for cabling of adjacent boards in the same shelf.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Figure 231 Cable routing for 3FE 29916 AL SPLITTER SPLITTER SPLITTER SPLITTER SPLITTER POTS LT POTS LT POTS LT POTS LT POTS LT DSL LT DSL LT DSL LT DSL LT DSL LT 12. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 309 . The cable is labeled with “X3” at the 48-line splitter side. The CHAMP100 connector for the splitter board has 48 lines equipped and the two CHAMP100 connectors for the NBAT LT boards have only 24 lines equipped. The cable consists of two individual 24-pair cables connecting three CHAMP100 connectors.2 24-line ISDN BA LT boards and 48-line FD splitter boards If a 48-line splitter board has to be connected with two 24-line NBAT LT boards.14. refer to Figure 232.

“HL”: 25 m. for example. where the upper subrack is an FD splitter subrack (3FE 29623 AA) equipped with 48-line splitter boards and the bottom subrack is a FD-LT subrack (3FE 29685 AB) equipped with ISDN LT boards. refer to Figure 235. Note 2 — Refer to Appendix 16.8 for the pin mapping of the connectors. The following figures show the cable routing for different rack configurations: • Cable 3FE 61183 CC must be used in rack configurations using three subracks. refer to Figure 234. where the upper subrack is an FD splitter subrack (3FE 29623 AA) equipped with 48-line splitter boards and the bottom subrack is a FD-LT subrack (3FE 29685 AA) equipped with ISDN LT boards. “HA”: 20 m. refer to Figure 233. Refer to “MDF Cable Length”.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 232 Cable 3FE 61183 xx Connector X3 Connector X1-X2 Front view Front view L X1 X1 X3 X3 X2 X2 Note 1 — “xx” defines the cable length. • Cable 3FE 61183 AL must be used in rack configurations equipped with FD- Combo subracks. • Cable 3FE 61183 BJ must be used in rack configurations using two subracks. and so on. “KH”: 60 m. 310 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . where two 24-line LT boards are equipped for each 48-line splitter board.

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Figure 233 Position 3FE 61183 CC Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 311 .

MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 234 Position 3FE 61183 BJ Figure 235 Position 3FE 61183 AL 312 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

Connector A is connected to the POTS board and connectors B and C are connected to the splitter board (connector B is the first 24 lines (L1-L24) and connector C is the next 24 lines (L25-L48). These cables can be used either for cabling between different subracks via the side rack cable area or for cabling of boards in the same subrack. One cable consists of two individual 24-pair cables connecting a CHAMP100 connector (connector A) with two Metral-HDXS-24 cable connectors (connector B and connector C). “HL”: 25 m. Refer to “MDF Cable Length”.14. “KH”: 60 m. Figure 236 Cable 3FE 60320 xx View X View Y L 38 Direction X Direction Y Tie-wrap Connector A Connector B Connector C Note 1 — “xx” defines the cable length. “HA”: 20 m. for example.3 48-line POTS LT boards and 72-line FD splitter boards If three 48-line POTS boards have to be connected with two 72-line splitter boards then the cables 3FE 60320 xx can be used (refer to Figure 236). where the upper subrack is an FD splitter subrack (3FE 29623 AA) equipped with 72-line splitter boards and the bottom subrack is a FD-LT subrack (3FE 29685 Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 313 . The following figures show the cable routing for different rack configurations: • Cable 3FE 60320 CC must be used in rack configurations using three subracks. Note 2 — Refer to Appendix 16.9 for the pin mapping of the connectors.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling 12. and so on.

Note — The following applies for both configurations: To fix the connectors B2 and C2 on the appropriate positions as shown in Figure 237 and Figure 238. refer to Figure 237. • Cable 3FE 60320 AP must be used in an FD-Combo subrack equipped with 72-line splitter boards and 48-line POTS LT boards. refer to Figure 238. Figure 237 Position 3FE 60320 CC FD splitter subrack equipped with 72-line splitter boards B1 C2 C1 B3 B2 C3 3x 3FE 60320 CCAA A1 A2 A3 FD LT subrack equipped with 48-line POTS LT boards 314 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL AA) equipped with 48-line POTS LT boards. the tie-wrap of the second cable assembly must be removed.

1 Intra-subrack Up-up Cable In the configuration with POTS LT and FD splitter boards in the same FD subrack. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 315 .HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Figure 238 Position 3FE 60320 AP 3x 3FE 60320 AP B1 C2 A1 A2 A3 C1 B3 B2 C3 12. These cables can be used either for cabling between different subracks via the side rack cable area or for cabling of boards in the same subrack.14. One cable consists of two individual 24-pair cables connecting a CHAMP100 connector (connector A) with two Metral-HDXS-24 cable connectors (connector B and connector C). the internal cable to connect the POTS interface in the splitter board and the interface in POTS LT boards is called the U-cable (3FE 60320 AV). Connector A is connected to the POTS board and connectors B and C are connected to the splitter board (connector B is the first 24 lines (L1-L24) and connector C is the next 24 lines (L25-L48). refer to Figure 239.4.4 48-line POTS LT boards and 96-line FD splitter boards If two 48-line POTS boards have to be connected with a 96-line splitter boards then the following cables can be used. 12.14.

9 for the pin mapping of the connectors. Figure 240 shows the cable routing.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 239 Cable 3FE 60320 AV View X View Y L 38 Direction X Direction Y Tie-wrap Connector A Connector B Connector C Note — Refer to Appendix 16. 316 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 317 . the internal ADSL cable to be used is called the S-cable (3FE 60321 AA).14.2 Intra-Shelf Up-down Cable In a sandwich configuration with FD LT and FD splitter boards in the same FD subrack.4.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Figure 240 Position 3FE 60320 AV 12. refer to Figure 241.

Figure 242 shows the cable routing.9 for the pin mapping of the connectors.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 241 Cable 3FE 60321 AA View X View Y L = 250 mm L = 210 mm Direction X Direction Y Connector B Connector C Connector A Note — Refer to Appendix 16. Figure 242 Position 3FE 60321 AA 318 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

this cable is called I-cable: • Cable 3FE 60322 AA must be used in the SI rack.4.9 for the pin mapping of the connectors.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling 12.3 Intra-Rack Up-down Cable 3FE 60322 xx This type of cable can be used if POTS LT and FD splitter boards of different subracks in the same rack have to be connected from the front of subracks in the UP direction and DOWN direction for boards. refer to Figure 243 • Cable 3FE 60322 BA must be used in the universal rack.14. Figure 243 Cable 3FE 60322 AA View Y View Z L = 270 mm L = 230 mm Direction Z Direction Y Connector B Connector A Connector C Figure 244 Cable 3FE 60322 BA View Y View Z L = 305 mm L = 265 mm Direction Z Direction Y Connector B Connector A Connector C Note — Refer to Appendix 16. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 319 . refer to Figure 244.

4. Figure 245 Position 3FE 60322 xx 12. 320 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . refer to Figure 246.14.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 245 shows the cable routing (valid for both cables).4 Intra-Rack Up-down Cable 3FE 60323 xx This type of cable can be used if POTS LT and FD splitter boards of different subracks in the same rack have to be connected via the side rack cable area with the cable routing in the UP direction and DOWN direction for both boards.

for example.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Figure 246 Cable 3FE 60323 xx View Y View Z Direction Z Direction Y L Connector B Connector A Connector C Note 1 — “xx” defines the cable length. “HA”: 20 m. and so on.9 for the pin mapping of the connectors. Refer to “MDF Cable Length”. Figure 247 shows the cable routing (valid for both cables). “HL”: 25 m. Note 2 — Refer to Appendix 16. “KH”: 60 m. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 321 .

These cables can be used either for cabling between different subracks via the side rack cable area or for cabling of boards in the same subrack. 322 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .14. The required MDF cable consists of three individual 24-pair cables and two Metral-HDXS-72 cable connectors.5 72-line POTS LT boards and 72-line FD splitter boards If 72-line POTS boards have to be connected with 72-line splitter boards then the cables 3FE 60836 xx can be used (refer to Figure 248).MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 247 Position 3FE 60323 xx 12.

refer to Figure 249.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Figure 248 Intra-rack Cable 3FE 60836 xx 1 2 01 B. refer to Figure 250. where the upper subrack is an FD splitter subrack (3FE 29623 AA) equipped with 72-line splitter boards and the bottom subrack is a FD-LT subrack (3FE 29685 AA) equipped with 72-line POTS LT boards. “KH”: 60 m.1 B- A.2 B- C 2 C -1 -0 0 -F -F A- A- A- A- F- F- F- F- -A -A -0 -1 01 1 01 1 B- A- C C 1 2 BUNDLE A BUNDLE B BUNDLE C L Connector Y Connector X Note 1 — “xx” defines the cable length. and so on. “HL”: 25 m. • Cable 3FE 60320 AP must be used in an FD-Combo subrack equipped with 72-line splitter boards and 72-line POTS LT boards. for example. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 323 .1 12 01 A- A- B.1 12 A. “HA”: 20 m. The following figures show the cable routing for different rack configurations: • Cable 3FE 60836 CC must be used in rack configurations using three subracks. Refer to “MDF Cable Length”.1 A- -0 -1 1 1 -F -F A- A- A- A- F- F- F- F- -A -A -1 -0 A- A- B- 12 0 12 01 C 2 2 B.2 01 C 2 C C B. Note 2 — Refer to Appendix 16.7 for the pin mapping of the Metral-HDXS-72 connector.

MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 249 Position 3FE 60836 CC FD splitter subrack equipped with 72-line splitter boards 3FE 60836 CC FD LT subrack equipped with 72-line POTS LT boards 324 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

These cables can be used either for cabling between different subracks via the side rack cable area or for cabling of boards in the same subrack. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 325 . One cable consists of two individual 24-pair cables connecting a CHAMP100 connector (connector A) with two Metral-HDXS-24 cable connectors (connector B and connector C).HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Figure 250 Position 3FE 60836 AL 3FE 60836 AL 72-line POTS LT 72-line POTS LT 72-line POTS LT 72-line POTS LT 72-line POTS LT 12. Connector A is connected to the splitter board and connectors B and C are connected to the POTS board (connector B is the first 24 lines (L1-L24) and connector C is the next 24 lines (L25-L48).6 72-line POTS LT boards and 48-line FD splitter boards If two 72-line POTS boards have to be connected with three 48-line splitter boards then the cables 3FE 60320 xx can be used (refer to Figure 251).14.

refer to Figure 253. the tie-wrap of the second cable assembly must be removed.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 251 Cable 3FE 60320 xx View X View Y L 38 Direction X Direction Y Tie-wrap Connector A Connector B Connector C Note 1 — “xx” defines the cable length. where the upper subrack is an FD splitter subrack (3FE 29623 AA) equipped with 48-line splitter boards and the bottom subrack is a FD-LT subrack (3FE 29685 AA) equipped with 72-line POTS LT boards. “HA”: 20 m. “KH”: 60 m. refer to Figure 252. and so on.9 for the pin mapping of the connectors. “HL”: 25 m. Refer to “MDF Cable Length”. The following figures show the cable routing for different rack configurations: • Cable 3FE 60320 BL must be used in rack configurations using three subracks. Note 2 — Refer to Appendix 16. • Cable 3FE 60320 AL must be used in an FD-Combo subrack equipped with 48-line splitter boards and 72-line POTS LT boards. Note — The following applies for both configurations: To fix the connectors B2 and C2 on the appropriate positions as shown in Figure 237 and Figure 238. 326 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . for example.

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Figure 252 Position 3FE 60320 BL FD splitter subrack equipped with 48-line splitter boards A1 A2 A3 3x 3FE 60320 BLAA B1 C2 C1 B3 B2 C3 FD LT subrack equipped with 72-line POTS LT boards Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 327 .

• MDF cable 3FE 60227 XX: The required cable is an MDF cable with three bundles of 24-pair cables and a Metral-HDXS-72 connector. refer to Figure 254.1 Cables The following cables have to be used: • S-cable 3FE 67369 AA: The required MDF cable consists of three individual 24-pair cables and two Metral-HDXS-72 cable connectors. these always have to be deployed in combination with a 72-line xDSL board.14. Total length between the connectors on this cable is 19. 328 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .8 mm.7 72-line Combined POTS/Splitter LT boards If 72-line combined POTS/splitter LT boards are used.14.7. refer to Figure 255.MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 253 Position 3FE 60320 AL 3x 3FE 60320 AL B1 C2 A1 A2 A3 C1 B3 B2 C3 12. 12.

Note 2 — Refer to Appendix 16.8 mm Connector Y Connector X Figure 255 MDF Cable 3FE 60227 xx C C B- B- A- A- -F -F F- F- F- F- -1 -0 12 01 12 01 2 1 01 12 12 01 1 2 -0 -1 A- A- A- A- -A -A A- B- A- B- C C BUNDLE C BUNDLE B BUNDLE A GREEN ORANGE BLUE L Note 1 — “xx” defines the cable length. “KH”: 60 m. Refer to “MDF Cable Length”. “HL”: 25 m.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL MDF Cabling Figure 254 S-cable 3FE 67369 AA C C B- B- A- A- -F -F F F F F -1 -1 -0 -1 -0 -0 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 -1 -0 -1 -0 -1 -0 -F -F F F F F B- B- A- A- C C 2 1 2 1 2 1 -1 -0 1 0 1 0 A- A- A- A- -A -A B- B- A- A- C C C C B- B- A- A- -A -A A- A- A- A- -1 -0 1 0 1 0 2 1 2 1 2 1 227 mm 19. “HA”: 20 m. and so on. for example.7 for the pin mapping of the Metral-HDXS-72 connector. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 329 .

MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 12.7. refer to Figure 257 Figure 256 Cabling between LT board and combined POTS/splitter board 3FE 67369 AA 72-line POTS LT 72-line POTS LT 72-line POTS LT 72-line POTS LT 72-line POTS LT 72-line POTS LT 72-line POTS LT 72-line POTS LT 72-line xDSL LT 72-line xDSL LT 72-line xDSL LT 72-line xDSL LT 72-line xDSL LT 72-line xDSL LT 72-line xDSL LT 72-line xDSL LT 330 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .14. refer to Figure 256 • The MDF cable 3FE 60227 xx must be connected to the upper connector on the combined POTS/splitter board and then routed toward the top of the rack (either directly for the top subrack or via the rack uprights for lower subracks).2 Cable routing The cables have to be connected and routed as follows: • The S-cable 3FE 67369 AA must be connected between the 72-line LT board and the lower connector on the combined POTS/splitter board.

Issue: 09 72-line xDSL LT 72-line POTS LT 72-line xDSL LT Figure 257 72-line POTS LT 72-line xDSL LT HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 72-line POTS LT 72-line xDSL LT 72-line POTS LT 72-line xDSL LT 3FE 60227 xx 72-line POTS LT 72-line xDSL LT 72-line POTS LT 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 72-line xDSL LT 72-line POTS LT 72-line xDSL LT 72-line POTS LT Cabling between combined POTS/splitter board and MDF MDF Cabling 331 .

MDF Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 332 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

the NDLT-J) that carry two QSFP interfaces Thus also two different types of cabling procedures exist. multiple types of SLV capable LTs and VP server boards exist.3 for some examples.1 Introduction This chapter provides the procedures for cabling the System Level Vectoring (SLV) capable LT boards (in combination with a VP server board). please refer to the 7302 ISAM Product Information manual. the NDPS-C) with four Vectoring Links (VL) or • a VP server board (s.3 Cabling Procedures 13. • Depending on the capacity of the VP server board used in combination with the LT(s) we can also distinguish two types of VP server boards. the NDLT-G) that have one QSFP interface and • SLV LTs (s. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 333 .HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Vectoring Cabling 13 Vectoring Cabling 13.e.e. • SLV LTs (s. i.e. • a VP server board (s. • Two types of SLV capable LTs exist (related to their vectoring capacity).2 Equipment 13. one to cable the LTs with one QSFP interface and another one to cable the LTs with two QSFP interfaces. It is clear that multiple cabling options exist based on the combination of SLV LTs and VP(s).1 Introduction 13. i. Cabling this type of board means connecting it: • to the MDF via an MDF cable and • to its Vector Processing (VP) server board via (a) QSFP cable(s) Depending on their vectoring capacity.a. i.a. the NDPS-B) with eight Vectoring Links Note — For an overview of all supported SLV capable LTs and VP server boards on the 7302 ISAM in this release.a.a. i. see chapter 13.e.

Figure 258 shows a QSFP cable while Table 42 list the ordering codes for the two cable versions depending on the required cable length.Vectoring Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 13. Caution 2 — The QSFP cable connector needs to be carefully inserted to ensure the correct orientation.2 Equipment 13. length: 1 m 3FE 66564 AB QSFP cable. only do so by pulling the release strip. Figure 258 QSFP cable Release strip Release strip Caution 1 — When the QSFP cable needs to be disconnected.1 QSFP cable Connecting an SLV LT to its VP server board is to be done via one or more QSFP cables. Caution 3 — The front label of SLV LT board and VP board variants shows dedicated pictograms for correct connector orientation and cable extraction. length: 1.2. Do not pull on the cable or the connector itself.5 m 334 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . Table 42 QSFP Cable Variants Code Description 3FE 66564 AA QSFP cable.

SLV LT 4 Set2 . with the use of an additional NTIO.SLV LT 6 Set2 .SLV LT 8 Set1 . two complete sets of a VP board and two times eight serviced SLV LTs with one QSFP interface. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 335 .SLV LT 4 Set2 . via CLI-command configure equipment shelf) by the operator. the NDPS-B board can also be equipped in the NTIO and/or NTB slot thus allowing for two more (SLV) LTs to be equipped in the shelf. thus allowing a total of 18 LTs in the shelf.2 VP configuration modes The slot in which the VP server board.e. the NDPS-B (as all other LTs) can only be equipped in an LT slot. • in ‘NTB’ mode (mode=no-ntb-slot).a.SLV LT 2 Set2 . i. Note 1 — In ‘extended mode’ LTs can only be equipped in the NTIO and/or NT-B slots when no actual NTIO nor NTB is equipped.2.SLV LT 5 Set2 .SLV LT 1 Set1 .SLV LT 5 Set1 . thus allowing for one more (SLV) LT to be equipped in the shelf (17 LTs in total).SLV LT 1 Set1 .NDPS-B NTA The below Procedure55 on the other hand shows a cabling example for a configuration with one single NDPS-B and eight SLV LTs with one QSFP interface (in ‘standard mode’). s. any LT (so also the NDPS-B board) can also be equipped in the NTB slot while still using an NTIO board in the NTIO slot. • in ‘extended’ mode. • in ‘standard’ mode. the NDPS-B. It is recommended to put the first (Set1) NDPS-B in the NTIO slot and the second (Set2) NDPS-B in the NTB slot.e. i. So although there is practically no restriction on the manner in which the boards must be mounted. if desired.e.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Vectoring Cabling 13.SLV LT 6 Set2 . can be inserted will depend on the shelf mode that has been configured (b.SLV LT 3 Set1 . Figure 259 Recommended configuration of a full vectoring shelf Set1 . This configuration installs one vectoring group of up to 384 ports.SLV LT 2 Set1 .SLV LT 7 Set1 . in the 7302 ISAM shelf.SLV LT 8 Set2 . thus making it possible to operate the system in duplex mode and. Note 2 — In ‘extended mode’ it is possible to insert two more LTs.SLV LT 3 Set1 .SLV LT 7 Set2 .NDPS-B Set2 . the ‘extended’ mode configuration as shown in Figure 259 below is the recommended full vectoring configuration in case of SLV LTs with one QSFP interface (= two sets of a VP board and its eight serviced SLV LTs) of a 7302 ISAM shelf thus allowing two vectoring groups of each up to 384 ports (so a total of 768 ports) in the same 7302 shelf.

• Procedure 57 = Cabling a combination of SLV LTs (two with two QSFP interfaces and four with one QSFP interface) in combination with a VP server board with eight Vectoring Links in ‘standard mode’. depending on the necessary vectoring capacity and the type and number of available vectoring boards (and the need for other LTs still to be equipped in the setup).SLV LT 2 Set1 .SLV LT 8 Set1 . • Procedure 56 = Cabling a set of four SLV LTs with one QSFP interface in combination with a VP server board with four Vectoring Links in ‘standard mode’. Caution 1 — In order to prevent contamination of the internal components and to optimize EMI performance.NDPS-B NTIO NTA NTB 13. Two additional SLV line cards can then be installed in a second shelf thus allowing two vectoring groups of each up to 384 ports distributed over two different 7302 shelfs.e.SLV LT 5 Set2 . thus allowing two vectoring groups with a total of up to 672 ports in the same 7302 shelf.SLV LT 1 Set1 .SLV LT 6 Set1 .SLV LT 4 Set2 .. It should be clear that. i.. Caution 2 — When handling and installing the cable assemblies.SLV LT 3 Set2 .SLV LT 6 Set2 .3 Cabling Procedures This chapter contains three examples of possible cabling procedures.SLV LT 3 Set2 . 336 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . it is recommended that a Dust/EMI Cover be inserted into the cage assembly when no cable is connected.SLV LT 2 Set1 . make sure that the cable is not extensively bent (bending radius must be > 10 cm). • Procedure 55 = Cabling a set of eight SLV LTs with one QSFP interface in combination with a VP server board with eight Vectoring Links in ‘standard mode’.NDPS-B Set1 .Vectoring Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL A similar cabling procedure can be used to install a second NDPS-B board and up to six SLV line cards in the same shelf (see Figure 260).SLV LT 1 Set1 .SLV LT 7 Set2 . Figure 260 Recommended configuration of a full vectoring shelf Set1 .SLV LT 4 Set1 . multiple other cabling combinations are possible.SLV LT 5 Set2 .

the procedure is identical.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Vectoring Cabling Procedure 55 Connecting a VP board with eight VLs to eight SLV LT boards with one QSFP interface Nokia recommends to use the following cabling procedure in a configuration with eight SLV capable LT boards (with one QSFP interface) in combination with one VP board carrying eight VLs. the NDLT-F or NDLT-G boards. For other SLV capable LTs with one QSFP interface and no integrated splitter s. the NDLS-E board. Note — This procedure is shown for an SLV LT with integrated splitter s.a. 1 Connect the MDF cables to the LINE connectors on the SLV LT board(s).a. except for step 2 that is not required. Figure 261 Connect the MDF cables to the LINE connectors Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 337 .

Vectoring Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Note — Whether the MDF cables are connected together first as a separate step or one by one when connecting each of the boards. whatever is most convenient in the cabling environment. 2 Connect the MDF cables to the POTS connectors on the SLV LT boards (only for NDLS-E SLV LT boards). 338 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . Figure 262 Connect the MDF cables to the POTS connectors 3 Connect the first QSFP cable between QSFP port “VL1” on the VP board and the QSFP port on SLV LT board 1. is not relevant.

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Vectoring Cabling Figure 263 Connect the first QSFP cable 4 Connect the second QSFP cable between QSFP port “VL2” on the VP board and the QSFP port on SLV LT board 2. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 339 .

340 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .Vectoring Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 264 Connect the second QSFP cable 5 Connect the third QSFP cable between QSFP port “VL3” on the VP board and the QSFP port on SLV LT board 3.

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Vectoring Cabling Figure 265 Connect the third QSFP cable 6 Connect the fourth QSFP cable between QSFP port “VL4” on the VP board and the QSFP port on SLV LT board 4. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 341 .

Vectoring Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 266 Connect the fourth QSFP cable 7 Connect the QSFP cables to the other SLV LT boards in a similar manner: • fifth QSFP cable between QSFP port “VL5” on the VP board and the QSFP port on SLV LT board 5 • sixth QSFP cable between QSFP port “VL6” on the VP board and the QSFP port on SLV LT board 6 • seventh QSFP cable between QSFP port “VL7” on the VP board and the QSFP port on SLV LT board 7 • eighth QSFP cable between QSFP port “VL8” on the VP board and the QSFP port on SLV LT board 8 342 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Vectoring Cabling Figure 267 All QSFP cables connected Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 343 .

a. the NDLS-E board. Figure 268 Connect the MDF cables to the LINE connectors 344 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . 1 Connect the MDF cables to the LINE connectors on the SLV LT board(s).Vectoring Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Procedure 56 Connecting a VP board with four VLs to four SLV LT boards with one QSFP interface Nokia recommends to use the following cabling procedure in a configuration with four SLV capable LT boards (with one QSFP interface) in combination with one VP board with four VLs to the LTs. the NDLT-F and NDLT- G boards. For other SLV capable LTs with one QSFP interface that don’t have an integrated splitter s.a. except for step 2. Note — This procedure is shown for an SLV LT with integrated splitter s. the procedure is identical. This step is not required for these boards.

is not relevant.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Vectoring Cabling Note — Whether the MDF cables are connected together first as a separate step or one by one when connecting each of the boards. whatever is most convenient in the cabling environment. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 345 . Figure 269 Connect the MDF cables to the POTS connectors 3 Connect the first QSFP cable between QSFP port “VL1” on the VP board and the QSFP port on SLV LT board 1. 2 Connect the MDF cables to the POTS connectors on the SLV LT boards (only for NDLS-E SLV LT boards).

Vectoring Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 270 Connect the first QSFP cable 4 Connect the second QSFP cable between QSFP port “VL2” on the VP board and the QSFP port on SLV LT board 2. 346 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Vectoring Cabling Figure 271 Connect the second QSFP cable 5 Connect the third QSFP cable between QSFP port “VL3” on the VP board and the QSFP port on SLV LT board 3. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 347 .

Vectoring Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 272 Connect the third QSFP cable 6 Connect the fourth QSFP cable between QSFP port “VL4” on the VP board and the QSFP port on SLV LT board 4. 348 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Vectoring Cabling Figure 273 Connect the fourth QSFP cable Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 349 .

a. the NDLS-E. whatever is most convenient in the cabling environment. is not relevant. Note — Whether the MDF cables are connected together first as a separate step or one by one when connecting each of the boards. 350 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . the NDLT-G and NDLT-J boards. the procedure is identical except an additional action is required as part of step 2 to connect the POTS connectors (see Step 2 in Procedures 55 and 56). For other SLV capable LTs that do have an integrated splitter s.a. Note — The procedure as registered below is shown for SLV LTs without integrated splitter s. 1 Connect the MDF cables to the LINE connectors on the SLV LT board(s).Vectoring Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Procedure 57 Connecting a VP board with eight VLs to a combination of SLV LT boards Nokia recommends to use the following cabling procedure in a configuration with six SLV capable LT boards (two with two QSFP interfaces and four with one QSFP interface) in combination with one VP board with eight VLs to connect the LTs.

SLV LT board 1 is an SLV board with two QSFP interfaces (s.a. an NDLT-J board). see Figure 275. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 351 . see Figure 274. 3 Connect the second (bottom) QSFP interface (labeled “VL1”) on SLV LT board 1 to the second leftmost VL (labeled “VL2”) on the VP board using a second QSFP cable. Connect the top QSFP interface (labeled “VL2”) on the LT to the top VL on the VP board (labeled “VL1”) using a QSFP cable.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Vectoring Cabling Figure 274 Connect the MDF and first QSFP cable SLV LT board 6 SLV LT board 4 SLV LT board 2 SLV LT board 5 SLV LT board 3 SLV LT board 1 VP board 2 As clearly visible in Figure 274.

352 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . see Figure 276. Use a third QSFP cable to connect the top QSFP port “VL2” on SLV LT board 2 and connect it to “VL3” on the VP board.Vectoring Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 275 Connect the second QSFP cable 4 Again. SLV LT board 2 is an SLV board with two QSFP interfaces.

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Vectoring Cabling Figure 276 Connect the third QSFP cable 5 Connect the second (bottom) QSFP interface (labeled “VL1”) on SLV LT board 2 to “VL4” on the VP board using a fourth QSFP cable. see Figure 277. Figure 277 Connect the fourth QSFP cable Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 353 .

Connect Note — Whether the MDF cables are connected together first as a separate step or one by one when connecting each of the boards. Figure 278 Connect the fifth QSFP cable 8 Connect the QSFP cables to the remaining SLV LT boards in a similar manner (see Figure 279): • sixth QSFP cable between QSFP port “VL6” on the VP board and the QSFP port on SLV LT board 4 • seventh QSFP cable between QSFP port “VL7” on the VP board and the QSFP port on SLV LT board 5 • eighth QSFP cable between QSFP port “VL8” on the VP board and the QSFP port on SLV LT board 6 354 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . 7 Connect the (only) QSFP port on SLV LT board 3 to “VL5” on the VP board using another QSFP cable. whatever is most convenient in the cabling environment. is not relevant. see Figure 278.Vectoring Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 6 SLV LT boards 3 until 6 are SLV boards with one QSFP interface.

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Vectoring Cabling Figure 279 All MDF and QSFP cables connected Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 355 .

Vectoring Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 356 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

2 Installing Side Plates 14.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Installing Side Plates and Door 14 Installing Side Plates and Door 14.3 Installing Doors 14. in Figure 280 Side plate 2 1 Screw M4 20 2 Washer M4 20 3 For mounting the side plates on the universal rack.1 Introduction This chapter provides the procedures to install: • side plates • doors • key locks 14.2 Installing Side Plates The following items are required to equip a universal rack with 2 side plates (both left and right side): Table 43 Side Plate Fixing Items Description Quantity Item No. refer to Figure 280 Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 357 .4 Installing Key Lock 14.1 Introduction 14.

358 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . always remove the corner upright (item 4 in Figure 280 first.Installing Side Plates and Door HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 280 Mounting Right Side Plate of Universal Rack When mounting or dismounting the side plate. Each side plate is mounted with 5 screws and washers on the front and 5 on the side.1 Door Types One universal door type is available (code 3FE 20207 JC).3 Installing Doors 14.3. This door opens to the left and is closed by means of two door latch locks. 14.

Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 359 . At the bottom. the door fits over a rotation pin.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Installing Side Plates and Door 14.3. refer to Figure 282.2 Installing Doors Figure 281 Mounting of Rack Door Note — The frame ground of the rack must be connected to the door.

1 Nomenclature Figure 284 shows the nomenclature used in this section. the door is secured by a retractable hinge pin.Installing Side Plates and Door HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 282 Rotation Pin Rotation pin At the top. Figure 283 Retractable Hinge Pin Retractable hinge pin 14. refer to Figure 283. 14. 360 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .4.4 Installing Key Lock A key lock kit is available to replace the standard door latch locks by a key lock.

4.4. consists of: • two key locks • two keys 14.2 Key Lock Kit The key lock kit for door.4 Installation Procedure Proceed as follows to replace a standard latch lock with a key lock: Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 361 . 14.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Installing Side Plates and Door Figure 284 Nomenclature Door Latch Lock Key Lock Lever 14.3 Required Tools The following tool are required to replace a standard latch lock with a key lock: • Metric key nr.4. 19. code 3FE 25800 AA.

362 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . 19. Figure 286 Remove M16 Nut from Latch Lock 3 Remove the latch lock from the door.Installing Side Plates and Door HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Procedure 58 Replacing a Latch Lock With a Key Lock 1 Unscrew the M16 nut holding the latch lock onto the door with a metric key nr. Figure 285 Unscrew M16 Nut 2 Remove the M16 nut from the latch lock. 4 Remove the M16 nut from the key lock.

Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 363 . Figure 288 Key Lock Bushing 6 Remove the key and push the key lock through the door hole.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Installing Side Plates and Door Figure 287 Remove M16 Nut from Key Lock 5 Do one of the following: • When mounting the key lock in the top hole of the door: Twist the key lock bushing counterclockwise while holding the key. • When mounting the key lock in the bottom hole of the door: Twist the key lock bushing clockwise while holding the key.

19.Installing Side Plates and Door HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 289 Place Key Lock 7 Place the M16 nut before inserting the key lock bushing in the door hole. 8 Tighten the M16 nut with the metric key nr. 364 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . Figure 290 Place M16 Nut Note — Mind the horizontal orientation of the lever.

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Installing Side Plates and Door Figure 291 Tighten M16 Nut Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 365 .

Installing Side Plates and Door HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 366 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

the NIAT-A).e. 3HH-11206-AAAA-TQZZA.The pinning details are listed in chapter 17. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 367 . 15. i.a. i.2 Cables 15. In both cases. Note — Depending on the SFP and E1 cable used. i.1 E1 SFP interface The list of boards carrying E1 SFP interfaces and thus supporting the use of E1 SFP modules is documented in the7302 ISAM Product Information manual.e. supporting a set of (direct) E1 interfaces on the front panel.1 Introduction A number of boards on the 7302 ISAM support E1. 15.4.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL E1 Cabling 15 E1 Cabling 15. Depending on the external interfaces on the front panel of the specific board.2 RJ45 E1 interface Two types of LTs. are offered in this release.2 for more details on these.1.1 Introduction 15. see chapter 15.5. the interface is a standard RJ45 female shielded port and the cable to be used has a standard RJ45 connector and carries two E1 lines. • an SHDSL LT supporting E1 (s.1. see Chapter 11.a. the NSLT-D) and • an ISDN PRI LT supporting E1 (s. • over an E1 SFP module or • via a direct E1 interface. A number of E1 cables are offered.e. All E1 SFP modules supported on this product are documented in detail in the dedicated Unit Data Sheet (UDS). this can be done in two possible ways. it might be difficult to close the rack door (without specific rack adaptation or use of special fibers with angled connectors.1).3 Cabling Procedures 15.

1 below. using (some type of) E1 cables to connect the E1 lines to the board to the MDF (Procedures 60 and 61) or • The SHDSL LT will be used to transport the E1 or PRI (originating from a TDM CPE) over a single twisted-pair using TDM over G.2 Cables A number of different E1 cables can be ordered using the ordering code listed in Table 44.3. Table 44 E1 Cables Cable (type) Cable (type) Code(1) Open-ended E1 (connection) cable 2 E1 line cable with standard (straight) RJ45 connector 3FE 73097 xx 2 E1 line cable with angled RJ45 connector 3FE 68107 xx E1 splitter cable 1RJ45/2E1 to 2RJ45/1E1 cable = 2 E1 line cable with angled RJ45 3FE 67624 xx connector splitting into two individual E1 line cables with standard (straight) connector E1 interconnection cable 2 E1 line interconnection cable with standard (straight) RJ45 3FE 73098 AA connectors at both sides 368 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . Note — For an overview of all supported ISDN PRI and SHDSL LT boards on the 7302 ISAM in this release. Some cabling considerations are listed in chapter 15.SHDSL. Multiple (pairs of) boards can be installed in one shelf or a combination of stand-alone and combined cabling is possible. It is clear that. This will provide a significant reach extension compared to a native E1 and avoids disturbance in the xDSL binder. multiple cabling options are possible. Each of the individual cables carries two E1 lines and is described in more detail in a below subchapter.E1 Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Both boards types can be configured. • in stand-alone mode. 15. thus extending the loop length. depending on the customers needs. please refer to the 7302 ISAM Product Information manual. Interconnection the E1 ports between NSLT-D and NIAT-A will bring the PRI up to the NIAT-A for termination.

1 E1 cable with straight RJ45 connector Figure 292 shows an open-ended E1 cable with a straight RJ45 connector head. • one of the standard RJ45 E1 interface ports on the front panel of the board or • an E1 SFP (with an RJ45 connector) on the front panel of the board.5 and listed in Table 67. 15.1.2.2.2.2 respectively. 15. Each of the open-ended E1 cables has.1 and 15. The connector on both of those cables is also called a “combo connector” in this particular case since it does connect two individual E1 user lines. Note — All E1 cables/connectors offered by Nokia are shielded. The specific pinning of the E1 cables is described in chapter 17. • a (standard) RJ45 connector at the one side that can be plugged into (one of) the RJ45 port(s) on a board thus carrying two E1 user lines and • an open cable end on the other side to be connected to the MDF according to local installation practices or to any other E1 device.1 Open-ended E1 cable This cable type can be used to connect an E1 interface on a board (in a direct way or via an SFP) to the outside world (MDF or any other device). Figure 292 Open-ended E1 cable with straight RJ45 connector Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 369 .1. Two versions are available both with an RJ45 connector but with the connector head physically different. see chapters 15. It is a (standard) RJ45 connector to be plugged into (depending on the board). for more details.1.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL E1 Cabling Notes (1) xx stands for a variable variant in function of the cable lenght.2. see the below subchapters describing the individual cables.

5 and the detailed wire splitting is described in Table 68. to be plugged into individual E1 connectors outside the device. see Figure 294. it might be better to use the cables with the angled RJ45 connector. as described below or to use an alternative rack adaptation that will provide more space inside the rack doors. Different variants of this cable can be obtained. 15. see Table 162.2 E1 splitter cable The E1 splitter cable splits up the single cable containing two E1 lines into two individual cables each with one single E1 line. The specific pinning of this cable is described in chapter 17. Table 45 Cable length of 3FE 67624 xx Variant Cable length (m) Cable code AA 2 3FE 67624 AA (1 of 2) 370 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . 15. The specific pinning of the E1 cables is described in chapter 17.E1 Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Different variants of this cable can be obtained.2 E1 cable with angled RJ45 connector Figure 293 shows an open-ended E1 cable with an angled RJ45 connector head.5 and listed in Table 67. each with a different cable length.1. It has an angled RJ45 connector at the one side (M1) and two straight connectors at the other end (M2 and M3). each with a different cable length.2. To overcome this. Note — Especially when used in combination with an E1 SFP it might be that it becomes difficult to close the rack door when equipping (a number of) these cables. see Table 162. Figure 293 Open-ended E1 cable with angled RJ45 connector Different variants of this cable can be obtained. each with a different cable length.2. see Table 45.

5 and listed in Table 67.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL E1 Cabling Variant Cable length (m) Cable code AB 5 3FE 67624 AB AC 10 3FE 67624 AC AD 20 3FE 67624 AD AE 30 3FE 67624 AE (2 of 2) Figure 294 E1 splitter cable 15.3 E1 interconnection cable Connecting an E1 LT to an SHDSL board is to be done via one or more (up to four) E1 interconnection cables.2. The interconnection cable has two identical connectors (A and B in Figure 295). see Figure 295. The specific pinning of both E1 RJ45 connectors is described in chapter 17. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 371 . to be plugged into the identical ports of both LTs and has a fixed length of 20cm.

• cable a NELT-B LT at maximum capacity using 18 E1 (connection) cables in 18 E1 SFPs (see Procedure 60). • cable one (or more) NSLT-D LT(s) in stand-alone mode using (the maximum of) four E1 (connection) cables (see Procedure 61) per board to carry the E1 lines outside the system (over the MDF).3 Cabling Procedures This chapter provides the cabling procedures to. • cable one (or more) NIAT-A LT(s) in combination with one NSLT-D LT using (the maximum of) four E1 interconnection cables (see Procedure 62).E1 Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 295 E1 interconnection cable Note — When interconnecting an NSLT-D and NIAT-A. • cable one (or more) NIAT-A LT(s) in stand-alone mode using (the maximum of) four E1 (connection) cables (see Procedure 60) per board to carry the E1 lines outside the system (over the MDF). it is recommended that a Dust/EMI Cover be inserted into the cage assembly when no cable is connected. make sure that the cable is not extensively bent (bending radius must be > 10 cm). 15. the cable should not cross the pitch of an other LT. Caution 1 — In order to prevent contamination of the internal components and to optimize EMI performance. 372 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . thus extending the loop length. Caution 2 — When handling and installing the cable assemblies.

3. Figure 296 NELT-B 2E1-SFP Dimensioning To overcome this issue.1 NELT-B The 2E1-SFP is longer then a regular SFP and this causes rack-door interference on the NELT-B when installed in an ETSI rack. Figure 297 NELT-B 2E1-SFPs Cabling view Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 373 . it is recommended to use the angled E1 connector cables (see Figures 293 and 297).3.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL E1 Cabling 15.1 E1 Configuration Considerations 15.1. see Figure 296 for a view on the dimensioning.

a Insert the first E1 connection cable into the first E1 SFP port of the NELT-B (addressing E1 lines 1 and 2 and labeled 1 and 2. The same applies to the NSLT-D. 3 Connect (a maximum of) 36 E1 lines on the NELT-B. 2 Plug in (a maximum of 18) E1 SFPs into the SFP cages of the LT. more specifically in any LT slot of the system.2 NIAT-A and NSLT-D Multiple NIAT-A LTs can be equipped in an ISAM shelf. it is recommended. in case installed in another LT position (than LT1 or LT16) the E1- cables equipped on the NELT-B will cross the pitch of the board. b Insert the second E1 connection cable into the second E1 SFP port on the NELT-B (addressing E1 lines 3 and 4 and labeled 1 and 2. Procedure 59 2E1-SFP Cabling on the NELT-B 1 Remove the rack door if cabling a NELT-B in LT1 or LT16 to avoid rack-door interference at installation time. see Figure 298).E1 Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL But even when using these angled cables. see Figure 298). Due to the limited length (fixed 20cm) of the E1 interconnection cable.3. That’s why it is recommended to install the NELT-B in slot positions LT1 or LT16 to avoid the E1 cabling on a certain LT to cross the pitch towards the neighboring LT board. when interconnecting a NIAT-A and NSLT-D (see Procedure 62). equipping a maximum of 18 2E1-SFPs on one NELT-B board together with all associated cables remains challenging due to. One NIAT-A LT can only be combined with maximum one NSLT-D using a maximum of four interconnection cables. 15. to the outside world using (a maximum of) 18 E1 cables with angled connectors (see Figures 293 and 297) into the E1 SFPs starting top to bottom.1. depending on the customer’s requirements. meaning. in pairs of two. There is no restriction on the configuration the boards are used in. • the size of the SFP and • the space taken by the shielded cables. 374 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . However. to locate them next to each other. That might be OK depending on that neighboring LT so needs to be considered for sure. c etc. Both can be used in stand-alone mode or in combination with each other and different configurations can even be equipped in the same shelf.

Figure 299 Detailed view on E1 cables bundled together with straps 5 A fully cabled NELT-B looks as in Figures 300 (side view of NELT-B in LT1) and (front view of NELT-B in LT9). 4 Position the cables in such a way that they still fit inside the cable door and fixate them by strapping them together in small bundles strapped to each other. five or six see Figure 299. by example in groups of four. so there is no wrong way to connect the E1 interconnection cable. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 375 . Note 2 — There is only one way to plug in the RJ45 connector into the SFP. please look at the NELT-B Unit Data Sheet (UDS).HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL E1 Cabling Figure 298 Port labeling on front panel of NELT-B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note 1 — For more details on the external interfaces of the NELT-B LT board.

E1 Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 300 Side view of fully cabled NELT-B in LT1 Figure 301 Front view of fully cabled NELT-B in LT1 slot 376 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL E1 Cabling Figure 302 Front view of fully cabled NELT-B in LT9 slot 6 Route the bundle of E1 cables according to local practices. in pairs of two.2 depending on the other end E1 source to connect to) in the four E1 RJ45 ports (see Figure 303). to the outside world using four E1 cables (see chapters 15.2.1 and 15. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 377 . c The third RJ45 port of the NIAT-A (addressing E1 lines 5 and 6) and d The fourth/last (bottom) RJ45 port of the NIAT-A (addressing E1 lines 7 and 8).2.e. Procedure 60 Cabling a stand-alone NIAT-A 1 Connect the (maximum) eight E1 lines of the NIAT-A. a The first (top) RJ45 port of the NIAT-A (addressing E1 lines 1 and 2). b The second RJ45 port of the NIAT-A (addressing E1 lines 3 and 4). i.

see Figures 293 and 294. please look at the NIAT-A Unit Data Sheet (UDS). Note 2 — There is only one way to plug in the RJ45 connector into the port. Note 3 — When using the E1 cable with the straight connector (see Figure 292). it is only possible to route the cables up the shelf (as pictured in Figure 304). 2 Depending on the customer requirements. Note — Although this is not the recommended configuration. Figure 304 shows a configuration with the maximum capacity of NIAT-A boards in stand-alone mode in one single 7302 ISAM shelf. 378 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . so there is no wrong way to connect the E1 interconnection cable. in case cables with angled connectors are used.E1 Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 303 E1 RJ45 ports on front panel of NIAT-A (and NSLT-D) Note 1 — For more details on the external interfaces of the NIAT-A LT board. it is possible to route the cables up or down the shelf. However. whatever the customer prefers. multiple NIAT-A boards can be cabled in the same 7302 ISAM shelf. This configuration accounts for a maximum of 128 E1 lines (= 16*8) and uses a total of 64 E1 cables.

in pairs of two. a The first (top) RJ45 port of the NSLT-D (addressing E1 lines 1 and 2).e. i.2. to the outside world using four E1 cables (see chapters 15.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL E1 Cabling Figure 304 Stand-alone NIAT-A configuration (maximum capacity) 3 Route the x times four E1 (with x between 1 and 4) cables according to local practices.1 and 15.2. Note — Please note that in case of a maximum configuration as shown in figure 304 additional cable guiding steps (using straps) will be needed. b The second RJ45 port of the NSLT-D (addressing E1 lines 3 and 4).2 depending on the other end E1 source to connect to) in the four E1 RJ45 ports (see Figure 303). Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 379 . Procedure 61 Cabling a stand-alone NSLT-D 1 Connect the eight E1 lines of the bottom front cover of the NSLT-D.

E1 Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL c The third RJ45 port of the NSLT-D (addressing E1 lines 5 and 6) and d The fourth/last (bottom) RJ45 port of the NSLT-D (addressing E1 lines 7 and 8). Note 2 — There is only one way to plug in the RJ45 connector into the port. see Figures 293 and 294. Note 1 — For more details on the external interfaces of the NSLT-D LT board. 2 Depending on the customer requirements. However. please look at the NSLT-D Unit Data Sheet (UDS). re-insert) the neighboring LT without disturbing the E1 cables. Note — Routing the E1 cables of the NSLT-D should not cross the pitch of the board. whatever the customer prefers. in case cables with angled connectors are used. multiple NSLT-D boards can be cabled in the same 7302 ISAM shelf. It should be possible to handle (eg. it is only possible to route the cables up the shelf. 380 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . 3 Route the x times four E1 (with x between 1 and 4) cables according to local practices. Note 3 — When using an E1 cable with a straight connector (see Figure 292). so there is no wrong way to connect the E1 interconnection cable. it is possible to route the cables up or down the shelf.

see Figure 295) is plugged into which board. so there is no wrong way to connect the E1 interconnection cable. For more details on the external interfaces of the NIAT- A and NSLT-D boards. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 381 . This configuration accounts for a maximum of 64 E1 lines (= 8*8) and uses a total of 32 E1 interconnection cables and 8 SHDSL MDF cables. Note 1 — Although there is no restriction on which E1 port on the NSLT- D to connect to which E1/PRI port on the NIAT-A. please consult the dedicated Unit Data Sheets (UDS). see Figure 303. 3 Depending on the customer requirements. Note 5 — Unless a maximum capacity configuration is required. Note — Although this is not the recommended configuration. 2 Connect the SHDSL connector (at the top of the front plate) of the NSLT-D to the outside world using an MDF cable of type SHDSL (see Table 24 and Figure 187) according to the MDF cabling procedures as described in chapter 12. the only recommended configuration is one of the two boards immediately next to each other (neighboring slots). multiple NIAT-A/NSLT-D combinations can be cabled in the same 7302 ISAM shelf. Note 4 — Due to the short (fixed) length of the E1 interconnection cable (20cm).HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL E1 Cabling Procedure 62 Connecting a NIAT-A with an NSLT-D board using (a maximum of) four E1 interconnection cables 1 Connect (using an E1 interconnection cable. Note 2 — The E1 interface block on the NIAT-A and NSLT-D is identical. Figure 305 shows a configuration with the maximum capacity of NIAT-A/NSLT-D combinations in one single 7302 ISAM shelf. it is the most convenient to connect the ports with the same numbers. see Figure 295) a number (maximum 4) of the RJ45 E1 ports on both of these boards. there is no restriction in which slot to use for any of the two boards. Note 3 — There is only one way to plug in the RJ45 connector into the port and due to the symmetry of the cable it is also irrelevant which connector (A or B.

382 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .E1 Cabling HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Figure 305 Combined NIAT-A/NSLT-D configuration (maximum capacity) 4 Route the MDF cable(s) to the MDF. Refer to the MDF cabling guidelines. Note — Please note that in case of a maximum configuration as shown in figure 305 additional cable guiding steps (using straps) will be needed. Follow the procedures prescribed by local practices.

8 Wiring List of Intra-rack Cables from 48-line Splitter to 2x24-line ISDN LT 16.7 Wiring List for Metral-HDXS-72 Cable Connector 16. refer to chapter “MDF Cabling”.5 Wiring List for 48-line Intra-rack Cables 16. 16.9 Wiring List for 48-line Intra-rack Cables with CHAMP100 Connector and Two Metral-HDXS-24 Cable Connectors 16.4 Wiring List for CHAMP100 MDF Cable 16.1 Introduction This appendix provides the wiring lists for: • CHAMP50 MDF cable • CHAMP100 MDF cable • 48-line intra-rack cable (with 1 CHAMP100 and 2 CHAMP50 connectors) • 24-line intra-rack cable • 72-line intra-rack cable • 48-line to 2x24-line intra-rack cable • 48-line intra-rack cable (with 1 CHAMP100 and 2 Metral-HDXS-24 cable connectors) For cable coding and installation procedures.1 Introduction 16.3 Wiring List for CHAMP50 MDF Cable 16.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Wiring Lists for MDF Cable Connectors 16 Wiring Lists for MDF Cable Connectors 16. Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 383 .6 Wiring List for 24-line Intra-rack Cables 16.2 Legend 16.2 Legend This section lists the line and color designations used in this appendix.

2 Line Number Designations The following designations are used for the line number: • T: tip • R: ring • NC: not connected 16.2.2.Wiring Lists for MDF Cable Connectors HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 16. 384 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .1 Cable Colors The following designations are used for the cable colors: Table 46 Cable Color Designations Designation Color BK black BL blue BN brown GN green GY grey OR orange RD red VI violet WH white WH-BL white-blue YE yellow 16.3 Wiring List for CHAMP50 MDF Cable Table 47 shows the wiring list for the CHAMP50 MDF cable and the connector layout for the CHAMP50 connector.

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Wiring Lists for MDF Cable Connectors Table 47 Wiring List for CHAMP50 MDF Cable Pin Line Number Wire Color Connector Pin Line Number Wire Color Layout 26 01R BL_1 1 24R BN_1 27 01T WH_1 2 24T WH-BL_1 28 02R OR_1 3 23R GN_1 26 1 29 02T WH_1 4 23T WH-BL_1 30 03R GN_1 5 22R OR_1 31 03T WH_1 6 22T WH-BL_1 32 04R BN_1 7 21R BL_1 33 04T WH_1 8 21T WH-BL_1 34 05R GY_1 9 20R GY_1 35 05T WH_1 10 20T YE_1 36 06R BL_1 50 25 11 19R BN_1 37 06T RD_1 12 19T YE_1 38 07R OR_1 13 18R GN_1 39 07T RD_1 14 18T YE_1 40 08R GN_1 15 17R OR_1 41 08T RD_1 16 17T YE_1 42 09R BN_1 17 16R BL_1 43 09T RD_1 18 16T YE_1 44 10R GY_1 19 15R GY_1 45 10T RD_1 20 15T BK_1 46 11R BL_1 21 14R BN_1 47 11T BK_1 22 14T BK_1 48 12R OR_1 23 13R GN_1 49 12T BK_1 24 13T BK_1 50 NC 25 NC Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 385 .

Wiring Lists for MDF Cable Connectors HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 16. then the first 24 lines of the MDF cable must be used. Note — The cable pin-out of the first 24 lines of the 48-line MDF cable is identical to the cable pin-out of a 24-line MDF cable.4 Wiring List for CHAMP100 MDF Cable Table 48 shows the wiring list for the standard cross-talk CHAMP100 MDF cable. Table 48 Wiring List for CHAMP100 MDF Cable (standard cross-talk) Line Number Line Number Line Number Line Number Wire Color Wire Color Wire Color Wire Color Connector Number Layout Pin Pin Pin Pin 1 NC 26 NC 51 NC 76 NC 2 37T BK_2 27 36T BK_2 52 13T BK_1 77 12T BK_1 3 37R GN_2 28 36R OR_2 53 13R GN_1 78 12R OR_1 1 76 4 38T BK_2 29 35T BK_2 54 14T BK_1 79 11T BK_1 5 38R BN_2 30 35R BL_2 55 14R BN_1 80 11R BL_1 6 39T BK_2 31 34T RD_2 56 15T BK_1 81 10T RD_1 7 39R GY_2 32 34R GY_2 57 15R GY_1 82 10R GY_1 8 40T YE_2 33 33T RD_2 58 16T YE_1 83 09T RD_1 9 40R BL_2 34 33R BN_2 59 16R BL_1 84 09R BN_1 10 41T YE_2 35 32T RD_2 60 17T YE_1 85 08T RD_1 25 100 11 41R OR_2 36 32R GN_2 61 17R OR_1 86 08R GN_1 12 42T YE_2 37 31T RD_2 62 18T YE_1 87 07T RD_1 13 42R GN_2 38 31R OR_2 63 18R GN_1 88 07R OR_1 14 43T YE_2 39 30T RD_2 64 19T YE_1 89 06T RD_1 (1 of 2) 386 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 . If the 48-line MDF cable is used for a 24-line board. the other 24 lines must be left unconnected to the MDF.

• Table 49 shows the wiring list for the CHAMP100 connector (X3) • Table 50 shows the wiring list for the CHAMP50 connectors (X1 and X2) Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 387 .HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Wiring Lists for MDF Cable Connectors Line Number Line Number Line Number Line Number Wire Color Wire Color Wire Color Wire Color Connector Number Layout Pin Pin Pin Pin 15 43R BN_2 40 30R BL_2 65 19R BN_1 90 06R BL_1 16 44T YE_2 41 29T WH_2 66 20T YE_1 91 05T WH_1 17 44R GY_2 42 29R GY_2 67 20R GY_1 92 05R GY_1 18 45T WH-BL_2 43 28T WH_2 68 21T WH-BL_1 93 04T WH_1 19 45R BL_2 44 28R BN_2 69 21R BL_1 94 04R BN_1 20 46T WH-BL_2 45 27T WH_2 70 22T WH-BL_1 95 03T WH_1 21 46R OR_2 46 27R GN_2 71 22R OR_1 96 03R GN_1 22 47T WH-BL_2 47 26T WH_2 72 23T WH-BL_1 97 02T WH_1 23 47R GN_2 48 26R OR_2 73 23R GN_1 98 02R OR_1 24 48T WH-BL_2 49 25T WH_2 74 24T WH-BL_1 99 01T WH_1 25 48R BN_2 50 25R BL_2 75 24R BN_1 100 01R BL_1 (2 of 2) 16.5 Wiring List for 48-line Intra-rack Cables This section describes the wiring list for intra-rack cables from 48-line FD LTs to 48- line splitters or cut-through appliques.

Wiring Lists for MDF Cable Connectors HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Table 49 Wiring List for CHAMP100 Connector Line Number Line Number Line Number Line Number Wire Color Wire Color Wire Color Wire Color Connector Number Layout Pin Pin Pin Pin 1 NC 26 NC 51 NC 76 NC 2 37T BK_2 27 36T BK_2 52 13T BK_1 77 12T BK_1 3 37R GN_2 28 36R OR_2 53 13R GN_1 78 12R OR_1 1 76 4 38T BK_2 29 35T BK_2 54 14T BK_1 79 11T BK_1 5 38R BN_2 30 35R BL_2 55 14R BN_1 80 11R BL_1 6 39T BK_2 31 34T RD_2 56 15T BK_1 81 10T RD_1 7 39R GY_2 32 34R GY_2 57 15R GY_1 82 10R GY_1 8 40T YE_2 33 33T RD_2 58 16T YE_1 83 09T RD_1 9 40R BL_2 34 33R BN_2 59 16R BL_1 84 09R BN_1 10 41T YE_2 35 32T RD_2 60 17T YE_1 85 08T RD_1 25 100 11 41R OR_2 36 32R GN_2 61 17R OR_1 86 08R GN_1 12 42T YE_2 37 31T RD_2 62 18T YE_1 87 07T RD_1 13 42R GN_2 38 31R OR_2 63 18R GN_1 88 07R OR_1 14 43T YE_2 39 30T RD_2 64 19T YE_1 89 06T RD_1 15 43R BN_2 40 30R BL_2 65 19R BN_1 90 06R BL_1 16 44T YE_2 41 29T WH_2 66 20T YE_1 91 05T WH_1 17 44R GY_2 42 29R GY_2 67 20R GY_1 92 05R GY_1 18 45T WH-BL_2 43 28T WH_2 68 21T WH-BL_1 93 04T WH_1 19 45R BL_2 44 28R BN_2 69 21R BL_1 94 04R BN_1 20 46T WH-BL_2 45 27T WH_2 70 22T WH-BL_1 95 03T WH_1 21 46R OR_2 46 27R GN_2 71 22R OR_1 96 03R GN_1 22 47T WH-BL_2 47 26T WH_2 72 23T WH-BL_1 97 02T WH_1 23 47R GN_2 48 26R OR_2 73 23R GN_1 98 02R OR_1 24 48T WH-BL_2 49 25T WH_2 74 24T WH-BL_1 99 01T WH_1 25 48R BN_2 50 25R BL_2 75 24R BN_1 100 01R BL_1 388 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Wiring Lists for MDF Cable Connectors Table 50 Wiring List for CHAMP50 Connectors Connector X1 Connector X2 Connector Layout Connector Layout Line Number Line Number Line Number Line Number Wire Color Wire Color Wire Color Wire Color Number Pin Pin Pin Pin 26 01R BL_1 1 24R BN_1 26 25R BL_2 1 48R BN_2 27 01T WH_1 2 24T WH-BL_1 27 25T WH_2 2 48T WH-BL_2 26 1 26 1 28 02R OR_1 3 23R GN_1 28 26R OR_2 3 47R GN_2 29 02T WH_1 4 23T WH-BL_1 29 26T WH_2 4 47T WH-BL_2 30 03R GN_1 5 22R OR_1 30 27R GN_2 5 46R OR_2 31 03T WH_1 6 22T WH-BL_1 31 27T WH_2 6 46T WH-BL_2 32 04R BN_1 50 25 7 21R BL_1 32 28R BN_2 50 25 7 45R BL_2 33 04T WH_1 8 21T WH-BL_1 33 28T WH_2 8 45T WH-BL_2 34 05R GY_1 9 20R GY_1 34 29R GY_2 9 44R GY_2 35 05T WH_1 10 20T YE_1 35 29T WH_2 10 44T YE_2 36 06R BL_1 11 19R BN_1 36 30R BL_2 11 43R BN_2 37 06T RD_1 12 19T YE_1 37 30T RD_2 12 43T YE_2 38 07R OR_1 13 18R GN_1 38 31R OR_2 13 42R GN_2 39 07T RD_1 14 18T YE_1 39 31T RD_2 14 42T YE_2 40 08R GN_1 15 17R OR_1 40 32R GN_2 15 41R OR_2 41 08T RD_1 16 17T YE_1 41 32T RD_2 16 41T YE_2 42 09R BN_1 17 16R BL_1 42 33R BN_2 17 40R BL_2 43 09T RD_1 18 16T YE_1 43 33T RD_2 18 40T YE_2 44 10R GY_1 19 15R GY_1 44 34R GY_2 19 39R GY_2 45 10T RD_1 20 15T BK_1 45 34T RD_2 20 39T BK_2 46 11R BL_1 21 14R BN_1 46 35R BL_2 21 38R BN_2 47 11T BK_1 22 14T BK_1 47 35T BK_2 22 38T BK_2 48 12R OR_1 23 13R GN_1 48 36R OR_2 23 37R GN_2 49 12T BK_1 24 13T BK_1 49 36T BK_2 24 37T BK_2 50 NC 25 NC 50 NC 25 NC Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 389 .

390 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .6 Wiring List for 24-line Intra-rack Cables This section describes the wiring list for intra-rack cables from 24-line FD LTs to 24- line splitters or cut-through appliques. The tables below show the wiring list for the 48-line intra-rack cable: • Table 51 shows the wiring list for the CHAMP100 connector (X3) • Table 52 shows the wiring list for the CHAMP50 connectors (X1 and X2).Wiring Lists for MDF Cable Connectors HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 16.

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Wiring Lists for MDF Cable Connectors Table 51 Wiring List for CHAMP100 Connector Line Number Line Number Line Number Line Number Wire Color Wire Color Wire Color Wire Color Connector Number Layout Pin Pin Pin Pin 1 NC 26 NC 51 NC 76 NC 2 NC 27 NC 52 13T BK 77 12T BK 3 NC 28 NC 53 13R GN 78 12R OR 1 76 4 NC 29 NC 54 14T BK 79 11T BK 5 NC 30 NC 55 14R BN 80 11R BL 6 NC 31 NC 56 15T BK 81 10T RD 7 NC 32 NC 57 15R GY 82 10R GY 8 NC 33 NC 58 16T YE 83 09T RD 9 NC 34 NC 59 16R BL 84 09R BN 10 NC 35 NC 60 17T YE 85 08T RD 25 100 11 NC 36 NC 61 17R OR 86 08R GN 12 NC 37 NC 62 18T YE 87 07T RD 13 NC 38 NC 63 18R GN 88 07R OR 14 NC 39 NC 64 19T YE 89 06T RD 15 NC 40 NC 65 19R BN 90 06R BL 16 NC 41 NC 66 20T YE 91 05T WH 17 NC 42 NC 67 20R GY 92 05R GY 18 NC 43 NC 68 21T WH-BL 93 04T WH 19 NC 44 NC 69 21R BL 94 04R BN 20 NC 45 NC 70 22T WH-BL 95 03T WH 21 NC 46 NC 71 22R OR 96 03R GN 22 NC 47 NC 72 23T WH-BL 97 02T WH 23 NC 48 NC 73 23R GN 98 02R OR 24 NC 49 NC 74 24T WH-BL 99 01T WH 25 NC 50 NC 75 24R BN 100 01R BL Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 391 .

Wiring Lists for MDF Cable Connectors HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Table 52 Wiring List for CHAMP50 Connectors Connector X1 Connector X2 Line Number Line Number Line Number Line Number Wire Color Wire Color Wire Color Wire Color Connector Connector Number Layout Layout Pin Pin Pin Pin 26 19R BN 1 21R BL 26 07R OR 1 09R BN 27 19T YE 2 21T WH-BL 27 07T RD 2 09T RD 26 1 26 1 28 20R GY 3 NC 28 08R GN 3 NC 29 20T YE 4 NC 29 08T RD 4 NC 30 NC 5 22R OR 30 NC 5 10R GY 31 NC 6 22T WH-BL 31 NC 6 10T RD 32 18R GN 50 25 7 NC 32 06R BL 50 25 7 NC 33 18T YE 8 NC 33 06T RD 8 NC 34 NC 9 24R BN 34 NC 9 12R OR 35 NC 10 24T WH-BL 35 NC 10 12T BK 36 17R OR 11 23R GN 36 05R GY 11 11R BL 37 17T YE 12 23T WH-BL 37 05T WH 12 11T BK 38 15R GY 13 NC 38 03R GN 13 NC 39 15T BK 14 NC 39 03T WH 14 NC 40 16R BL 15 NC 40 04R BN 15 NC 41 16T YE 16 NC 41 04T WH 16 NC 42 NC 17 NC 42 NC 17 NC 43 NC 18 NC 43 NC 18 NC 44 14R BN 19 NC 44 02R OR 19 NC 45 14T BK 20 NC 45 02T WH 20 NC 46 NC 21 NC 46 NC 21 NC 47 NC 22 NC 47 NC 22 NC 48 13R GN 23 NC 48 01R BL 23 NC 49 13T BK 24 NC 49 01T WH 24 NC 50 NC 25 NC 50 NC 25 NC 392 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .

BLUE NC A-A-06 02 R A-A-07 OR A .BLUE 06 T A-A-11 RD A .BLUE NC A-A-03 05 R A-A-04 GY A .BLUE 05 T A-A-05 WH A .7 Wiring List for Metral-HDXS-72 Cable Connector This section describes the wiring list for the 72-line Metral-HDXS-72 cable connector.BLUE 01 T A-A-02 WH A .BLUE (1 of 7) Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 393 .F- A- A- 01 12 01 A- B- F- 01 1 A- -0 -A A- C 01 -12 A- C F 12 -01 2 -F A- -1 B- -1 -A A 2 C F- B- B- 12 A.-A F- 12 -01 B- C 1 -0 -F C C 2 -A -1 -1 -F 2 C Table 53 Wiring List for Metral-HDXS-72 Cable Connector Line Number Connector X Pin Color Bundle 01 R A-A-01 BL A .BLUE 02 T A-A-08 WH A .BLUE NC A-A-09 06 R A-A-10 BL A . Figure 306 Metral-HDXS-72 Cable Connector A- 01 F- A- 01 A- A- 01 -12 F.HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Wiring Lists for MDF Cable Connectors 16.-F- A 12 01 A- B A- B- B.C- 12 F.

BLUE 03 T A-B-03 WH A .BLUE 13 T A-C-05 BK A .BLUE NC A-B-04 07 R A-B-05 OR A .BLUE 04 T A-B-09 WH A .Wiring Lists for MDF Cable Connectors HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Line Number Connector X Pin Color Bundle NC A-A-12 NC A-B-01 03 R A-B-02 GN A .BLUE NC A-C-09 14 R A-C-10 BN A .BLUE 12 T A-D-09 BK A .BLUE 15 T A-D-06 BK A .BLUE NC A-C-03 13 R A-C-04 GN A .BLUE 14 T A-C-11 BK A .BLUE 09 T A-C-02 RD A .BLUE 09 R A-C-01 BN A .BLUE 10 T A-C-08 RD A .BLUE 07 T A-B-06 RD A .BLUE NC A-D-10 (2 of 7) 394 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .BLUE NC A-C-12 NC A-D-01 11 R A-D-02 BL A .BLUE NC A-C-06 10 R A-C-07 GY A .BLUE NC A-B-07 04 R A-B-08 BN A .BLUE 11 T A-D-03 BK A .BLUE 08 T A-B-12 RD A .BLUE NC A-D-07 12 R A-D-08 OR A .BLUE NC A-D-04 15 R A-D-05 GY A .BLUE NC A-B-10 08 R A-B-11 GN A .

BLUE NC A-F-04 23 R A-F-05 GN A .BLUE NC A-E-03 21 R A-E-04 BL A .BLUE 21 T A-E-05 WH-BL A .BLUE 24 T A-F-12 WH-BL A .ORANGE 29 T B-A-05 WH B .BLUE NC A-E-12 NC A-F-01 19 R A-F-02 BN A .HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Wiring Lists for MDF Cable Connectors Line Number Connector X Pin Color Bundle 16 R A-D-11 BL A .BLUE 16 T A-D-12 YE A .BLUE 17 T A-E-02 YE A .BLUE 19 T A-F-03 YE A .BLUE NC A-E-09 22 R A-E-10 OR A .BLUE NC A-E-06 18 R A-E-07 GN A .ORANGE NC B-A-06 26 R B-A-07 OR B .ORANGE 26 T B-A-08 WH B .BLUE 22 T A-E-11 WH-BL A .BLUE NC A-F-07 20 R A-F-08 GY A .BLUE 25 R B-A-01 BL B .ORANGE NC B-A-03 29 R B-A-04 GY B .BLUE 18 T A-E-08 YE A .ORANGE 25 T B-A-02 WH B .ORANGE NC B-A-09 (3 of 7) Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 395 .BLUE 23 T A-F-06 WH-BL A .BLUE 17 R A-E-01 OR A .BLUE 20 T A-F-09 YE A .BLUE NC A-F-10 24 R A-F-11 BN A .

ORANGE 33 T B-C-02 RD B .ORANGE 33 R B-C-01 BN B .ORANGE 27 T B-B-03 WH B .ORANGE (4 of 7) 396 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .ORANGE NC B-B-04 31 R B-B-05 OR B .ORANGE NC B-D-04 39 R B-D-05 GY B .ORANGE 34 T B-C-08 RD B .ORANGE NC B-B-10 32 R B-B-11 GN B .ORANGE 38 T B-C-11 BK B .ORANGE 30 T B-A-11 RD B .ORANGE NC B-D-07 36 R B-D-08 OR B .ORANGE NC B-B-07 28 R B-B-08 BN B .ORANGE NC B-C-03 37 R B-C-04 GN B .ORANGE NC B-C-06 34 R B-C-07 GY B .ORANGE 32 T B-B-12 RD B .ORANGE 35 T B-D-03 BK B .ORANGE NC B-A-12 NC B-B-01 27 R B-B-02 GN B .ORANGE 37 T B-C-05 BK B .Wiring Lists for MDF Cable Connectors HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Line Number Connector X Pin Color Bundle 30 R B-A-10 BL B .ORANGE NC B-C-12 NC B-D-01 35 R B-D-02 BL B .ORANGE 28 T B-B-09 WH B .ORANGE NC B-C-09 38 R B-C-10 BN B .ORANGE 31 T B-B-06 RD B .ORANGE 39 T B-D-06 BK B .

ORANGE NC B-E-09 46 R B-E-10 OR B .ORANGE 41 R B-E-01 OR B .ORANGE NC B-F-04 47 R B-F-05 GN B .ORANGE NC B-D-10 40 R B-D-11 BL B .GREEN NC C-A-06 50 R C-A-07 OR C .GREEN (5 of 7) Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 397 .ORANGE NC B-F-10 48 R B-F-11 BN B .ORANGE 47 T B-F-06 WH-BL B .ORANGE 48 T B-F-12 WH-BL B .GREEN NC C-A-03 53 R C-A-04 GY C .GREEN 53 T C-A-05 WH C .ORANGE NC B-E-12 NC B-F-01 43 R B-F-02 BN B .ORANGE 49 R C-A-01 BL C .ORANGE NC B-E-06 42 R B-E-07 GN B .GREEN 49 T C-A-02 WH C .ORANGE 45 T B-E-05 WH-BL B .ORANGE 44 T B-F-09 YE B .ORANGE 40 T B-D-12 YE B .ORANGE 42 T B-E-08 YE B .ORANGE NC B-F-07 44 R B-F-08 GY B .ORANGE 43 T B-F-03 YE B .ORANGE 46 T B-E-11 WH-BL B .HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Wiring Lists for MDF Cable Connectors Line Number Connector X Pin Color Bundle 36 T B-D-09 BK B .ORANGE 41 T B-E-02 YE B .ORANGE NC B-E-03 45 R B-E-04 BL B .

GREEN 62 T C-C-11 BK C .GREEN 54 T C-A-11 RD C .GREEN NC C-D-04 63 R C-D-05 GY C .GREEN 56 T C-B-12 RD C .GREEN NC C-B-04 55 R C-B-05 OR C .GREEN NC C-C-09 62 R C-C-10 BN C .GREEN NC C-B-07 52 R C-B-08 BN C .GREEN NC C-C-06 58 R C-C-07 GY C .GREEN NC C-A-09 54 R C-A-10 BL C .GREEN 57 T C-C-02 RD C .GREEN 63 T C-D-06 BK C .GREEN NC C-C-12 NC C-D-01 59 R C-D-02 BL C .GREEN NC C-C-03 61 R C-C-04 GN C .Wiring Lists for MDF Cable Connectors HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Line Number Connector X Pin Color Bundle 50 T C-A-08 WH C .GREEN 58 T C-C-08 RD C .GREEN 57 R C-C-01 BN C .GREEN NC C-B-10 56 R C-B-11 GN C .GREEN 59 T C-D-03 BK C .GREEN NC C-A-12 NC C-B-01 51 R C-B-02 GN C .GREEN 55 T C-B-06 RD C .GREEN 52 T C-B-09 WH C .GREEN 61 T C-C-05 BK C .GREEN (6 of 7) 398 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .GREEN 51 T C-B-03 WH C .

GREEN NC C-D-10 64 R C-D-11 BL C .GREEN 72 T C-F-12 WH-BL C .GREEN 68 T C-F-09 YE C .GREEN 67 T C-F-03 YE C .GREEN NC C-F-10 72 R C-F-11 BN C .GREEN NC C-F-04 71 R C-F-05 GN C .GREEN 66 T C-E-08 YE C .GREEN 65 T C-E-02 YE C .GREEN 64 T C-D-12 YE C .GREEN 70 T C-E-11 WH-BL C .HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Wiring Lists for MDF Cable Connectors Line Number Connector X Pin Color Bundle NC C-D-07 60 R C-D-08 OR C .GREEN 71 T C-F-06 WH-BL C .GREEN NC C-F-07 68 R C-F-08 GY C .GREEN 65 R C-E-01 OR C .GREEN 60 T C-D-09 BK C .GREEN NC C-E-06 66 R C-E-07 GN C .GREEN NC C-E-09 70 R C-E-10 OR C .GREEN NC C-E-12 NC C-F-01 67 R C-F-02 BN C .GREEN 69 T C-E-05 WH-BL C .GREEN NC C-E-03 69 R C-E-04 BL C .GREEN (7 of 7) Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 399 .

400 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09 .Wiring Lists for MDF Cable Connectors HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL 16.8 Wiring List of Intra-rack Cables from 48-line Splitter to 2x24-line ISDN LT The tables below show the wiring list for the 48-line intra-rack cable: • Table 54 shows the wiring list for the 24-line CHAMP100 connectors (X1 and X2) • Table 55 shows the wiring list for the 48-line CHAMP100 connector (X3).

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Wiring Lists for MDF Cable Connectors Table 54 Wiring List for the 24-line CHAMP100 Connector Line Number Line Number Line Number Line Number Wire Color Wire Color Wire Color Wire Color Connector Number Layout Pin Pin Pin Pin 1 NC 26 NC 51 NC 76 NC 2 NC 27 NC 52 13T BK 77 12T BK 3 NC 28 NC 53 13R GN 78 12R OR 1 76 4 NC 29 NC 54 14T BK 79 11T BK 5 NC 30 NC 55 14R BN 80 11R BL 6 NC 31 NC 56 15T BK 81 10T RD 7 NC 32 NC 57 15R GY 82 10R GY 8 NC 33 NC 58 16T YE 83 09T RD 9 NC 34 NC 59 16R BL 84 09R BN 10 NC 35 NC 60 17T YE 85 08T RD 25 100 11 NC 36 NC 61 17R OR 86 08R GN 12 NC 37 NC 62 18T YE 87 07T RD 13 NC 38 NC 63 18R GN 88 07R OR 14 NC 39 NC 64 19T YE 89 06T RD 15 NC 40 NC 65 19R BN 90 06R BL 16 NC 41 NC 66 20T YE 91 05T WH 17 NC 42 NC 67 20R GY 92 05R GY 18 NC 43 NC 68 21T WH-BL 93 04T WH 19 NC 44 NC 69 21R BL 94 04R BN 20 NC 45 NC 70 22T WH-BL 95 03T WH 21 NC 46 NC 71 22R OR 96 03R GN 22 NC 47 NC 72 23T WH-BL 97 02T WH 23 NC 48 NC 73 23R GN 98 02R OR 24 NC 49 NC 74 24T WH-BL 99 01T WH 25 NC 50 NC 75 24R BN 100 01R BL Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 401 .

Wiring Lists for MDF Cable Connectors HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL

Table 55 Wiring List for the 48-line CHAMP100 Connector
Line Number

Line Number

Line Number

Line Number
Wire Color

Wire Color

Wire Color

Wire Color
Connector
Number

Layout
Pin

Pin

Pin

Pin
1 NC 26 NC 51 NC 76 NC

2 37T BK 27 36T BK 52 13T BK 77 12T BK

3 37R GN 28 36R OR 53 13R GN 78 12R OR
1 76
4 38T BK 29 35T BK 54 14T BK 79 11T BK

5 38R BN 30 35R BL 55 14R BN 80 11R BL

6 39T BK 31 34T RD 56 15T BK 81 10T RD

7 39R GY 32 34R GY 57 15R GY 82 10R GY

8 40T YE 33 33T RD 58 16T YE 83 09T RD

9 40R BL 34 33R BN 59 16R BL 84 09R BN

10 41T YE 35 32T RD 60 17T YE 85 08T RD
25 100
11 41R OR 36 32R GN 61 17R OR 86 08R GN

12 42T YE 37 31T RD 62 18T YE 87 07T RD

13 42R GN 38 31R OR 63 18R GN 88 07R OR
14 43T YE 39 30T RD 64 19T YE 89 06T RD

15 43R BN 40 30R BL 65 19R BN 90 06R BL

16 44T YE 41 29T WH 66 20T YE 91 05T WH

17 44R GY 42 29R GY 67 20R GY 92 05R GY

18 45T WH-BL 43 28T WH 68 21T WH-BL 93 04T WH

19 45R BL 44 28R BN 69 21R BL 94 04R BN

20 46T WH-BL 45 27T WH 70 22T WH-BL 95 03T WH

21 46R OR 46 27R GN 71 22R OR 96 03R GN

22 47T WH-BL 47 26T WH 72 23T WH-BL 97 02T WH
23 47R GN 48 26R OR 73 23R GN 98 02R OR

24 48T WH-BL 49 25T WH 74 24T WH-BL 99 01T WH

25 48R BN 50 25R BL 75 24R BN 100 01R BL

402 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Wiring Lists for MDF Cable Connectors

16.9 Wiring List for 48-line Intra-rack Cables with
CHAMP100 Connector and Two
Metral-HDXS-24 Cable Connectors
This section describes the wiring list for 48-line intra-rack cables with one
CHAMP100 connector and two Metral-HDXS-24 cable connectors.
• Table 56 shows the wiring list for the CHAMP100 connector (A)
• Table 57 shows the wiring list for the 24-line Metral-HDXS-24 cable connector B
• Table 58 shows the wiring list for the 24-line Metral-HDXS-24 cable connector C
Table 56 Wiring List for CHAMP100 Connector
Line Number

Line Number

Line Number

Line Number
Wire Color

Wire Color

Wire Color

Wire Color
Connector
Number

Layout
Pin

Pin

Pin

Pin
1 NC 26 NC 51 NC 76 NC

2 37T BK_2 27 36T BK_2 52 13T BK_1 77 12T BK_1
3 37R GN_2 28 36R OR_2 53 13R GN_1 78 12R OR_1
1 76
4 38T BK_2 29 35T BK_2 54 14T BK_1 79 11T BK_1

5 38R BN_2 30 35R BL_2 55 14R BN_1 80 11R BL_1
6 39T BK_2 31 34T RD_2 56 15T BK_1 81 10T RD_1

7 39R GY_2 32 34R GY_2 57 15R GY_1 82 10R GY_1

8 40T YE_2 33 33T RD_2 58 16T YE_1 83 09T RD_1

9 40R BL_2 34 33R BN_2 59 16R BL_1 84 09R BN_1

10 41T YE_2 35 32T RD_2 60 17T YE_1 85 08T RD_1
25 100
11 41R OR_2 36 32R GN_2 61 17R OR_1 86 08R GN_1
12 42T YE_2 37 31T RD_2 62 18T YE_1 87 07T RD_1

13 42R GN_2 38 31R OR_2 63 18R GN_1 88 07R OR_1

14 43T YE_2 39 30T RD_2 64 19T YE_1 89 06T RD_1

15 43R BN_2 40 30R BL_2 65 19R BN_1 90 06R BL_1

16 44T YE_2 41 29T WH_2 66 20T YE_1 91 05T WH_1

17 44R GY_2 42 29R GY_2 67 20R GY_1 92 05R GY_1

18 45T WH-BL_2 43 28T WH_2 68 21T WH-BL_1 93 04T WH_1

19 45R BL_2 44 28R BN_2 69 21R BL_1 94 04R BN_1

(1 of 2)

Issue: 09 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA 403

Wiring Lists for MDF Cable Connectors HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL

Line Number

Line Number

Line Number

Line Number
Wire Color

Wire Color

Wire Color

Wire Color
Connector
Number

Layout
Pin

Pin

Pin

Pin
20 46T WH-BL_2 45 27T WH_2 70 22T WH-BL_1 95 03T WH_1

21 46R OR_2 46 27R GN_2 71 22R OR_1 96 03R GN_1

22 47T WH-BL_2 47 26T WH_2 72 23T WH-BL_1 97 02T WH_1

23 47R GN_2 48 26R OR_2 73 23R GN_1 98 02R OR_1

24 48T WH-BL_2 49 25T WH_2 74 24T WH-BL_1 99 01T WH_1

25 48R BN_2 50 25R BL_2 75 24R BN_1 100 01R BL_1

(2 of 2)

404 3HH-11990-AAAA-RJZZA Issue: 09

HARDWARE INSTALLATION MANUAL Wiring Lists for MDF Cable Connectors

Table 57 Wiring List for 24-line Metral-HDXS-24 Cable Connector B

Pin Line Wire Connector Pin Line Wire Color
Number Color Layout Number

A1 1R BL D1

A2 1T WH D2 11R BL

A3 D3 11T BK

D
C
E

B
A
F
A4 5R GY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
D4

A5 5T WH D5 15R GY

A6 D6 15T YE

A7 2R OR D7

A8 2T WH D8 12R OR

A9 D9 12T BK
A10 6R BL D10

A11 6T RD D11 16R BL

A12 D12 16T YE

B1 E1 17R OR
B2 3R GN E2 17T YE

B3 3T WH E3

B4 E4 21R BL

B5 7R OR